Home

Bristol OpenEnterprise For Beginners

1. ARCHIVE FILE S In addition you need to choose at what percentage of a full log file that you will generate the archive file Archive files must always be smaller than the log file otherw
2. When LOG FILE is some percentage full typically 70 90 that amount of data is copied all at once into an ARCHIVE FILE for long term storage
3. Sp ig a Display 1 that a appears when you i start t the Desktop asasan 92 le 2 Adding a an ere m View to the DeSKtOP wn eae 9 6 le 3 Creating an OE Desktop that Includes Menu Items for ie aera 5 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your System iia eee Why Establish a Security Policy ae ne nT ene ee eee eT ere aT reer wee nearer er rere Ua What are Users and EAP e REANA PEA E ME ERTEN AEEA ET PE ETE EE ET R dE ai the cavemen Configuration Tool areas LETINE INNE PEII NAAA A ARE E TA 10 5 Creating Groups sccancresconncevexawarsras P N E AEN AAE A EE A E A Choosing Application Tokens for ot Group NPE EEEE EEA EPEE PENETER 10 12 Choosing Token Groups l EET E AEE E AET eee Choosing File Tokens OPC Tokens aii Casom Toleti 10 15 Modifying a Group MERER OEA PEIA EPE O EEA EE AA PA A AEE e C L En EEEE EEE EEEE EEE Ei S Modifying a Hie raana aana i iaa Taa eria AOE anaia Ta iaa aeniei 10 17 Creating a user inside ofa group EP EEIE REE A TEEPE A T AEE E TTE l Assigning a User to an existing Group sssssssesesersssesssssssssssssessreee TEPATE PE 10 18 Dividing the Database up Into Access areas OPTIONAL malonate Assigning Objects Data To Particular Access areas cc ccccccceeeeeseetteeeeeeeesssstttteeeeeeees 10 22 Allow Users Access to Particular Access areas scescrsiscererisnomiceravimeimmaninenmenenin 10 23 Configuring Security for Tables and Views
4. Keep For At Least Generations Maximum Unsaved Data 10 Generations v Log Directory C History Log Files Specify the location where the log file will be stored on disk OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration Specify th e Dataset Configuration Archive Configuration location where Timed Archive archive files ID Description Stat Time Repeat Interval should be saved Check Auto Archive and specify when the archive file should be generated based Deets on the log file size Archive Directories Check the Maximum Online Archives box and specify how many i archive files you want Archive When 90 percent of the Leff Hle has not beep Srchived to keep accessible Online Archives C Histon Arcph iles C Offline Archives Auto Archive _ Automatically Ortifie Archives Maxiffum Online Archives 15 Select Archive Cataloging Click on OK when finished Archive Cataloguing 6 36 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Click on Next gt Logging Group Define Datasets The Dataset 1s now defined Click on Fics chee ng heel geen eae emia ERE EE A Next gt in the Logging Group Define ee ee ee Datasets dialog box Raw Tiggered on column readvale T m Step 5 Rename the Internal Table Used to Hold This Dataset Optional On
5. Flash of the tank level graphic cinch duals Pick Default Pick Now we can add dynamic capability to them To do this click on Dynamics gt Actions gt _ Location Slider The Property Inspector dialog box will appear Now that the triangular pointer and the process point have been grouped together choose the Location Slider menu option OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 27 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 6 Complete entries in the Property Inspector dialog box as follows e Drag the value representing the setpoint signal into the Data Source field This is the same signal value you used for the process point in step 3 e Choose the Slider option e Determine how you want data to be updated at the RTU by the setpoint control We recommend you choose Tracking because this will cause the change to be written only when the operator releases the mouse at the desired setpoint If you choose Continuous the data will continually be written to the RTU as you move the mouse this can impose a burden on your system communications if you are using radios for example because OpenEnterprise will initiate a new communication transaction for each incremental move of the mouse If you choose Detent you can specify an incremental value after which data will be written to the RTU mouse changes which are less than that increment will not be sent
6. Ae Cancel Apply Help 5 48 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process In the Set Aliases dialog box use the Aliases button to select the alias tanknum which should be the only one currently defined tanknum will be copied into the Alias Name field Then enter the number 1 in the Alias Definition field and click on the Add button The pair tanknum and 1 will be copied into the center box of the dialog box Now enter 2 in the Alias Definition field and click on Add Repeat this process until all 8 tanks have alias definitions which go with tanknum Use the Aliases button to choose among the aliases for the display tanknum should be the only one currently defined a Local Aliases Configuration x l Alas Hame Hias Definition tanknum 2 Aliases z Remove Change Import E sport Tags Menu Apply To Entire Display 7 0 Set Aliases Hrom File f Set Aliases Directly cared eb Enter a value for the alias for example 1 for tank1 in the Alias Definition field and click on the Add button Then repeat that for every other tank Click on OK and exit the Property Inspector as usual Go into Runtime Mode OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 49 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process In Runtime Mode a pushbutton now appears called Cho
7. Resort Template INg x to create or select a template file the Report Template Name must first be specified Wwhen creating a Hae ila it will be saved to the Default Template File Location and will be grven the name a the Renia ate object oe Description ne minute flow data for the day File The name and location of the template file can be altered by pressing the Edit button and performing a Save As within Excel A Directoy it Now click on Create and Microsoft Excel will be started automatically In addition the OpenEnterprise plug in will be added to the menu bar in Excel Before you can begin working with the plug in several report properties must be defined first 11 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Report Properties Data Service This page lets you define the default name of the Data Service for your OpenEnterprise Server if you don t know what a service is please refer to Chapter 4 If you are using redundant OpenEnterprise Servers you must specify the data service for each one You can do this by listing the server names separated by commas e g SERVER_A rtrdb1 SERVER _B rtrdb1 NOTE You can override the default data service when making individual queries if your report will include data from multiple OE Servers This is discussed later in this chapter You should click on Test Connection to verify that the Reporting package can access th
8. 0 KIPEA EATE AATA PE PPIE PETT E 10 24 ommon Socuriiy Taske Tor USCIS seen erent ire ere rT teens Peer nni iias LO Logne Ono e ada tee ees e Tp iT tio oT asp anes entonreteenroemnniciasieeomtacaieken een Le Changing Your Password drrreesccespersesiexwenaccnns PAA PE AANE A A A ATA l Common Security Tasks for Administrators EPEE PETE EE AE A T E A e Removing a Use Disabling a User s A A een 10 29 Aore n HR k i ee ppc in a Controllers EEE ETER EEE EE EE TESE es 31 Security in Network 3000 series Controllers APEEP NE AA TEA TE 10 31 Doe Tie Ee o rna NNE S T T EN EN E A E Me 2 Network asipo UDP ai Ti P Soketi OTE PEPEE TIPET PEPE toe Windows Security PEEP EIE EIENEN EEE EEEIEE A AIENEA E E EEE A ETS Virus Protection for Yot Wort kstations Searle heaton eis occa 10 32 Firewall Software For Your Networks c cccccccesecccccceeesecccceeeessecceeseeeeeecseeeaes Physical Security ee ee ee ee re er vi 33 Networked Surveillance of Remote Sieg using ControlWave SIETEN ET ee ry Maintain Current D EEE ETE E TEEPEE EP E E E A ee eae meer l Human Factors EPEE E ATE TE IEE OEI IEE AE EE EE EE E Chapter 11 Creating ee iene APOE AE A A E A ii fe What are pOr lo saicecscusiesiennaraiestversancensnsleabeveblciewscanosrnstentnaiegetbeiesttesiere 11 1 Before You Begin E IAEE PEA ead E APEEP EIE PIEP ores i Step 1
9. Line Color Line Width Line Style lo Toggle Fill 2 Toggle Freeze E Font 5 Property Inspector Go mu Eu Edit Symbol i ane S j oca pee D M Edit Connections WOOO Choose the scope of the change in this case we want the change to affect multiple files Update Shared Objects Preserve W Object Dimensions Cancel Gotation Angle M T t Label Help Dynymic Tag W Alase Choose parts of the object you DON T want changed if any Click here to specify the file s to be changed NOTE Once you have completed updating the shared objects in your display s if you can save the new version of the symbol in the symbol library by saving it as if it was a new symbol The old version will still remain in the symbol library unless you delete it 5 44 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Using Aliasing to allow you to re use the Same Objects With Different Data From the Database Youll recall that we talked about OPC tags previously They contain the information that links the dynamic objects in your displays with the actual data values driving them in the OE Database Machine Database Name Name OE Server IP socket Signal Name BristolBabcock BristolOPC Server oent1 rtrdb1 realanalog name char RPC4 TANK8 LEVEL value float OPC Server Name Source Table from the OE Database The OPC tags are stored in y
10. Menu E System Overview Next choose Load File in the Action list box Direct Invoke C Insert Before Parent Me Command Target Bristol OpenEnterprise Display v Enable Disable Netion Load File v Optionally you can call up the Caption dialog box and enter a winda Name Main Display name that will appear in the title No P3 x bar of the window for this display Finally click on the Configure button When you have finished completing these fields click on Use this button to navigate the Configure button The Load file dialog box will to the desired file via the Open File dialog box appear 3 Load file e Specify the path and file name of the display you want to be activated by this menu selection Alternatively you can use a Path the button to locate the desired display and select it in the Open File dialog box Always Reload This File _ OpenEnterprise for Beginners 9 13 Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop Click on OK when you ve finished Congratulations You ve just created your first menu item Now you ve got a menu item for calling up the Overview display Let s say that you also have three more displays that relate to water filtration units called filter1 filter2 and filter3 If you want to have menu items at the top of the menu hierarchy for each of the filters you could create them exactly a
11. Message Basel on LA Loewi Vahedi in the Dat tlc 5 31 ole ei 6 ngi ing nA Color of A Pump Based on a a be TEE a 34 ple 7 pe a Overview Display MEE E E E E E eo 8 KOW l amnes EEEIEE E PIR E AP N E EE ES ee pasate 5 4 Saving Your Own Symbols ir in ie Je Symbol Library a h d Updating Obje ects s through Share a PA PE ENA EA AE A TI T 42 Using jeer to sallow you tor re use iie Sai om the Database sided akan EE se 45 Tips For Planning oe Hannu eae iat HMD BE esas EEM ETA Tee Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data PIEI ER EIAI PANEI RNEER OT o What is ee a rues er a eee EAT ee E E 5 How i 1S vn Historian EC a es Defining a Logging e a A A 4 Choosing the Source Table EPET EPEE TEPPET IAT EARTE AETR s Figuring out how often you want to a the Gn ee PNI EE Pern E oem E TE 2 Assigning individual records to the logging group fatten EAE PE Vinita Choosing Columns to be logged and calculations to be performed if any 0 6 Choosing Columns For Logging arene 6 0 Decide what calculations if any you 1 want to o perform o on aie logged d dati ETERN e F Specifying characteristics of the log file and archive files EIE EA E apeciymg ihe sone d Daa Tra LOr T E ec pa 10 mining the Buffer Size and Number of Buffers to ba aedi in dhe on fie 6 10 Deciding When to Generate An Archive File eer nena iak
12. Alarm Client Acknowledge Acknowledge All OE Desktop Change a Windows File Close Windows Exit Desktop Move Menu or Toolbar Open OE Alarm Banner Open OE Alarm Client Open OE Alarm Printer Open OE Control Display Open OE Graphic View Open OE Notes Client Open OE Trend View Exit Application OE Graphics GenTray AutoStart GenTray Autostop Menu Display Back Forward Menu File Open Menu Help Functions Menu Zoom Functions Pick Display Back Forward Pick Launch Application Pick Load Display Pick Popup Window Pick Run Script Start Application Tab Load Display Notes Client Forward New Note View Trend Client Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Out Full Zoom to 100 Zoom to 150 Zoom to 25 Zoom to 250 Zoom to 50 Zoom to 75 Zoom to Custom Zoom Undo Again the choice is up to you Make sure however that you have your staff try to do their various jobs using their assigned tokens and check that they are able to do everything they need to do OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 13 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Choosing Token Groups As we said before a token group is nothing more than a bundle of several tokens The Token Group page lets you award several tokens at the same time rather than choosing them individually from the Application Token page In general ADMINISTRATORS and ENGINEERS would have all of the token groups in their Include List while OPERATORS would have none
13. As long as the variable remains in the normal range between 40 0 and 70 0 C no more alarm messages will be generated Logical Alarms Logical alarms are a much easier concept to understand Logical alarms are used because there are no limits or deadbands involved These for variables that report alarms are only generated when a Boolean variable or things like logical signal enters its In alarm state A return to normal message is generated when the variable returns to its e valves OPENING or opposite non alarm state CLOSING e pumps STARTING or The user chooses which state is the in alarm state when STOPPING they configure the alarm Either the alarm is generated when e switches relays or the signal or variable becomes TRUE or the alarm is electrical contacts generated when the alarm becomes FALSE A typical example for a logical alarm would be an electrical switch which turns ON in the event of a compressor power failure When the switch turns ON we want to generate an alarm When the power is restored the switch turns OFF and a return to normal message will be generated OpenEnterprise for Beginners 8 3 Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms Change of State Alarms Change of state alarms are similar to logical alarms in that Change of state they are used with logical signals or Boolean variables The alarms difference is that they only enter an alarm state when they change A change of state from e
14. alarmconditionlookup scada web rtrdb1 alarmconditionlookup_table scada web rtrdb1 4i E Use scroll bar to bring more table names into view 4 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Attribute Detail Window The Attribute Detail Window occupies the lower right hand corner of the Database Explorer main screen It displays the attributes i e column names of the tables that have been selected in the Database Tree Control Window The format of the window can vary see Changing the Appearance of Detail Windows Clicking on a table in the Database Tree Control Window causes a list of all the attributes columns belonging to that table to be displayed in the Attribute Detail Window BEIE Fe L EELEE Explorer File View Options Window Help scada web rtrdbi fo z th alarnmailForrmat alarmpagingformat alarmpagingrecipient alarmpattern E alarmpriorityblock z T Base Table De Iil alarmpriorityblock_table alarmrecipient alarmredirection alarmredirection_table alarmredirectiontimer alarmresponseaction X alarmresponseactionem SQ alarmresponseactiongra alarmsummary alarmsumimary_table alarmsuppressiontimer archivebackupiterm archivebackupitem_table archivebackupset sccessarea acknowledged amp acknowledgedtimne amp acknowledgedtimedstoffset amp alarmcondition amp alarmlimit amp alarmtext amp attribute amp hase
15. all pens in the trend So if auto scaling is still active do we need to There are even some things that hl be change it for the individual pen or for the entire Set in two places once J or the entire trend Good question Auto scaling applies to Ir end and once for an individual pen the Y axis so it depends on which Y axis you Settings that apply to all pens in the trend want to disable auto scaling are called common because they are shared in common At this point you re probably saying Wait How can there be more than one Y axis e Settings that apply only to the current That s a good question The OE Trend control pen are set in the Pen Configuration allows you to optionally have both a common dialog box Y axis which is shared by every pen in the trend and also to optionally display an e Settings that apply to all pens in the individual Y axis for each pen in the trend This trend i e common settings are set in may sound confusing to you but if you have the OE Trend Client Control multiple pens in your trend and each signal has Properties dialog box a different range you really might want to display a separate Y axis for each one so you e Ifa particular setting appears in both can see the actual range for each signal of these places the pen setting typically overrides the common setting for that pen Now we only have one pen in this particular trend and while we could have set it so that it had an
16. cance Hee OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 35 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Because data therefore isn t being logged at a fixed rate we measure the amount of data in generations One change of a signal is considered to be one generation Specify the log file folder where the log file will be generated When you re finished with this page click on the Archive Configuration tab In the Archive Configuration page specify the drive and directory that will hold the archive files Check Auto Archive and specify a percentage of how full the log file should be before you generate an archive file Specify how many archives you want on line accessible by the user Also make sure Archive Cataloging is checked this aides in archive file management Click on OK when finished Choose Collect Data When Triggered since we re logging by exception OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration ed C h eck th e GG 35 Dataset Configuration Archive Configuration By Col u m n box 5 and choose Readvalue as the column which triggers logging if it changes Fed From Dataset Description Collect Data by Polling UTC When logging by exception instead of time generations of changes are saved For example 5 changes to a signal would require 5 generations Collect Dag When Triggered By Column readvalue
17. ssseccccccssssssccceccccsssssececosossssseee 1 1 How does Mie Dathe WOK eesriie 1 3 Learning the Real Database Lingo Attributes Records and Objects 0 1 3 What sorts of things are saved in the OE database sissrsiisissssiisieisisicenariisiiesrinsiencinnn 1 5 How does data get from the Controller Network into the OE database ce eeecceeeeees 1 6 PR a sey cerca etree een eereeecapeeatnecaue aeons l 7 CoE ice 15 ar E E mrrrrere tr perr ree te reer tty ereere Tse ttr Ter rr rte ter l 7 Kepo Dy Fe RBE sicrie rensie ee diane eter 1 8 Array and Archive Collection via Open BSI Converter sssoeeessssssssoeerrssssssseeerrssss 1 8 How do we view the contents of the OE Database sssneeeeeessssssssssssssseeeeerrresssssssssssssseesees 1 9 W er can I gelimnoro AO oni nsceansenmasermaarenernsiamnnenieceismaniasinensineeaeiweaiesn 1 9 Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE ssssssssseccccccccssssccecocccsssecececosossssseee 2 1 Preparing Your Control Strategy Files to work with OE esssssssseeeessssssssserrsssssssesceressssss 2 1 Identifying Which Signals in the Control Strategy File Should be Collected by OE 2 2 Preparing an ACCOL Load to work with OE ssssesssssssssseeeressssssseeeeesssssssseeressssssssseeressssss 2 4 Specifying an Alarm Signal in ACCOL Workbench sssseeeessssssssseeerssssssssseerrsssssssees 2 4 Specifying a Global Signal in ACCOL Workbe
18. OpenEnterprise for Beginners 2 1 Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE For ControlWave series controllers the control strategy 1s written in any one of five 5 IEC 61131 3 languages using a program called ControlWave Designer IEC 61131 3 is an international standard for process control programming languages ControlWave series Controller The resulting file called a ControlWave project is downloaded into the ControlWave controller The primary structure for storing a data value temperature reading valve position etc in the ControlWave project is called a variable and is equivalent to a signal in a 33xx controller NOTE When you are actually working with OE no distinction is made between the name signal and the name variable they are all referred to as signals Some other manufacturers use the word tag to refer to the same thing These three words tag signal and variable are often used interchangeably TIP Adopt a Consistent Naming Convention When you re coming up with names for ACCOL signals or ControlWave variables it will make life a lot easier if you use a consistent naming convention that describes the data held in the signals The reason is that if you use consistent names it will help you if you ever need to use SQL commands SQL commands aren t required when you re first setting up OpenEnterprise but many advanced users like to use them It is also useful if you a
19. The user may configure a method by which published reports can be deleted _ Purge Reports Credentials Alarm Conditions Delete published Reports once they have been successfully distributed Delete Published Report following distribution regardless of any errors Delete old Reports after B Days _ Delete Report Catalog entry on deletion Remove Report Plug Ins from the Published Report Click on Next gt OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 15 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Report Configuration Formats t Report Configuration At this point we haven t a a defined any formats SO just This page allows the user to associate the Report with the Formats in which it will be published click on Next gt Please select the Formats that you wish to associate with this Report If no explicit Formats are defined or the Disable Selected Formats check box is E ee E E to the default directory defined for the Report on the Publishing configuration Available Formats Selected Formats Schedules Credentials Alarm Conditions _ Disable Publishing Click on Next gt Report Configuration Schedule Once again we don t have any schedules configured yet so just click on Next gt tE Report Configuration Report Configuration Schedules This page allows the user to asssociate this Report with any previously configured Report Schedules Schedules Please select t
20. When this number of Minimum Age is useful if days expires the user you want to have users change will be forced to Change password tens Password Age their passwords on a regular their password da Characters pee oo basis but you don t want them This i fe santa Angee to change them too often For ee optional You can example if you want a user specify the minimum and Account Lock Out Auto Log Ou to change their password every maximum number of E hack Out Duration Minutes C hgs Out Fixed Period In Minutes 30 days you wouldn t want them C Log Qut Inactivity Period In Minutes characters required to Number Failed Log On Attempts Beftxe Lock Out make a valid password changing it back to their original password after a few days so you would set a value of say 21 days to force them to use their new password for at least 3 weeks Adply PeNDatabase Connection Cang Help This is a limit on the amount of time a user will be locked out of their account if they fail on successive login attempts Check this to log off a user automatically after the specified period of time Check this to log off a user automatically This is the maximum number of failed login after the specified period of inactivity attempts allowed before lockout If a user cannot provide the correct username password combination after this number of login attempts they will b
21. amp callaukarea amp calloutdisplay amp cleared amp clientkype amp condition alarmsurmmary alarmsummary alarmsummary alarmsummar alarmsummary alarmsummary alarmsummary alarmsummary alarmsummary alarmsummary alarmsummary alarmsummary alarmsummay alarmsunfary scada webirtrdbl scada webirtrdbl scada webirtrdbl scada webirtrdbl scada webirtrdbl char bool datetime integers ecada webirtrdbl scada webirtrdb scada web rydbi scada welfrtrdb1 scadagtebirtrdbl scada webirtrdbl cada webirtrdb1 scada webirtrdbl scada webirtrdbl archivebackupset_table a amp currenteventindex alarngaGrimary scada web rtrdbi integer l srehiuar ak slani ia amp deerrintinn algftaciinimars cerada meh rkedhi char w gt lt il gt For Help press F1 Use the scroll bars to bring more attributes or more details about the attributes into view Double clicking on certain tables or views will launch the Database Object Viewer which will query the database to retrieve data from that table or view Clicking once on a table name will display a list of attributes for the particular table Double clicking on certain tables will launch the Database Object Viewer along with a pre defined DBX file to query the database for data from that particular table OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 9 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Changing the Appearance of Detail Windows The Database Detail
22. Configuring Security for your system Modifying a User To modify the information for a user you can double click on a user s icon to recall the Group User Properties dialog box Alternatively you can right click on the user s icon and choose Properties from the pop up menu Make your modifications in the Group User Properties dialog box and click on OK to exit You can give a user special privileges that other people in their group don t have just by modifying that user alone If a particular user needs to have a special privilege that no one else in the group has you can add it Just open up the Group User Properties dialog box for that user by double clicking on its name in the right hand pane of the Security Configuration Tool and add the appropriate token s to the Include List for that user If a particular privilege is granted to a group you CANNOT revoke that privilege for individual member s of the group A user that is a member of a group cannot have a privilege taken away if that privilege was given to him or her via the group To take away such a privilege it would either have to be taken away from the entire group or that user would have to be removed from the group If the privilege comes from the DEFAULT group it CANNOT be taken away unless it is taken away from the DEFAULT group since users CANNOT be removed from the DEFAULT group OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 17 Chapter 10 Configuring S
23. Jd A user has been added called SYSTEM vith a password of SYSTEM created That user has a default password of SYSTEM Click on OK A user is someone who has access to OpenEnterprise Server software 3 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database During Configuration You are the SYSTEM User In the Added Users box on the Users page you will see the name SYSTEM This is the SYSTEM user that was just added automatically The SYSTEM user has full privileges while you re configuring your system you will be the SYSTEM user The SYSTEM user is added automatically Database Project Builder mfx You may add Users to the dgtabase and assign them to Security Groups OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Users D Locations Password i Confirm Password O a Added Users Summary SYSTEM Build Signal Data Time Zone Device Drivers Database Size Historical Data Session Finish Click on Next gt to proceed to the next page Although you can optionally add additional users here we recommend you click on Next gt and add users later as described in Chapter 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 7 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Verifying that the Time Zone is Correct You should always make sure your OpenEnterprise Server computer is configured with the correct time zone for your geographical area Having the correct time zone is part
24. Query Manager eee Bee ere MUA eee mcr et nae a ese A1 Modify Existing Query Run Report Delete Existing Query Run Report As tL M N O J Alias Manager Options Event Viewer Insert Function OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 7 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Now you need to create a query for the OE Database for data that you want to appear on your report Depending upon the size and complexity of your report it may include multiple queries Each query therefore must be identified by a unique name For our first query we are using the default name of Query1l but you could assign a different name to it if desired After a name is chosen click on Next gt Although you specified the default data service for this report you are given the option of overriding the default and using a different data service in a query You might want to do this if this report will contain data from more than one OE Server If you do specify a different data service you should verify that you can communicate with it by clicking on the Test Connection button Click on Next gt to proceed Each query must have a name You OpenEnterprise Import History can use the default or choose a name then click on Next gt Create New Query Query Name The name used to identify this Import History query Query Name Dataservice Data Set Objects Quer
25. Trace changes color now if the Questionable attribute for this signal is TRUE Untitled OEContainer File wiew Configure Help D eW amp K gt EE E E Units _ Data Source 28 JAN 2005 15 27 00 000 80 000008 BristolB abcock BristoIHDAServer 14 scada webrrtrdt OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 33 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Example 5 Working with Multiple Pens in the Same Trend We mentioned before that you could have multiple pens in the same trend Let s go over briefly a few things you should be aware of when working with multiple pens Click on the Add button to add an additional pen OE Trend Client Control Properties Adding Pens To add a second third fourth etc pen to an existing trend simply click on the Add button on the Pens page of the OE Trend Client Control Properties dialog aap box and then proceed to define the pen as you would A Pent BristolBabcock Bristol any other pen ieMove Remove All Distinguishing One Pen From Another Each pen trace is displayed in a different color To tell which pen is which find the corresponding color in the Detail pane Also remember that the signal value s displayed in the Detail pane reflects the value at the current location of the Marker bar See page 7 8 Color at beginning of line in Detail pane matches color of its associated pen trace E Untitled OEContainer File view Configure Help
26. hours minutes and seconds fields For example if you want to Period days hours minutes seconds ans trend 8 and one half hours worth of data enter 8 in Minimum 000000 O the hours field and 30 in the minutes field Maximum 300 0000 The period comes into effect when you have exited the dialog box and entered Runtime Mode OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 27 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data To specify the period for an individual pen total length of time for this pen Call up the Pen Configuration dialog box for the selected pen and go to the X Axis portion of the Ranges page When specifying the period for a pen it must be relative to the current workstation time Pen Configuration Select the Override Global Time Settings box and the Use time period relative to Current Workstation time box Data Ranges Limits Styles Use time period relative to Curent Workstation time Period days hours 0 minutes 0 seconds Specify the total period length of time you want to be reflected in this trend using any combination of the Period days hours minutes and seconds fields For example if you want to trend three days and eight hours worth of data enter 8 in the hours field and 3 in the days field Y Anis mmp O Maximum 100 000000 a Don t try to trend too much data Before we go on
27. that specifies how the report will Ssee Settings Recipient be sent e mail file COpy etc Alarm Conditions tana BY is cription Send copy to Agz6unting Dept so billing can be calculated Click on Next gt when i ii finished Delivery Typ Email File Copy i e a networked drive or backup storage FTP Copy Click on Next gt when finished 11 24 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Report Configuration Settings On this page you specify the destination e mail address server location or FTP server details for this report recipient Here we are choosing the e mail address You can test that the e mail address is valid by clicking on Test lf the recipient is an e mail address enter the address here You should also click on Test to verify that it is a valid address Recipient Configuration Recipient Configuration Settings Fis _page allows the user to define the type specific properties of the Report Recipient Email Recipient Settings Email Addres aaaa bbbbb ccc Alarm Conditions When you have entered the address click on Next gt OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 25 Chapter 11 Creating Reports If you had chosen File Copy instead of E mail you would need to specify the location on a computer where you want to store the report Similarly if you had chosen FTP Copy you would need to
28. Click on Next gt when finished Database Project Builder Seis Copies all Available Tasks to the OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Session Tasks Sas Selected Tasks box The Session will run applications alongside the database Copies a single highlighted task from the Available Tasks box to the Selected Tasks box Available Tasks ed F sks Harvester paese Copies a single highlighted task DBB Calculation Serves from the Selected Tasks OpenBSI Statistics Impor sp0 box to the Available Tasks box Copies all Selected Tasks to the Available Tasks box Finish Click on Next gt Completing the Database Project Building Process At this point the OE Database has been created in a temporary area When you click on Next gt the database will be copied to the DATA area which is the final location for the working OE Database Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Ready To Copy The database is now fully built in a temporary location On clicking Next the database will be copied to C Program Files Bristol Babcock O penEnterprise Data There will also be a command file in this directo called OERebuild cmd that will rebuild this database configuration without having to re run this wizard Click on Next gt OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 17 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database The OE Datab
29. Creating Reports Step 5 Choose Who Will Receive the Report Recipients Now you have to decide where reports cae will be sent For example you might Recipients are essentially the destination want to e mail copies of a report to the Of the report This could be an e mail accounting department so they can bill address a file server location or an FTP customers Or you might want to have a Server report stored on a hard disk somewhere so you can retrieve it later if needed To do this you need to define the Right click on Recipients and choose recipients for the report Click on Edit gt New Report Recipient or choose New Recipient or right click on Edit gt New Recipient from the menu bar Recipients and choose New Report Recipient from the menu bar Report Configuration Tool Fi Edit Help E amp Report Configuration S E The Configured Reports E Pressure_Report 1 6 28 Templates ff Schedules E Formats ae New ReportRecpient_ Recipient Configuration General Decide whether the report will be sent as an e mail message or as a file stored on a drive or FTP server Here we are choosing Email Enter a Name for the recipient and optionally include a Description Recipient Configuration Now specify a Name for the e Recipient Configuration General recipient and choose a T pamtio diaaa e daa Delivery Type
30. First Last Occurrence Times Duratigh fh Indexed timestamp al gt Analog Fields Column Name Raw First Last Max Min Avg Occurrence Times Integral Dure currentdstoffset questionable b Boolean Fields Column Name Raw First Last Occurrence Times AND OR Count Percent Click on Next gt when finished 6 40 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Step 3 Rename Columns in the Log File OPTIONAL Rename the columns which will be used in the log file if desired Logging Group Name Fields If desired you can rename the columns Logged Fields that will be used in the Log File n E haia ve maximum Click on Next gt when finished ee Ta value_maximum Occurence Time value_masimum_occurencetime value_minimum Occurence Time value_minimum_occurrencetime currentdstoffset Raw currentdstoffset questionable Raw questionable Click on Next gt when finished Step 4 Define the Dataset for 1 minute Data Click on Add to add a new dataset Click on Add Logging Group Define Datasets Datasets control how often data will be logged and how long data will be k si online All historical streams require one dataset for storing raw sample data The raw dataset can Daused to feed one or more compressed datasets The Historical Configuration dialog box will appear OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 4 Chapter 6 Working w
31. WHERE is used to specify some sort of criteria to limit the condition number of records rows displayed Typically optional you would enter an expression here like WHERE value lt 20 Here are some examples A 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users Example 1 Suppose we want to know the name of every signal in the analog portion of the OE Database which is currently in an alarm state We would enter the command SQL gt select name value from realanalog where inalarm TRUE This is the name of the _ The SELECT command table from which we are requesting data A These are attributes the name q g P and value columns that we want a en ee foe Glspiay ed Wor EARE Pa records where this criteria aik is met We only want to see those signals for which the 4 Inalarm attribute column TOTT sqle O4 00 0065 Win32 ae is currently TRUE Se Copyyight C y 1994 2003 by Polyhedra alc SQL gt select name value from realanalog where inalarm TRUE _ J TANKS SINE VALUE OO1 98 7745 TANKS SINE VALUE OO2 66 9584 TANKS SINE VALUE OO3S 131 619 ii4 Query Done 3 records selected SOL gt Here are the results of our query There are 3 signals in the Realanalog table that are currently in an alarm state We can see the names of these signals and their values because that s what we asked to see So
32. alarms Number of acknowleged alarms gt p gt gt Alarms 2 Uncir 0 UnAck 2 Ack 0 If you need to return to Configure mode click here don t see any alarms What did I do wrong Maybe nothing There might not be any alarms Remember that alarms only appear if something changed down in the RTU to generate them You can verify whether or not alarms exist by using Database Explorer to examine the AlarmSummary table All current alarms displayed in the Alarm Viewer come from that table There are a few other reasons why you might not see alarms 1 Did you forget to specify the OE Database containing the alarms in the Databases page of the OE Alarm Client Control Properties dialog box If you don t specify the OE Database you won t see any alarms 2 Are you still in Configure Mode In order to see alarms you must be in Runtime Mode You can tell you re in Runtime mode if it says Configure in the menu bar of the Alarm Viewer 3 Are the alarms you expect to see being filtered out If you or someone else have changed the filtering criteria for the alarms the alarms you expect to see might not be displayed The concept of alarm filtering is outside the scope of this manual for more information please see the OE Alarm View section of the OpenEnterprise Reference Manual document D5092 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 7 Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms Example 2 Acknow
33. an hourly scan time class can be defined and all hourly flow totals collected as part of that scan time class The signals included in a particular scan time class are automatically placed into structures called poll lists by the OE Poll List Builder If you had other signals that you wanted collected every minute you would create a 1 minute scan time class etc OpenEnterprise for Beginners 1 7 Poll List Collection operates on a schedule For example collect all the flow total signals every hour collect all the logical signals every minute etc It doesn t matter if there hasn t been any change Poll List Collection will just collect the values anyway ale Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise Report by Exception RBE Report by exception abbreviated RBE causes a RBE says Check to see if the signal to be collected only on exception in other data is different from the last words you only collect the signal when it changes time we collected it If it hasn t RBE is different from poll list collection because in Changed don t bother collecting poll list collection signals are collected whether or it not they have changed In RBE if a signal doesn t Value Collect it change it isn t collected CAME For logical signals that would mean that a signal is CHANGED only collected when it changes state from ON to SAME OFF or OFF to ON For analog signals that SAME kaa Bp t
34. and if desired enter a Description for the schedule You can have a report generated immediately i e on demand or based on a value of an OPC tag Generally though you re going to want to generate reports at a particular time of day For this example choose Timed to have the report generated at a specific time of day Now click on Next gt First choose a Name for the schedule and optionally enter a Description Schedule Configuration Schedule Configuration General This page is used to configure the general properties of a Report Schedule G Schedule Type rae END_OF_DAY amp C Disable Reports fs ane Description Schedule to generate reports at the end of the day E Alarm Conditions Schedule Type Please select the method by which the Report Schedule will be triggered On Demand the schedule will be triggered manually or through an external application Timed the schedule will be triggered based on a repeating or once only time period Value Change the schedule will be triggered based on a change in value of an OPC Tag Then choose Timed and finally click on Next gt 11 20 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Schedule Configuration Type On this page specify exactly when you want the report to be generated Choose the time and then the interval at which the report generation should be repeated Th
35. checkmark are currently online If the blue checkmark for an online archive file has a small A underneath it that means that this particular archive file was brought online automatically The source table s from which the data was originally collected Archive File Tool The datasets for File Help Archived Data Backups SEA o SA Os Ei realanalog QJ 1 RealAnalog minute Os 3600s E 86400s SH 4 Raw daertoe z Os SE 9 Flow p a Os Fiqy DAta 1 minute samples E 3600s J6w Data Hourly Calculations 86400s Flow Data Daily calculations saples vith hourly and daily compression ff from realanalog table Ainute samples The Logging Group Numbers Use the to expand the tree and see a list of archive files Archive File Tool File Help Archived Data Backups a f w GA 0 E realanalog ga 1 RealAnalog minute samples with hourly and daily compression B ga 4 Raw data collection from realanalog table a Os w XxX 01 JUN 2007 06 05 54 to 04 JUN 2007 12 08 54 9 Jow Data 1 minute samples cA Os Flow Data 1 minute samples E 3600s Flow Data Hourly Calculations Wh 31 MAY 2007 09 01 00 to 01 JUN 2007 08 01 00 Va 31 MAY 2007 09 01 00 to 01 JUN 2007 08 01 00 86400s Flow Data Daily calculations va 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 to 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 Archive files marked with a red X are currently off
36. etc the log file should hold one month s worth of data e Log file size should be kept to 100 megabytes or less You can examine the resulting log files to see how large they are 6 24 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Maximum Unsaved This specifies how much data the user is willing to lose worst case due Data to a system failure It essentially defines the size of the logging buffer in active memory that holds data prior to its being written to disk in a log file or permanently stored in an archive file If there is a power failure any data in the logging buffer is lost You have to have some unsaved data When you see the Maximum Unsaved Data field it s tempting to say I don t want to have any unsaved data The reality is you have to have some unsaved data If the Maximum Unsaved Data value is too small system performance will suffer You should typically set it to at least 10 times the collection rate for example if the collection rate is 60 seconds maximum unsaved data should be 10 minutes Anything more frequent will adversely affect system performance Log Directory NOTE When polled collection is used this is measured in time units seconds minutes hours days weeks months or years If triggered collection is used this is expressed in generations NOTE Once the dataset has been saved this setting can only be modified via SQL statements SOME NOTES
37. fully configured and ready to go into service before you implement the security policy Otherwise certain configuration activities will be rather cumbersome because the person configuring the system would regularly need to sign into the system OpenEnterprise Security configuration is divided up into two major parts each of which has various steps e Use the Security Configuration Tool to create users and groups at the OpenEnterprise Workstation Assign each user a username and default password which they will change Also specify access privileges for particular OpenEnterprise components for each user or group of users using tokens which we ll talk about later e Defining table and view access for users and groups at the OpenEnterprise Server What are Users and Groups Users A user is any person who will be able to log on at an OpenEnterprise Workstation Before you do any configuration you need to think about your staff and make a list of all the potential users of your system P OpenEnterprise Login Client Options Help Each user will have a name called the Username and a l Lo password which they must type in whenever they log oo O on at an OpenEnterprise Workstation using the Password sid OpenEnterprise Login Client rirdb1i SYSTEM NOTE In addition to the users you define every system also has two special users already created called SYSTEM and PUBLIC We ll talk about them more later OpenEnterp
38. gt New Report or right E WW Report Configuration c a fe click on The Configured Reports in the a apres f New Report Report Configuration Tool and choose New wG Schedules Report from the pop up menu Ey Formats a y Recipients Report Configuration General On this page enter a Name for the report and then optionally enter a Description for the report First enter a name Next choose the template for the report and you created in Step 1 then optionally enter a click on Next gt description t Report Configuration 6 9 In the Rep ort Temp late Report Configuration Geral section of the page click on This page allows the general propertieNgf an OpenEnteprise repg the name of the template Report Details you created in Step 1 Some esss j Alias Values Name Pressure Report 1 f processing will occur and T Description gressure readings then that name will appear Formats a Te in the Selected Template iian Credentials Report Template field Click on Next gt to Alarm Conditions Please select the Report Template you wish to use with this Report configuration Note that when a Report d ie gael irat p aari Configuration Tool will attempt to obtain all configured gliases within the Template proceed aber Name Description DAILY_REPORT One minute flow data for the day REPORT20 REPORT3 1 minute flow readings REPORT4 1 minute flow readings 11 1
39. gt OpenEnterprise gt Database Explorer If this is the first time you are using the Database Explorer with this particular OE Database you must explicitly identify for Database Explorer the name and if located on a computer other than the current one the location of the Database See Identifying the Name and Location of Your Database Database Explorer A connection must then be requested with the OE Eile view Options window Help Database See Establishing a Connection with the 5 g Database All Databases scada web rtrdbl scada web rtrdbi Tree Hierarchy E Identifying the Name and Location of Your Database If this is the first time you are using Database Explorer with a particular OE Database you must add the database to the tree hierarchy of databases accessible to Database Explorer To do so click on the Add Database icon shown above or click on File gt Add Database The Add Database to Hierarchy dialog box will appear 4 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Using the Add Database to Hierarchy Dialog Box The Add Database to Hierarchy dialog box allows you to specify for Database Explorer the name of your OE Database In addition if the OE Database resides on a PC other than the current one you must also specify its location The combination of the database name and location is called the service Enter the name of the Database or its ad
40. is already Tilogt defined because we added the user under the group name Enter the initial password for the user in the Password field then enter it again in the Verify Password field OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 27 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Removing a User To permanently remove a user from your system first start the Security Configuration Tool Right click on the icon for the user you want to remove and choose Delete from the pop up menu You will be prompted to confirm the deletion Click on Yes and the user will be removed from the system User FullN ame Description E BOB Robert Johnson SCADA System Manager E DONNA Donna Marano Weekend Operator PUBLIC SYSTEM Properties va Weekend Shift Engineer Right click on the name of the user and choose Delete from the pop up menu Sometimes you can t delete a user Let s say one of your Operators named ANDY quits his job and goes to work for another company so you decide you want to delete ANDY from the system You try to delete the user according to the example above but the system doesn t allow it Why Well the OpenEnterprise Server maintains records about who performs certain actions in the system For example if ANDY acknowledged several alarms and those alarms have not been cleared entirely from the OpenEnterprise Database you will NOT be allowed to delete ANDY since the
41. must be created using the report template you created in Step 1 3 Test the Report It s important to verify that you actually can retrieve data and generate the report file so we recommend you test the report before proceeding OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 1 Chapter 11 Creating Reports 4 Define a Schedule for when the Report Should be Generated The schedule determines the time of day the report is printed or sent In addition it is possible to generate reports based on operator request on demand or based on the value change of an OPC tag but we won t cover those topics in this manual 5 Specify the recipients of the report The recipients are basically the destinations where the report is sent for example e mail addresses server locations or an FTP server 6 Specify the format of the report The format is the end product of how the report is presented For example you might want it printed on a printer or transformed into a particular file type such as CSV HTML or PDF among others Together these various steps allow you to create a wide variety of reports 11 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Step 1 Create a Report Template Report Templates define the layout of the report and what data goes into it Double click on the Reporting icon in the OpenEnterprise Toolbox rtrdb1 ToolBox i rai Ae 5 8310 Diaries and Historian Locked Alarm Alarm Priorities
42. page of the Security Configuration Tool you can configure various restrictions for a group or a user for example e You can force users to change their passwords on a regular basis by setting an expiration time for the password e You can specify that passwords must be a certain length to be valid e You can specify the users should be locked out if they have a certain number of failed login attempts e You can have a user logged out automatically if there is no activity database reads or writes for a specfied period of time When checked if their password has expired a user attempting to log in will be allowed in using the old password but will then be forced to change their password before they can do anything else If Expires In is checked the Group Properties ADMINISTRATORS Expiry Warning can be checked to force the system to issue a warning af Token Custom Token prompt to the user that their password will expire within a specified number Days Prior To Expiry of days This way they know they need to change it soon When checked if their password expires a user will be unable to use tools such as the OE Toolbox or SQL Client to access the OE Database If you want a user to change their password periodically check Expires In and specify the number of days you want the password to be valid Properties Password Expiry
43. the New dialog box Peo OpentEnterprise Desktop Main Display wS Main Display T EI Click on File gt Open to specify the display you want to have loaded into this window Choose the display you want to load in the window and click on Open e Now we want to load a display into the window We re going to use an Overview Display created back in Chapter 5 If you didn t create that display use a different one Click on File gt Open then choose the display and click on Open Overview g s s S Files of type OpenEnterprise Displays gdf Cancel A OpenEnterprise for Beginners 9 3 Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop The display you selected in this case Overview gdf will be loaded into the window e You should adjust the window now so the display appears exactly as you want it You can do this by dragging the window to the desired location within the desktop maximizing the desktop etc Now that you have the display loaded into the Main Display window you should adjust the window so it appears exactly as you want it to look _ You can maximize the OE Desktop so it fills Desktop File view Tools Security Window Help all the available screen 0 ea S ro space if desired Main Display You can maximize the window so it fills To the entire OE Desktop ai Top Bele mile by clicking here This is useful because it aiey Center itchell fills the pa
44. via the Historical Configuration Tool OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 9 What s memory As the OpenEnterprise Server computer runs its program s the CPU central processing unit of the computer executes each instruction in the programs These instructions and the data associated with them are read from and or written to physical locations within computer chips in the computer These physical locations are referred to as memory They are similar to memory you might have in your personal computer at home Each memory location also has a numerical identifier called an address The address is used internally to locate data stored in memory The amount of memory in your computer varies depending upon the purchased memory options Information in memory is stored as a series of O s and I s each O or I is referred to as a bit These bits are grouped together into chunks of 8 16 or 32 which are called bytes Each byte can hold a character of data A group of 1024 bytes is referred to as 1 kilobyte or Ik 1024K is referred to as a Megabyte or IMB RAM Random Access Memory only provides temporary storage The data stored in RAM is destroyed 1f the power fails on the OE Server That s not true with data on the hard disk but don t confuse RAM memory with the hard disk they are different things In OpenEnterprise real time data is stored in memory and historical data is stored on the hard disk Chapter 6 Wo
45. 12 01 AM Fed From Dataset Os Flow Data HoupdyZalculations Description We want to keep an entire oa g month s worth of 1 hour data in ks Ham the Log File so Keep for at least is set to 32 days or some variation of that using different units Starting From 12 01 00 i5 5 31 2007 Keep For At Least Maximum Unsaved Data 12 Maximum Unsaved Data is ae set to 12 hours That means the C History Logfiles log buffer contents will be emptied into the Log File on disk every 12 hours Keep for at least defines the size of your log file on disk If we enter 32 days as the Keep for at least value that means our log file can hold up to 32 days worth of data and on the 33 day the oldest day in the Log File gets overwritten f you configure archiving you don t have to worry about data being overwritten since it would be archived in an archive file before that happens Maximum Unsaved Data defines the size of the log buffer the amount of log data kept in RAM memory that hasn t yet been written to the log file on disk If you set your Maximum Unsaved Data to 12 hours that means up to 12 hours of unsaved data can reside in memory In other words twice a day you save the data If a power failure occurs therefore up to 12 hours of data from the log buffer could be lost It s tempting to set this to a very low value so as not to
46. ABOUT LOGGING BUFFER SIZE The buffer size must always be more than the maximum amount of data you are going to save at one snapshot in time For example if you re saving minute data the buffer size must be at least large enough to hold a minute s worth of data Actually though you should multiply this number by the number of snapshots of data you want to retain in memory for example 30 minutes for 1 minute data If you make your buffer size too small smaller than the amount needed to hold a single snapshot of data you will receive an error message in the DB TXT file and historical collection for that logging group will not work This specifies the directory path in which log files will be stored To change the directory use the Browse push button NOTE Once the dataset has been saved this setting can only be modified via SQL statements IMPORTANT The log data is filled in a cyclical manner therefore data is only maintained in the log file until such time as it is overwritten by new data coming in The only way to retain such data for a longer period of time is to configure the archive mechanism OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 25 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Now we have to configure archiving so click on the Archive Configuration tab to bring up that page of the dialog box OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration Dialog Box Archive Configuration There are two different ways to configure archive
47. Archive Files Calculations Calendars Objects Conditions Fare marra LEEI TAGS p ma oe Messaging NW3000 NW3000 NW3000 NW3000 NW3000 OPC Client Archives Monitor Setup Signal Builder Templ RDI 2 amp E m G amp Security Group Signal Builder Suppression Template Groups Builder Patterns Security Config Privileges Double click on the Reporting icon The Report Configuration Tool will appear Right click on the Templates icon and choose New Report Template from the pop up menu or click on Edit gt New Template from the menu bar Right click on Templates and choose New Report Template from the pop up menu Alternatively choose Edit gt New Template from the menu bar Report Configuration Tool Name Descr File Na amp Report Configuration AG The Configured Reacts Al Templates R3 Schedules New Report Template E3 Formats gi Recipients OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Template Configuration General On this page enter a name for the report template in the Name field You can optionally specify a more detailed description of what the template does in the Description field Enter a name for the report template You can optionally add a description also Then click on Create Ei Template Configuration Template Cont uration General This page allows Reponn Nmplates to be created and modified
48. Group list Group C Account LockOut Grantor Verify Password eececeeeecce box on the Properties page Click on OK and the user will be moved to that group 10 18 Parent Group lt none gt Load OED File ADMINISTRATORS DISPATCHERS O k ENGINEERS C Logout GUESTS OPERATORS TRAINEES OpenEnterprise for Beginners Assign this user to a group using the Parent Group list box Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Method 2 Drag the icon for that user over to their new group Another way is to select pa Confia the icon for that user from the right pane of P ai bea Braw E Stata aen areae AchniSTRATORS the Security Donna Mariano Weekend Operrator Configuration Tool ele window and drag it over onto the icon for ERA ADMINISTRATORS ka DAFATITCHERS the group within the left B Giens pane of the window Eel E fA Tokens Hf Access Areas Two Special Users SYSTEM and PUBLIC You ve probably noticed that in addition to the users you created there are two other users SYSTEM and PUBLIC You should remember SYSTEM because when you used the SQL Client way back in Chapter 2 you had to log in as SYSTEM SYSTEM is the default user when you are configuring OpenEnterprise While you are performing configuration tasks you need access to basically everything so by default SYSTEM has access to everything PUBLIC is a user who has
49. Locations Security Time Zone Device Drivers Summary Build Signal Data Database Size Historical Data Session Finish Click on Next gt Specifying File Locations Welcome to the OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder The File Locations page specifies where OpenEnterprise will store various types of files on the OE Server Generally we recommend you accept the default file locations presented If you want to change them however click on the button to browse to a new location When you ve finished on this page click on Next gt Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder File Locations You must specify the locations you wish the database to use Locations Security Time Zone Device Drivers Summary Build Signal Data Database Size Historical Data Session Finish When finished on this page click on Next gt Database working directory C Program Files Bristol Babcock Open Enterprise Data Toolbox Export Files C Program Files Brstol Babcock Open Enterprise Data Root directory for historical files C History Log Files C History LogFiles Archive Files C History ArchFiles Event Archive Files C History EventFiles Use the same root folder for all historical information This is where the live running OE Database will reside You can browse to select a different folder by cl
50. Oaeh amp B B Name Description Quality _ Timestamp Good 28JAN 2005 10 53 00 000 27JAN 2005 16 59 00 000 174 000000 g Ready 7 34 Value Units Data Source BristolB Soc abcock BristoIHDAS erver 1 scada web rty BristolB abcock BristolHDAS erver 1 scada web h Detail pane OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Showing Multiple Axes when Working with Multiple Pens When you have multiple pens on the same trend you have to decide what sort of scale s you need on the X and Y axes If for example you are trending three real time values in the same trend but they all have widely different ranges of values it might make sense to hide the Common Y axis and instead show three separate Y axes one for each pen in the trend Similarly if you are comparing two signals that are coming from different time periods you might want different X axes for each signal trace Showing Hiding the Common Y axis or Common X axis Click on the Grid button e To show or hide the Common Y axis or Common X axis call up the OE Trend Control GES Em ent Sone ih ia Properties dialog box and go to the Graph Limits Parameters 7 General Pens Ranges i a i page ges eaa LY ee Border Style Fil Color of Fill Angle degrees Show Multiple 41 Show Multiple Asis Io show the axis for a pen check the box Grid Configuration dialog box In the Grid Gr
51. Properties TOM the system 1f you confi gured custom Token File Token OPC Item Token Token Group roperties Account Summary Access Areas Application Token automatic lockout based a User Settings Administration numb er of faile d lo gin User Name E Change Password At Next Logon Full Name C User Cannot Change Password attempts Lockouts can be Re ee fi gioi ff l eon ene De select this box con io O urn O l Password OETTTTTTTT E Account Disabled to allow the user to automatically after a certain viene Kt use their account number of minutes or they A again Group can be set so that only a Parent Group OPERATORS System Administrator with gt ee sit Security Administration privileges can remove the D7 togout lockout OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 29 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system To remove the lockout first call up the Group User Properties dialog box for this user by double clicking on the user s icon in the Security Configuration Tool Next de select the Account Lockout box in the Properties page of the Group User Properties dialog box for this user Finally click on OK and the account will be re activated Resetting a User s Password if they forget the one they chose Check this to force the user to change Enter a temporary password their password the in the Password and next time they log Verify Passord fields on Call up the Group User Pr
52. ROCLINK Bristol Bristol Babcock ControlWave TeleFlow and Helicoid are trademarks of RAS AMS PlantWeb and the PlantWeb logo are marks of Emerson Electric Co The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of the Emerson Electric Co All other trademarks are property of their respective owners The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only While every effort has been made to ensure informational accuracy they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees express or implied regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability RAS reserves the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice All sales are governed by RAS terms and conditions which are available upon request 2007 Remote Automation Solutions division of Emerson Process Management All rights reserved EMERSON
53. Saving the Criteria Used For Your Query in A DBX File EFORT raii a Opening An Existing DBX TEE EAE r dirket mE 4 23 Adding Live Data to Third Party Applications by Dragging DDE Tags TEPISE mit Example Adding An Analog Value To A Spreadsheet Using DDE Chapter 5 Building Displays t Mimic Your Proc sS ncacncsccanncecnaumnnaawmannen aE hi is t so ee prise Graphics E E Aa L ios EPOR eaa a Ei E a e Ea iid aaiae 5 3 eai the OE egies packa age NIIE PONEI PIERE OTTAA AER VIENEET E RAE eo Opening a Display rsissssirrcsnsass re as EEE PEA E ENE E see D 4 A Quick Look at the Drawing 1 TONS cccccssssssssssssssessseessssessssssssssssssessssesssessssssssssssssssesseeeseseeeee 5 6 Bi a AS i E E E cima eras ase N E eee eee E E E S Drawing A Straight Giss IE N E EE A EE E EE AE AET ad to A E E EA nanan 5 7 Drowing A BOK soseen i a ii 8 Drawing An Ellipse or A T oinera a Cairnie PTEE 5 9 damn A D E A EE T A Switching Between Configure Mode and Runtime Mode eccccsssssssssssessesssssssseessseee erent 5 10 Examples of Creating Various Display Objects sssensseesesseeseessesressseresssesressseseesseeressseee D L Example 1 Creating A Text aD on AD Display saeco Example 2 Displaying A Nur Example 3 Displaying the A a ice of li iid i in a com caer ee oe 5 18 Example 4 Creating A Sliding Setpoint Control With Which Hed Coa on one a oe in P A E K D TEANTA POI NNA IN NEE N AA ANE 5 25
54. Securit Logical Alam write Security Anala a M Manual Enable i Control Enable Cancel Help OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE e On the Settings page of the Signal Properties dialog box for the signal you must choose Alarm Enable e For analog alarm signals you must also specify at least one alarm limit You should also specify an alarm deadband Click on the Alarm Limits button to begin this configuration Choose Alarm Enable Signal Properties l Xa General Settings Initial State Units Text 7 W Alam Enable Report By Exception Weadbetd Pe ZISE Rr nge aon RA See seeeescenspececcesseesssesssesees Cancel For analog alarm signals you must specify one or more alarm limits here Specifying a Global Signal in ACCOL Workbench e On the Settings page of the Signal Properties dialog box for the signal you must select the Mark as Global box OpenEnterprise for Beginners 2 5 To make this a global signal the Mark as Global box must be selected Signal Properties xX General Settings Initial State Units Text r GPM X I Mark as Global l Report By Exception Deadband Cancel Help Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE Specifying an RBE Signal in an ACCOL Load e On the Settings page of the Signal Properti
55. Tank 4 Level D204 55100T4 LE EL OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 27 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data NOTE If a message similar to the one shown below is displayed it means that the Polyhedra DDE Server did not start Microsoft Excel i Remote data not accessible Start application POLYHEDR EXE If the Polyhedra DDE Server has been installed you can start it by clicking on Start gt Programs gt Polyhedra gt DDE If the Polyhedra DDE Server was never installed you must install it according to instructions in the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide document D5092 Some advanced topics which we won t cover here e The Database Object Viewer includes a Joins page which allows you to query multiple tables to find data intersections Don t try it It s not for beginners and could crash your system e The Database Object Viewer includes an SQL page which lets you edit SQL queries on the database If you re interested in this review the appendix on SQL at the end of this manual e The OE Menus feature allows you to take DBX files you create in Database Object Viewer and tie them into menus that allow you to pass parameters between OE components and edit the database This is a very powerful feature for customizing your system but is beyond the scope of this manual Please see the OE Menus section of the OE Reference Guide document D5092 if you need information on this 4 2
56. actual historical data in its columns 7N object names signal names E Microsoft Excel DAILY_REPORT xls Celf eg File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window my RDF OpenEnterprise Type a question for help eer es NEFES oem ee See eee gt 2 Ad ib A 100 OM Arial E0 Bi TEEI H12 x fe C D A B i VER E w N a m a ep A wil P CW7 GV R1_DP_Al ZW7 GV R2_DP_Al CW7 GV R4_D E_AI timestamp value value value 01 05 2007 14 21 23 01 05 2007 14 22 23 01 05 2007 14 23 23 01 05 2007 14 24 23 01 05 2007 14 25 23 01 05 2007 14 26 23 01 05 2007 14 27 23 13 01 05 2007 14 28 23 14 01 05 2007 14 29 23 15 01 05 2007 14 30 23 16 01 05 2007 14 31 23 17 01 05 2007 14 32 23 18 01 05 2007 14 33 23 19 01 05 2007 14 34 23 20 01 05 2007 14 35 23 21 01 05 2007 14 36 23 22 01 05 2007 14 37 23 23 01 05 2007 14 38 23 24 01 05 2007 14 39 23 25 01 05 2007 14 40 23 26 01 05 2007 14 41 23 27 01 05 2007 14 42 23 28 01 05 2007 14 43 23 29 01 05 2007 14 44 23 30 01 05 2007 14 45 23 31 01 05 2007 14 46 23 32 01 05 2007 14 47 23 33 01 05 2007 14 48 23 M 4 gt rh Sheet Sheet2 Sheet3 Ready ojo Ni am O O 9 9 9 090 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 090 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 oc o io io ic ooo ic oc oio cio oo Cc oc o o oc oo o oc o o o oc o o io cioc o io cic o o Cc oc o oc Cc o o o oc o o o oc o o o lt A gt NOT
57. adjust the Flash Rate Property Inspector Tet Fash Defautt Pick Data Source Drag Drop Data Source Bristol Babcock Bristolo PC Serveri trdo 1 di Data Tags Expression Altemate State Flash Rate ms 500 Hide Object m ie Fash When True 5 Change Color C BdhWhen Fase e Fill Color I Line Color mE Shadow Color LC Show Altemate Stabs When Not Flashing Delete Description B Custom Data Custom T Lang Alias eI Object Name Cancel Apply Help You can alter the flash rate here Choose Flash When True Click on OK and go into Runtime Mode to verify that the text flashes as expected OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 33 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Example 6 Changing the Color of A Pump Based on Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 a Logical Value On a display draw a simple pump using a circle and two rectangles See figure below left Use the Arrange gt Send to Back and Arrange gt Bring to Front commands as necessary to put the rectangles behind the circle See figure below right It s true it doesn t look much like a pump but it s fine for the purposes of this example Zi Display OpenEnterprise by Bristol a File Edit view Format Arrange Draw Dynamics Tools Runtime aa ili amp Baw A File Edit View Format Arrange Draw Dynamics Tools M ack on arial 10 vy BZ
58. are personal computers PCs that communicate with the OpenEnterprise Server OpenEnterprise for Beginners l 1 Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise OPENENTERPRISE WORKSTATIONS For operator interaction with system HMI Users can view graphical displays trends print reports etc OPENENTERPRISE SERVERS OE Database resides here Open BSI software and RDI 3000 for communication with controller network OPC Server included for export of data to third party applications and devices ControlWave serieS te mence gcc Network oe series controller s running iil HT controller s running ControlWave projects ACCOL a EO HEO HO HH m Inputs from field instrumentation contact closures flow meters pressure transmitters etc These workstations run software that allows plant operators and other users to view detailed graphical displays that depict current conditions of your plant or process These displays typically use graphical symbols of things like pumps valves tanks etc that can change color move etc based on the status of your plant The workstations can also be configured to display and manage alarm messages show graphical trends of real time and historical data and to print reports Various levels of security can be conf
59. attribute expression WHERE condition where table_name is replaced with name of a table within the OE Database attribute specifies that attribute attribute is being set to the expression value of expression expression For example if the attribute is value and the expression is 5 0 then value 5 0 would go here WHERE is used to specify some sort of criteria to limit the condition number of records rows affected by the optional command Example Below we re showing the name and description attributes for two signals from the table called Signal_Table Sa a description possess SSS ese SoSSSsSss5 PPS SSS SS Ss RP COM PRE Se EN 9 RPC OrMi TEMP LN As you can see the description column doesn t have any useful information in it We can use the UPDATE command to assign descriptive information for these signals update signal_table set description MOTOR1 PRESSURE where name RPCoeM PREosIN A 12 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users update signal_table set description MOTORI1 TEMPERATURE where name RPC5 M1 TEMP IN commit Again let s take a close up look at this command The column in the table The name of the table __ A which contains the items you want to update ee S you want to update update E ic set e a o MOTOR1 PRESSURE where name RPCO TMI PRES 1N ar gt updave Signal table se
60. attributes for the signal named in the Data Source field When you check the Auto Populate with Signal Data box you will be prompted to confirm that you want to n Are you sure you wish to turn on Auto Population do that since anything you typed in w those fields yourself will be overwritten OE Trend Client Control NOTE This will over write the fields with values based on the Data Source 7 12 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Click on Yes and the fields will be filled in with attributes from the OE Database for that signal Pen Configuration Data Ranges Limits Styles Data Source name char CW7 GV R1_DP_LIVE value float Device e char CW7 GV R1_DP_LIVE devicename char Status har CW7 GV R1_DP_LIVE questionable integer When this is checked fields are filled in automatically if the data exists in the OE Database for the signal named in Data Source Name name char CW7 GV R1_DP_LIVE name char Description Units Setting Ranges for a single Pen and Disabling Auto Scaling for the Common Y Axis Pen Configuration Earlier in this chapter we talked o change the range about auto scaling which is a a for the Y axis you can feature in which the Y axis of slur ares enter the lowest and the trend is set dynamically highest values for the oad signal in directly or you based
61. be easily imported into any new display which is created Symbols and displays can also use a technique called aliasing which allows symbols and even entire displays to be re used with different entries from the database depending upon which alias name is currently selected What is an OPC Tag OPC stands for Object linking and embedding for Process Control an industry standard that was developed by the OPC Foundation to allow a standard method of communication between different process control devices and software An OPC tag identifies a piece of information normally a signal value or attribute using the conventions of the OPC standard Within OpenEnterprise this allows data from the OE Database to be accessed by displays or trends or software by other vendors This chapter presents an overview of the display building process including e instructions for starting the OE Graphics software opening a display changing from configure to runtime mode saving the display etc e step by step examples for creating various display objects Various features of OE Graphics are highlighted as part of the examples 5 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process e instructions for working with symbols setting up aliasing of individual symbols saving them in the symbol library and re using them on other displays e suggestions for designing your entire human machine inte
62. but we could use any of the supported OE components another display window a trend window etc Opening Up an Existing Desktop File e To start open up the OE Desktop file created previously by clicking on Desktop gt Open Desktop and select the OED desktop file you created earlier or you can click on Desktop gt Recent Desktops and select from the desktops shown in the pop up menu El Opentnterprise Desktop Main Display Desking File iw Togs Securify Winder Finis e To open the new window click on Desktop gt New The New dialog box will appear 9 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop Choose the type of component and the type of window In the New dialog box complete the fields as described below e Choose the type of OE component you want to bring into the window In this case we are choosing OE Alarm View e Choose the type of window MDI Child Docked or Floating Choose Docked e Optionally enter a name for the window in the Window Name field Here we re using the name Alarm Window but you could choose any name you want e You can enlarge the dialog box to specify additional characteristics of the window by clicking on More gt gt but we re just doing a basic desktop so we won t do that for this example e Click on OK to create the window Different types of windows The term MDI is a Mi
63. choose which column attribute in the table will be used to organize the data and specify it in the Name field In database terminology this is sometimes referred to as the primary key Because we are logging signal data we always want to choose Name as the column because that has the signal name e An ID number to uniquely identify this Logging Group must be entered in the Group ID field e You can optionally enter text describing what s in this Logging Group in the Description field It s a good idea to do this because it helps you differentiate between the different Logging Groups e We need to specify the approximate number of objects to be logged In this case that s 500 signals e We only want to log selected signals so do NOT check Log All Objects If we wanted to log every signal in this table we would have checked it however e We also want to check the Enable box to enable logging for this group 6 32 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data First we need to identify the table in the OE Database that we re collecting data from In this case it s digital table Logging Group Source atts Table digital Name Column name Column name used to i Group Infomaation Group Id 3 Unique logging group identification number Source table for data logging Cant be modified for existing groups dentify logged object Descnptigh Logging
64. click on the Remove push button Specifying the Attributes You Want to Examine The Attributes page of the Database Object Viewer allows you to specify which attributes columns from the previously selected table you want to examine OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 15 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Click on the name of the attributes you want to examine in the Available Attributes list box then click on the Add push button The attribute name will be added to the Selected Attributes list box Click on the name of hen click on the Add the attribute you want push button andthe to examine in the name of the Attribute will Available Attributes appear in the Selected list box Attributes list box 7 Database Object Viewer New Query KIB File Options Query Hek Attributes SOL Filter Time Zone Objects Selected Attributes value valueovernide P Dynamic Sort Sort 4ecendir Active Query Be alanalog units char Objects 0 lf you change your mind and want to remove an attribute from the Selected Attributes list box click on its name then click on the Remove push button To remove all attributes use the Remove All push button You can now click on the Conditions page to continue defining your query Specifying Conditions to Limit the Amount of Data Returned By Your Query The Conditions page of the Database Object Viewer allows you to make
65. created earlier in the Available Reports field then click on gt and it will be moved to the Selected Reports field Schedule Configuration Schedule Configuration Reports This page allows the user to select the Reports that will be trigger d by the Schedule Reports Please select the Configured Reports that ill be triggered by this Schedule General GENea Available Reports Selected Reports Alarm Conditions Click on Next gt when finished 11 22 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Schedule Configuration Alarm Conditions Optionally you can specify that you want alarms to be generated based on the success or failure of the Report If so select those options Now click on Finish and your report schedule is complete You can optionally choose to generate alarms based on the whether the report runs or does not run successfully Schedule Configuration Schedule Configuration Alarm Conditions This page allows OpenEnterprise Alarm Conditions to be defined for the Schedule Alarm Conditions Please select one or more of the standard alarm pefiditions Sted below or create your own user defined alarm conditions as required _ Generate Alarm on Success V Generate Alarm if any Error occurs Configured Alarm Conditions Priority Type 254 Range Click on Finish when done OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 23 Chapter 11
66. data The raw dataset can be used to feed one or more compressed datasets Click here to add a new dataset Click on the Add push button and the Dataset Configuration dialog box will appear 6 22 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration Dialog Box Dataset Configuration This allows you to create or modify the dataset You can move from one page of the dialog box to the other by clicking on the tabs near the top of the dialog box Maximum Unsaved Data rp rsa pages of must always be greater the o og box by clicking than the polling rate Since on the tabs for this example the polling OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration rate IS 60 seconds were Dataset Configuration Archive ConfigerSfion fine with 30 minutes Fed From Dataset We are taking raw Descriptier Ray T minute data samples from the tollect Data by Poling real time database Every 60 Seconds i every minute Z Starting From _ 3 15 2007 Ww UTC We want the log file Keep For At LASH Log Directo Collect Data When Triggered to have at least 24 hours of data in it We want the log buffer to be copied into the log file Maximum Unsaved Dafa 30 a l at least every 30 minutes C History Log Files Use the Browse button if necessary to specify the path where log f
67. design if you desire In addition you may wish to check the symbol library to see if there is a tank symbol already made that you want to use Open a display in the OpenEnterprise Graphics package lt 9 Click on the box icon and create a box Switch to Runtime mode Display Opentntery rise by Bristol Sea name value units A D204 PO6RTU4 SELECT 7 D204 PO6RTUS SELECT D204 55100T LEYEL SP 5 3 FEET D204 55100T2 LEYEL FEET D204 55100T3 LEVEL 4 1 FEET i Click on Construct a query using the J Dynamics gt Actions gt Size Database Object Viewer l N Property Inspector bpp ETT Object Viewer m aA BO Rectangle Size Default Pick Data Source J Drag Drop Data Source ristolBabcock Bristo erve rei a Tags ScBRBe a BX 3 BristolBabcock BristolOPCS B Data Tag Tables Conditions Parameters Joins 2 Boeson 2 A oh i i Choose the seo F j zo m os eae i mp o ee which the ee i FE Hof g Oef Cap oae inner box will ETE a E Object Name change size i Description gi i r Custom Data Custom J 2 m i O Specify the range a aa and click on OK T E v D204 P581552 KWH gt bc For Help press Objects 172 172 0 gil scad t Gre amp Drag the appropriate tank level value aQoul2e ad OOF fl 7 Create a second box from the Database Object Viewer Into For Help ple
68. do this 6 12 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Step 3 Create A Logging Group REMINDER A logging group defines what data you want to log and how often you want to log it Now we have to create a logging group To add a new logging group click on the Add push button in the Historical Configuration dialog box The Logging Group page will appear Click on Add to create a new logging group Historical Configuration File View Help Group Id Source Table No logging groupe found Modify Delete OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 13 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Logging Group Page The Logging Group page allows you to select the name of the table in the Database from which data will be logged as well as specify how much data will be logged If you are collecting signal data you should choose name since the signal name is a unique identifier for each signal and is used as the primary key index for the table This lets you select a table in the Database Typically users collecting signal data will want to select either realanalog or digital as the source table Here we chose realanalog because it contains the signals we want to log Logging Group Source Table Table Source tab realanalog 4 ff Name Column Group Infomation The Logging Group page basically configures the oelogcontrol t
69. dragging an OPC Tag Property Inspector Text PPT DE Defaut Pick Data Source ODrag Drop Data Source BrstolBabcock BristolOPCServer ttrdb1 rei Data Tags Expression gt Point Fype R Uplate OPC Request Type NATIVE Data Entry Client Display Type DOUBLE kd Contin f Format CORK IOC od F il ILI Jhow Unit Thousands Separators Unit Position Jhi Leading Zeros nif Tert B FOREST orl bject Name PO Description Pe ustom Data se Custom Ol bein See ee E E E Eyyy yrr m E E The drag handles can be used to manually re size the text The color red indicates that this object in the display contains live data NOTE The OPC tag is now visible within the display if you move the cursor over the process point OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 15 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 7 Switch to Runtime mode to view the active data on the display by clicking on Runtime in the menu bar The live data value should appear on the display and should match that in the active query of the Database Object Viewer In Runtime mode the data value in the active query of the Database Object Viewer and the value of the process point should be the same zj Display1 Open Sele File View Tools Cor a Datayase Object Viewer GP a EA a Za wv Tables Condiians Farameters Joins 3 70 name N vae o
70. draws on the screen for a particular trended signal is called the trace If you are including multiple signals pens in this particular trend you will want to make sure that the traces differ in appearance otherwise you won t be able to tell the OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Why do we use the term pen when we talk about trends We say a trend pen because the pen you define draws a representation of the signal values on the screen just as if you had drawn a chart on a piece of paper In fact the concept of pens is actually borrowed from the analog chart recorder market Chart recorders are mechanical devices in which paper rotates past one or more ink pens which change their position based on the value of a particular value Although chart recorders are still in use in recent years electronic devices have replaced many of them If you re too young to have seen a chart recorder you might be have seen seismographs on television or the movies which measure the force of earthquakes or polygraphs which measure blood pressure perspiration etc in an attempt to detect someone lying All of these devices operate on the same basic principle a strip of paper or a round chart moving through a mechanical device with some pens recording data on it The main difference is that in OpenEnterprise the data is trended on your computer s screen instead of on a paper chart 7 1 Chapt
71. files In this example we re going to cover archive files created when the log file reaches a certain specified size The other way to create an archive file is on a pre defined schedule OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration Start Time Repeat Interval Archive Directories Online Archives C History Arch Files Offline Archives C History Offline Arch Files Auto Archive Archive When 25 percent of the Log File has not been archived _ Automatically Online Archives Maximum Online Archives Archive Cataloguing Click on OK when finished Timed Archive Specify the path where archive files will be stored Use the button if necessary This means we are going to create an archive whenever the log file is 75 full This is the number of archive files kept on line in memory In this example each archive file includes 75 of a log file worth of data or 0 75 x 24 hours i e approximately 18 hours of data If we keep 15 of them on line that means we have 15 x 18 or 270 hours of data on line about 11 days worth of data ID Description Start Time Repeat Interval Add Delete Modify Archive Directories Online Archives Offline Archives Timed Archives are archives that are configured to occur according to a regular schedule We re going to cover Timed Archives in a different example so we won t talk about them here This specifie
72. files are generated Start Time point from which future archive files Po ah A E will be scheduled for creation ai archive fil is generated Click on aes OK when We chose midnight of the current day finished as the Start Time We recommend your Starting time always be in the past OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 43 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data The Repeat Interval is the period of time as measured from the Start Time at which future archive files will be created For example if my Start Time is January 1 2005 at 12 00 AM and the Repeat Interval is Daily then the next time an archive file would be created would be at 12 00 AM on January 2 2005 The Timed Archive is now defined Sometimes if your system has a great deal of activity on the hour because of polling or report generation etc you may want to schedule the Archive File generation to occur at some offset into the interval For example if i ae s ee you specify an offset of 5 minutes that means that the system won t generate the Archive File until 5 minutes after the scheduled interval time In this case that would be 12 05 AM instead of 12 00 AM OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration Dataset Configuration Archive Configuration Timed Archive Archive Directories Online Archives C History Arch Files When finished defining the timed archive Offline Archives C History Offline Arch Files
73. finished configuring the historical system click on Next gt 5 Database Project Builder E fol You may configure your system so that it will log histoncal data OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Historical Data You may choose from a series of configuration Templates or manually configure historical data by pressing Advanced Selected Templates El EE Analog 1 minute samples with houny and dail compression ABC Description 200 Signals ession Fimsh Click on Next gt OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 15 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Configuring an OpenEnterprise Session The Session page lets you configure an OpenEnterprise session When you ve made your selections click on Next gt What is an OpenEnterprise Session The heart of OpenEnterprise software is the OE Database running on the OpenEnterprise Server computer In order for the OE Database to function properly however there are other programs that need to be running as well For example the communication driver you selected earlier must be running You might have other programs you want to run too such as the Reporting package Any software you want to run together with the OE Database can be grouped together in an OE Session A session is a collection of programs that run concurrently when you start the session all the programs grouped together in that session are started automatically If yo
74. g j a ee 7 Database Explorer Where can I get more information Now that you ve finished this chapter you should have a pretty good idea about what OpenEnterprise OE is and what sort of information is stored in the OE Database You should also be at least somewhat familiar with the terminology we use when talking about the database We also hope you understand the concept of client and server e For information on actually installing OpenEnterprise software please see the OpenEnterprise Installation Guide portion of the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide document D5092 e For information on particular features of OpenEnterprise see the online help files e For information on configuring your controllers so data will be collected by OE see Chapter 3 e For information on the Database Explorer program see Chapter 4 e For information on alarm concepts in Network 3000 controllers see An Introduction to ACCOL document D4056 e For information on alarm concepts in ControlWave controllers see the Alarm Configuration section of the ControlWave Designer Programmer s Handbook document D5125 e For information on how Report By Exception RBE works see the RBE section of the ACCOL II Reference Manual document D4044 and the online help file in ControlWave Designer For advanced software developers requiring detailed technical information on RBE see Appendix D of the Network 3000 Communications Application Pr
75. gt gt push button the column name will be removed from the Available Fields list and then appear in the Fields to be Logged box Which Fields to be Logged box it appears in depends upon the data type of the field For example analog data signal values would appear under Analog Fields whereas status bits like questionable data would appear under Boolean fields Fields to Be Logged The three Fields to be Logged boxes show which of the columns selected from the Available Fields box are to be logged by the Historian They also specify which calculations compression options if any should be applied to the logged data For this example we re only using the raw data For an explanation of the various compression options see Table 6 1 on page 6 7 To add a particular column name to the Fields to be Logged box click on its name in the Available Fields box then click on the gt gt push button To remove a particular column name from the Fields to be Logged box click on its name in the Fields to be Logged box then click on the lt lt push button NOTE When you first come to this page you may see the AccessArea field in the Fields to be Logged box AccessArea relates to security issues that are beyond the scope of this chapter therefore we decided not to log that field We just want to log the following fields timestamp curre
76. how to configure local alarms 5 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms Example 1 Starting the Alarm Viewer and Viewing All Incoming Alarms On the OE workstation start the OE Alarm Viewer by clicking as shown below Start gt Programs gt OpenFEnterprise gt Views gt Alarms Something called the OE Alarm View Container will appear It s called a container because it doesn t include the alarm view information in it yet i This menu bar item allows you e The first thing you need to to toggle between Configure mode do is go into Configure and Runtime mode Currently i 8 Configure mode is Active Mode by clicking on the Untitled OEContainer Configure button eo ee e NOTE The Confi 8 ure id description name alarmtext occurencetime questionabletime loggedtime acknowledgedtime priority menu bar item will be replaced with a menu bar item called Runtime this is similar to Configure N Runtime modes used in OE Graphics when you see Runtime you re in Configure Mode and when you see Configure you re in Runtime Mode Alarm Client Configure Mode e Right click in the center of the container and click on Right click within the window Properties when it to bring up the pop up menu and click on Properties to pops up activate the OE Alarm Client Control Properties dialog box OpenEnterprise for Begi
77. iGMT 05 00 Eastem Time US amp Canada Ti Historical Data Hiis vers Network 3000 and ControlWave Driver larstinn Session Finish a Note The database will be builtin a temporary locaton Click on Next gt to create an initial database An initial version of the OE Database containing the configuration information chosen so far is now created When all of the listed actions are marked as Done and the Build Completed Successfully message is displayed click on Next gt Click on Next gt when the Status for all actions shows as Done Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Build The Wizard is now building your base configuration Please wait Build Errors Action Status Copy Files to build locktion Done Start empty database Done Include schema Done Shutdown database Done Prepare users script Done Prepare main script Done Start database Done Include Load In Progress Shutdown database Database Size Start database Set user privileges Historical Data Shutdown database eee Start built database Finish Signal Data Overall Progress TOn Cancel Build 3 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Adding Signal Variable Tag Names to the Database Tables Although we ve created an initial version of the OE Database many of its tables are empty We need to include information about the sig
78. in the ALL area Let s say for example we have a SCADA system with one main control center in the city of Centerville and an operator sub station in each of the two neighboring towns of Weston and Laraby The operators in Centerville need to be able to see everything in Centerville as well as everything in Weston and Laraby The operators in Weston need to see their own data only The operators in Laraby need to see the data in Laraby as well as the data in Weston We can create an access area for each of EiT Fie Edit Tools Hel these geographical locations The access E areas will be called CENTERVILLE Security Contig fii Default Group LARABY and WESTON i oi Right click on the AccessArea aue item in the tree and choose To New AccessArea from the pop 2 fag Groups up menu To start right click on the AccessArea pole eer la item in the tree in the Security aia Configuration Tool and choose New Se AccessArea from the pop up menu LA ar New Accesstres 10 20 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Access Area Description A box will appear in the right pane of the tool Type the name of the new access area in the box and press the Enter key In this A pm Aeceepe instance we are typing in CENTERVILLE Enter the name of the Access Area in the box and press the Enter key After pressing the Enter key the Access Area E
79. in various displays by dragging it out of the symbol library when needed See Using a Pre Drawn Object from the Symbol Library which was part of Example 4 Updating Shared Objects Suppose you have used the symbol multiple times on multiple displays but now you decide for whatever reason that you want to change the symbol s line style to use thicker lines as shown at right If you had to manually change each individual symbol it could result in hours of work Because you assigned a share keyword however you only need to make the change once OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 43 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process To do this right click on the symbol in one of the displays and choose the line width option from the pop up menu We re choosing line width for this example but we could have chosen other items from the menu NOTE You should never ungroup a symbol or the shared object name will be lost To edit parts of the symbol choose Edit Symbol in this case those parts should have had shared keywords defined When the change has been completed choose Edit gt Update Shared Objects and you will be prompted to identify the scope of the change current display multiple files and if multiple files select which files are to be updated Also specify if there are parts of the object to be preserved ut Copy Delete Delete Dynamics E I Paste Dynamics Fill Color
80. lose any data however be aware that doing so could have negative effects on system performance and prevent you from adding additional signals during future system expansion since the buffer size is fixed and cannot be changed Because of this the Maximum Unsaved Data should typically be set to at least 5 to 10 times the Collect Data by Polling rate specified for this dataset and should never be less than twice that rate Note A feature called database persistence can reduce the amount of data lost in power failures see the Session Manager documentation in the OE Reference Manual for more information OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 45 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Opentnterprise Historical Configuration On the Archive Configuration page enter parameters defining Dataset Configuration Archive Configuration i Timed Archive Click on Add how Hany archive files you ID Description Start Time Repeat Interval to define the Timed want online for this dataset and Archive where you want to store them Now click on the Add button Location to add a new timed archive for of Archive Add i this dataset files Archive Directores Online Archives C History ArchFiles M Offline Archives C History Offiine Arch Files Number of C Auto Archive s Automatically Online Archives Maximum Online Archives Archive Cataloguing on line Archive Files
81. need saves memory and disk space e Columns are chosen by making entries in the oelogcolumn table using the Historical Configuration Tool e Calculations can be performed on the raw data such as averages minimums maximums etc The new calculated data is called compressed data Choosing Columns For Logging Assuming you re logging signal data you ll usually want to log things like the signal s value its questionable data status the timestamp of the reading etc We recommend you also log the daylight savings time offset dstoffset if you re in a region which uses daylight savings time otherwise you can end up with problems in third party software that depends 6 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data on timestamps You don t need to log the signal name because that will be automatically logged and used to organize the data in the Logging Group We ll talk about that later in the examples Decide what calculations if an ou want to perform on the logged data If you just want to save raw data samples you don t need to perform calculations But if you want to calculate things like averages minimum values etc that means you will be saving compressed data which we mentioned earlier Again the sorts of data compression you perform are dictated by the requirements of your particular system Table 6 1 Calculations that can be performed Type of Description Data Type Example input
82. next level of displays typically correspond to functional or geographical sections of your process For example if your system has 34 compressor stations you might need to have a detailed display for each compressor station If the compressor stations are all identical you may be able to use a single display with aliases which allow the operator to select the desired station thereby reducing the amount of disk space used by the displays If it takes more than 2 or 3 mouse clicks to reach the information you need you should re think your display hierarchy Your system might include additional displays for more detailed information for each station such as alarms trends communications etc You might want to embed certain displays within other displays for example a small display for starting or stopping a pump or a faceplate display for entering setpoints OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 53 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Whichever way you choose to setup your hierarchy it should follow a logical consistent format Operators should easily be able to navigate from one display to another and to go up and down through the different levels of the hierarchy If it takes more than 2 or 3 mouse clicks to reach the information you need you should re think your display hierarchy You should also consider what sort of display properties you want to set For example what size will your displays be
83. next screen OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 5 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Including the Default Security Groups Security Groups are discussed in detail in Chapter 10 We recommend you leave the Include the standard Security Groups box checked and click on the Next gt button We recommend you include the standard security groups Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Security Groups You may include a standard set of security groups Include the standard Security Groups focatons Administrators Unrestricted access to all OpenEnterprise functionality Time Zone Engineers Configuration access to all system features except those related to Device Drivers controlling security privileges of other users Summary iii Build Can change set points acknowledge alarmes and perform basic Workstaton configuration but no server configuration Signal Data Dispatchers Read only access to all operatonal and process data and ability to Historical Data acknowledge alarms No configuraton privileges or set pomt changes Database Size Session Finish Guest Read only access No configuration set point changes or alarm acknowldgement These are the privileges granted to a user who has not logged on to the system Click on Next gt to proceed to the next screen A aoe t will appear Database Project Builder notifying you that a default user called SYSTEM has been a
84. now we know that when we issued that query there were 3 signals in alarm within the Realanalog table OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 5 Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users Example 2 Say we only wanted to see the names of signals in the Realanalog table and we didn t care about their value or whether they were in an alarm state We could have entered a simpler command that specifies only one attribute and no WHERE condition option SQL gt select name from realanalog Our result would be a list of all the signal names stored in the name attribute column of the realanalog table TANKS RENT 2002 3 TANKS RENT 3003 4 TANKS 24 REND 00 45 TANK Sea RCONT 000 TANKS RCNT 2006 WTANKS S FRONT 00T TANKS MIs TEMP TANKS M1 TEMP 2 we re not showing all the results because it would go on for 3 pages TANKS soto CHARGES TIME TANKS TANK LIQUID LEV poe SSS SS SS eS SS eS Se SS Query Done 203 records selected SQL gt Pretty easy huh But maybe you re saying at this point Well that s fine but I m just learning this stuff How am I supposed to know about all these different attribute names for the columns and which ones to use Good point Some of this comes from practice You ll probably find that over time you ll know that certain attributes are interesting to you and others you don t have to remember You also could have looked i
85. of the primary key for the table and uniquely identify the objects within the table Foreign Key Attributes in the table that are used as part of another table s primary key and are used to reference those objects from this table OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 2 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Not Key Attributes in the table that are NOT part of any key Nullable Attributes in the table that can hold a NULL value Not Nullable Attributes in the table that can NEVER hold a NULL value Persistent Attributes in the table that are saved to disk when the server is shut down Not Persistent Attributes that are never saved to disk Hidden Attributes in the table that by default are not visible to the user NOTE This is not a security feature just a convenience These attributes are typically of little interest to most users Not Hidden Attributes in the table that by default are available to the user To choose all criteria i e no attributes excluded click on the Set All push button To exclude all criteria typically done to de select everything and then select only a few criteria click on the Clear All push button 4 22 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data E Saving the Criteria Used For Your Query in A DBX File Once you have finished creating your query you can save the query criteria so that you can run it again in the future DBX files are a way to
86. on the Expression button then click on the button Line Styles Visible In the Styles page select the Expression button then click on the button to call up the Expression Editor Marker Styles Style Ealar Constant Expression 7 30 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Because we want to have the trace change based on the questionable value of this signal we need to use the HDA Tag Browser to load the proper OE Database attribute into the Tag field OEExpressionEditor Base Settings Now in the Expression Editor we need to specify the OE Defaut RetumVaue il Database attribute for the Questionable status of this signal Conditions To do this click on the button to call up the HDA Tag Browser Once you re in the Tag Browser navigate through the tree and use the scroll bar to locate the signal you want to trend Double click on the signal to expand its branch of the tree Locate the rate for the data you want to trend and double click on it Once you choose the rate you want to trend by double clicking on it the right side of the Tag Browser will display the attributes which have been logged at that rate We will want to trend use the Questionable attribute in our expression so select that one NOTE If we had other attributes we could have used them too but this example is using Questionable because that s
87. on values coming in for camusethe Dalabac the signal being trended ae Object Viewer to drag in Minimum 0 000000 _ signals from the OE Maximum 300 000000 Database which will hold the minimum or maximum value Data Ranges Limits Styles If desired we can turn auto scaling off and instead have the Y axis scale set based on a defined range for the signal This range would typically be the lowest and highest possible values for the signal To set the range for the Y axis click on the Ranges tab of the Pen Configuration dialog box and enter a range using the Minimum and Maximum fields Alternatively you could drag in signals using the Database Object Viewer the value of which will serve as the values for the fields Once you click on OK to exit the dialog box you might expect that the scale would appear differently in the Graph pane That s not the case however because auto scaling is still active OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 13 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Some trend configuration settings affect just a single pen while others apply to all pens in the Some trend trend There are even some things that may be CO nfig uration settings set in two places once for the entire Trend and a s once for an individual pen Settings that apply affect just dl single pen to all pens in the trend are called common while others apply to because they are shared in common
88. presented with a particular token by placing that token in that user or group s include list A user or group is denied the use of a particular token by placing that token in that user s exclude list NOTE Not including a token is the same as excluding it so you usually don t have to explicitly exclude a token just don t include it A token group is simply a bundle of several tokens Usually a token group includes all the tokens associated with a particular OpenEnterprise component Therefore if you want to give a user or group access to all of the tokens associated with a particular OpenEnterprise component give them the token group associated with that component You can also create user defined token groups that contain tokens from more than one OpenEnterprise component That is beyond the scope of this manual There are different categories of tokens that s why they re on different pages of the Group Users We ll talk about each of them as we go to each page OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 11 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Choosing Application Tokens for a User or Group NOTE When we re creating the ADMINISTRATORS group we can skip this page and go directly to Token Groups Since you re going to create other groups as well though we ll describe how it works Select the application token s you want to award to this group or user from the Available Tokens list then click on Include gt
89. refers to historical data storage at the OE Server computer Most Bristol RTUs also can store historical data locally in structures which also happen to be called archive files They are different even though they serve a similar purpose storing historical data e Data from log files is copied into archive files for permanent storage e Archive files can only be queried for data if they are on line Only a certain number of archive files can be on line e The Archive File Tool can bring archive files on line and take them off line as needed e Don t keep too many archive files on line or system performance may suffer In addition since archive files are permanent and don t get overwritten new ones are regularly being generated Because of that over time the hard disk on the OE Server can get filled up with off line archive files To avoid that from happening you should periodically back up those off line archive files to another place The Archive File Tool that we mentioned earlier can automatically copy the off line archive files to another hard disk or server to prevent the server disk from filling up If you don t have another server you could back up the off line archive files onto storage media tape CD etc and then delete those archive files from the OE Server OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 3 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Comparing Log Files and Archive Files Log Files Archiv
90. s Result stored for example table column 0 None Raw unprocessed any 23 47 23 47 table value is chosen from samples 5 Last value Last non NULL input any 38 1 50 6 33 7 48 1 48 1 value is chosen from samples chosen from samples or DATETIME value chosen from samples or DATETIME 8 Average value Each sample is INTEGER or 38 1 for 58 seconds 38 1 x 58 50 6 x 62 33 7 x 59 time weighted multiplied by the REAL 50 6 for 62 seconds 48 1 x 61 number of seconds it 33 7 for 59 seconds 58 62 59 61 was in the source table 48 1 for 61 seconds The resulting weighted 42 78916 samples are added together and divided by NOTE The time weighted average is the total number of more accurate than a straight average seconds of all the of summing the samples and dividing samples by the total 11 Integral Estimated area bounded INTEGER or 38 1 for 58 seconds 38 1 x 58 50 6 x 62 33 7 x 59 by input values Used REAL 50 6 for 62 seconds 48 1 x 61 10269 4 for calculating totals 33 7 for 59 seconds e g total flow 48 1 for 61 seconds 12 logical AND Logical AND applied to INTEGER or Example 1 input values BOOL 1 1 1 1 0 Example 2 Lol dl 13 logical OR Logical OR applied to INTEGER or Example 1 input values BOOL 1 1 1 1 0 Example 2 14 ON count The number of times a boolean switched to ON OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 7 Chapter 6 Working with Historica
91. samples This should give you a good start Well that should be enough trend examples to get you started Don t be afraid to experiment with different trend and plot styles be creative if you want to Once you get good at creating trends someone is going to come along and say something like Gee that s a nice trend but can you change the color of the marker bar or Can you change the way the label looks for that axis There are a lot of things like that that you can change We really can t give detailed examples for all of them because it s just beyond the scope of a book like this If you need to know more please consult the online help or see the OE Trend View section of the OE Reference Guide document D5092 7 40 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms We talked about alarms a little back in Chapter An alarm is a message that gets generated when a particular signal s value exceeds a predefined range 1 e it goes too high or too low or when a particular signal changes to an alarm state 1 e a pump fails a valve opens etc Alarms are collected and sent to the OE Server computer but in order for you to see them on the OE Workstation you need to use the OE Alarm Viewer sometimes referred to as the Alarm Client An alarm means something just happened and needs attention For example the controller detected that a pump failed or a pressure signal
92. save To do this click on the Save As icon or click on File gt your queries and re use Save As Standard Windows Save dialog boxes will them later appear in which you can specify a path and filename for your database query The file extension for database queries is DBX Subsequent changes can be saved by clicking on the Save icon or by clicking on File gt Save NOTE If you save your DBX file in the default directory with the same name as the table or view from which you queried data the query can later be recalled by double clicking on the table name in the Database Tree Control Window DBX files can be recalled into the Database Object Viewer to re initiate a query and may also be used by other OE components H l Opening An Existing DBX File If you have previously saved the criteria for a query in a DBX file you can open it by clicking on the Open Query icon or by clicking on File gt Open and selecting the DBX file from the dialog box If you saved your DBX file in the default directory with the same name as the table or view for which you issued your query you can recall the DBX file by double clicking on the table name in the Database Tree Control window OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 23 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Adding Live Data to Third Party Applications by Dragging DDE Tags Another use of the Database Object Viewer is to establish live dynamic d
93. specify details on the FTP server that would hold the report Not shown Use the Browse button to specify the destination on the server for this report Recipient Configuration Recipient Configuration Settings This page allows the user to define the type specific propert File Copy Location C Backup Browse Alarm Conditions User Credentials can only be defined if the location is defined as a UNC path Domain User Name Password Click on Next gt when finished 11 26 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Recipient Configuration Alarm Conditions Optionally you can specify that an alarm will be generated if a problem occurs with the report You can also specify that you want an alarm generated when the report runs successfully Make any choices as desired then click on Finish You ve now defined your recipient Repeat this process if you have other recipients to define You can optionally choose to have alarms generated if there are problems with the report generation process Click on Finish to complete defining the recipient Recipient Configuration Recipient Configuration Alarm Conditions This page allows OpenEnterprise Alarm Conditions to be defined for the Report Recipients Alarm Conditions Please select one or more of the standard alarm conditions listed below or create your own user dgfined alarm conditions as required _ Generate A
94. status values for pumps valves etc Histonicg Access Tables Raw Default table names for retrieving May be edited later int Wizard for a new compressed group Cant be todified for existing groups Logging Estimated number prn of objects to log C Required for buffer size calculations You may log all objects in the source table or select whichis Advanced Enabled Uncheck to disable logging for this group Configuration Options We also need to choose which column of the source table will serve as the primary key for all the logged data Any time we log signal data we always choose name for this so that data will be organized based on the signal name eg d data Advanced The ID identifies this Logging Group It must be unique within the system This textual description is optional Number of objects to log would be the number of signals you want to log in this case This must be checked or else logging would be disabled Click on Next gt to continue defining this Logging Group Click on Next gt to go to the next page of the dialog box Step 2 Choose the Columns You Want to Log Choose the columns attributes you want to log on the Logging Group Select Fields page For the logical signals we want to log the readvalue field 1 e the last value read from the controller the inhibit bits alarminhibit controlinhibit manualinhibit an
95. the ControlWave Designer Programmer s Handbook document D5125 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 2 9 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Things you have to do before you start building the OE Database Okay we know that you re just itching to get started but first there are some things that MUST be done before you start Your hardware must have been set up We re going to assume at this point that you ve set up all your hardware By that we mean that e The OE Server computer has been set up powered on and is ready to go See the documentation accompanying the server hardware for help on doing this e All the necessary communication cables linking the OE Server and controllers must have been connected e The controller network has been set up powered on See the Bristol controller hardware manuals and the Open BSI software manuals see below for information on this As mentioned elsewhere we recommend you use test hardware not live hardware for initial development e Optionally OE Workstations can also be set up at this time Otherwise they can be added later We recommend building the system with a single workstation and adding others later e Each controller must be running a control strategy file which has been prepared for use with OE This was discussed in Chapter 2 NOTE Hardware setup is beyond the scope of this manual Backup Your OpenEnterprise Server UPGRADES RE BUILD
96. the accessarea and choosing Add Choose the accessarea you want this user to be able to access and click on Add User Properties BOB Custom Token File Token OPC Item Token To Group Properties Account Summary Access Areas Apffication Token Available accessarea Description LARABY Laraby Sub Station i WESTON Weston Sub Station Associated accessarea Description ALL Default Access Area OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 23 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Configuring Security for Tables and Views Except for what we ve just done related to access areas most of what we ve done thus far deals with security restrictions imposed on users of an OpenEnterprise Workstation But what about people or programs connecting to the OpenEnterprise Server We haven t really dealt with that yet All your users and groups need access to tables in the OpenEnterprise Database otherwise even though they can run various configuration tools they re not going to be able to actually change anything in the OpenEnterprise Database The Security Group Privileges tool lets you grant access to tables in OpenEnterprise i rtrdb1 ToolB x The Security Group lA ae Kax Privileges tool is ae accessible from the ay ra i Q P Alarm Alarm Priorities Archive Files Calculations Diaries and Historian Locked Messaging NwWw3000 Nw3000 Conditions Calendars Objects Archives Monitor OE Tool
97. the first page of the Logging Group dialog box the same way as before The only change we made was increasing the number of objects from 500 to 1000 We didn t do that for any particular reason other than to show you that it can be some other number than 500 it is set to however many signals you want to log Enter a textual description of this Logging Group Choose a unique Logging Group number Choose name since we re logging signal data Choose the realanalog table Logging Group Source Table z ource table for data logging realanalog Cant be modified for existing groups Name Column name Column name used to identetSqged objects Group Information Group ld 9 Unique logging group identificatioe riimber Wh en logg ng sign al d ata Description Fow Data 1 minute samples this is the number of signals Historical Access Tables you want to log Raw Default tgaeTames for retrieving logged data Jose edited later in the wizard for a new Compressed group Cant be modified for existing groups Logging Estimated number p00 R f l of objects to log equired for buffer size calculations This must be enabled _ iLog All Objects You may log all objects in the source ebteors lect which to log later TEE Click on Next gt when finished Enabled Uncheck to disable logging for this group Configuration DA Options OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 39 Chapter 6 Worki
98. the most important information you will find on the Summary Page is the number of bytes required to store all of the historical data you want to retain This is important to know since the amount of available space on your OpenEnterprise Server s hard disk must be larger than this amount and have room to spare for running programs etc Logging Group Summary Logging table realanalog Logging group 4 Logging is enabled Description Raw data collecton from realanalog_table Name column name Raw data will be saved to table raw 4l_table Compressed data will be saved to table comp4_table Only log enabled objects An estimated 200 objects will be logged Enable column controlinhibit Log timestamp provided by column timestamp Columns Column timestamp Raw value as lastcollected Column questionable Raw value as questionable Column cumentdstoffset Raw value as cumentdstottset Column value Raw value as value Datasets Dataset Os Description Raw 11 minute data Logging every 60 Seconds Using a logging ongin of 03 75 07 10 05 00 Uses 48 buffers of 764641 bytes each NOTE Certain items CANNOT be changed after you save them thereby requiring you to re create the entire logging group in order to fix problems It is recommended therefore that you review information on the Logging Group Summary Page carefully since this is your final opportunity to make changes before saving all information to the database If there are items you want to c
99. the new window Piol OpenEnterprise Desktop Alarm Window Main Display Desktop File View Tools Security Window Help Hill Top Belefville el Main Display Alarm Window i lt lt itstitsS ma m occurencetime Y name value units acknowledged 12 JUN 2007 08 32 54 300 CW7 FAILED FAZED FALSE Alarms 1 UnClr 1 UnAck 1 Ack 0 SYSTEM Our Overview gdf The docked Alarm Window now display is maximized includes actual alarm data in the Main Display window We can see other parts of it by moving the scroll bars e Click on Desktop gt Save Desktop to save your modified OE Desktop file You now have an OE Desktop file with a main window for holding displays called Main Display and an alarm window for displaying your current alarms called Alarm Window If desired you could add some additional windows for more components trends for example however remember that although there is no fixed limit on the number of windows within the desktop other than available memory adding too many windows may overwhelm the user OpenEnterprise for Beginners 9 9 Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop Example 3 Creating an OE Desktop that Includes Menu Items for Displays Suppose you have several displays and you want to create menu items for accessing the displays within the desktop That way the operator can easily select which displays they want to see To do this sta
100. the speed of your network Resolving Analog signals from Remote Reading Analog Signals trom Database Updating Logicals in Database Resolving Logical signals from Remote Reading Logical Signals from Database Resolving node Cw directly from ATU OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 1 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Creating Poll Lists for Data Collection Templates also known as poll lists allow groups of signals to be collected at certain specified rates After DBB finishes you will be prompted whether or not you want to build templates for data collection Click on Yes The Poll List Builder runs automatically Estimating the Maximum Database Size Based on the number of signals inserted by the Database Builder DBB OpenEnterprise will attempt to estimate the size of various database tables If you know the maximum number of signals will be larger than the estimate enter revised numbers in the fields provided Click on Next gt 3 12 Click on Next gt Database Project Builder Build Collect Alarm States Analogs _ Digitals Processing Rtu MSD Version Templates Formed 0 Total Templates Built Template Name Type Timeclass Signals Status Monitor Mode INACTIVE TPB State Building Status Building templates for Atu Cw2 0 Templates for Atu Cw 1 build successfuly Updating Rtu List Building templates for Atu Cw TPB Processor Started e
101. the steps within ACCOL Workbench or ControlWave Designer that need to be performed to identify data to be collected by OpenEnterprise IMPORTANT This section is NOT going to tell you everything you need to know when using ACCOL Workbench or ControlWave Designer it just highlights the parts which are related to whether or not a signal or variable will get collected into the OE Database It doesn t give detailed instructions If you need help using ACCOL Workbench see the ACCOL Workbench User Manual document D405 1 If you need help using ControlWave Designer see the Getting Started with ControlWave Designer Manual document D5085 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 2 3 Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE Preparing an ACCOL Load to work with OE As mentioned earlier for any ACCOL signal to be collected into the OE Database it must be designated as one of the following 1 A alarm signal or 2 A global signal or 3 An RBE signal Specifying an Alarm Signal in ACCOL Workbench e On the General page of the Signal Properties dialog box for the signal you must choose either Logical Alarm or Analog Alarm as the signal s Type The Type you select must be either Analog Alarm or Logical Alarm 2 4 Signal Properties General Settings vA Fa Base Name STATION Fa F Extension Attribute Type Analog Alarm _ Logical x Read
102. the workstations in a high traffic area Are they in a room which can be locked up to prevent unauthorized access Are the environmental conditions in the room poor Excessive dust humidity etc Networked Surveillance of Remote Sites using ControlWave If surveillance cameras are part of your physical security scheme you should be aware that ControlWave series controllers have successfully been used as part of surveillance schemes Using third party security cameras and software captured images can be uploaded to the controller and stored in FLASH memory Customers can download the images via File Transfer Protocol FTP See the ControlWave Security Vision Application User s Guide document D5126 for more information Maintain Current Backups This is valuable not only for security issues but for any type of disaster recovery System Administrators should back up all necessary files on a regular basis and store the backup media tapes CDs zip disks in a safe secure location preferably off site Human Factors This may seem basic but the downfall of security is often the human factor No matter how well you configure your security system please remember the following Don t post your passwords right next to the workstation Don t write passwords down where unauthorized persons can read them Don t keep using default published passwords Don t keep using old passwords known by former employees Don t use simple passwo
103. there is one warning we want to pass along when setting the period for a trend Don t try to trend too much data in one trend As a general guide you should never try to display more trend data points than there are pixels across your screen For example 1f your screen resolution is 1024 x 768 that means no more than 1024 data points can possibly appear horizontally on the screen For example if you are trying to see 1 minute data for the last 90 days that s 1440 data points x 90 days which equals 129 600 samples That s a lot of data to try to fit onto one screen and can really slow down your system performance and use up lots of communication bandwidth as all the data is requested If you really want to display that much data you have two alternatives 1 Use Performance Mode which was added in OpenEnterprise 2 7 In Performance Mode the trend will change the resolution of data requested from the server as you zoom in and out This will speed up the rate at which the trend is drawn and reduce the network bandwidth required to request the data See Example 6 for details on using Performance Mode 2 Set the viewable time range to a few hours and then use the double arrow buttons on the ends of the scroll bar to bring additional hours of data into view You won t be able to see all the data at once but this will save on system resources by not requesting the data until it needs to be displayed 7 28 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Cha
104. this page you have the option of If desired rename the view here renaming the internal table used to hold BACILE this data Rename the view if desired and click on Next gt Click on Next gt when finished OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 37 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Step 6 Choose the Objects Signals You Want to Log Because we didn t select Log All Objects back on page 6 33 we now have to choose which signals you want to log Select the signals and click on the gt gt button to mark them for logging Click on Next 100 to bring additional signals into the window and repeat the process When youre finished click on Next gt Now click on Finish on the Logging Group Summary page and you re done The only real difference between this example and Example 1 is that we logged signals only when they changed 1 e logging on exception based on a trigger the readvalue column Select the signals you want to log and click on the gt gt button to mark them for logging Logging Group Select Objects Browse Objects Logged Objects D204 DIAG 001 name A iam A D204 LINE 000 D204 LINE O01 regionname D204 LINE 002 datumaddress i D204 LINE QAS A HANE 005 LINE 0O6 B04 LINE O07 D204 LINE O08 0204 LINE O09 D204 LINE O10 D204 LINE O11 D204 LINE 012 D204 LINE 013 D204 LINE O1 4 D204 LINE O15 D204 0CT
105. to change the text label you ve just created you must right click on it and m choose Property Inspector from the pop up menu You could also have chosen Edit gt Text to edit the text directly on the screen but the Property Inspector provides more options You should experiment with the Property Inspector dialog box to see the various options for representing text Property Inspector Text Text Color BB line with fo Fill Color E Line Style No Line Sigdow Color 3D Edge None s Ho Pattern a l Freeze Object W Stretch Text On Ress Font Arial S s 10 Font OMPRESSOR STATION NUMBER Text Lett sund Lett T Object Mame Description Shar Keyword Custom Data Custom Cancel Apply Help If desired you can edit the text directly in this field OpenEnterprise for Beginners Use this list box to change the edge around the text You can have a raised edge a sunken edge etc Click here to call up the Font dialog box to change the font Styles of the text Call up a pallette to select a different background color for the data 5 13 BS COMPRESSOR STAUORe Cue Copy Delete Delete Dynamics Fill Color Line Color Line Width H Line Style d Toggle Fill Toggle Freeze Font Property Inspector Edit Text Edit Local Aliases Edit Connections Create VBA Script Create VBScript Create JScrip
106. to the RTU e Enter the lowest and highest possible values for the setpoint signal e Click on the Set Limits push button and define the limits for the sliding setpoint control See step 7 Property Inspector OPC tag for the setpoint Rectangle Location Defaut Pick signal must be dragged Data Source I in from Database Object BristolBabcock BristolOPCServer rtrdb1 rei Data Tags Viewer Expression You must click on Set Limits 98 zA aie Choose Slider i oye v Tracking to specify how the sliding DA setts Bous Update pointer will move SEE T Detents Low fo orc a l Confirmation Specify the range i Delete These selections of values for the object Name _ determine when setpoint signal Description g the RTU receives Custom Data custom the new setpoint r Tracking is the recommended ox coma oy Ha Method 5 28 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 7 Drag the setpoint control from the bottom of the tank level graphic to the top this represents the full range of movement for the control Then press the Esc key and you will return to the Property Inspector dialog box Click on OK When you reach the upper limit press the Esc key 2200021 L Drag the setpoint control 799997 Ie along its full range of er movement In this case that would be from the bottom up to the to
107. two destination columns to have the same default name a prefix will automatically be added such as object To change the destination column name type a new name in the Data Access Column The destination column in the historical logging table can be renamed by typing a new name here Logging Group Name Fields Logged Fields ae Column lastcollected Walle questionable questionable currentdstotfset currentdstotfset Click here to go to the next page This is because the name is part of the primary key for the table OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 21 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data When finished with the Logging Group Name Fields page click on the Next gt push button Step 4 Define the Dataset Logging Group Define Datasets Page REMINDER A dataset is just a collection of data from a particular logging group A Dataset is nothing more than a set of data collected from a particular logging group There are one or more datasets associated with each logging group Each dataset will contain the same set of data objects normally signals but the compression will be different For example one may contain raw values samples another may contain 15 minute averages and totals etc Logging Group Define Datasets Datasets control how often data will be logged and how long data will be kept online All historical streams require one dataset for stoning raw sample
108. very limited access just the access you would give a visitor to your facility For example they might be able to view tables but they cannot edit or delete them Don t give PUBLIC access to anything that you wouldn t everyone to see When you have finished system configuration i e you re all done you should edit the file POLY CFG on the OpenEnterprise Server and change the default user from SYSTEM to PUBLIC OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 19 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Dividing the Database up Into Access areas OPTIONAL Earlier in this chapter we talked briefly about access areas Access areas restrict user access to certain objects data Open Enterprise in the OE Database A particular object can reside in only Database one access area a Generally plant managers want to create access areas based on geographical locations For example you might have a large SCADA system that covers an entire Metropolitan area As part of the system you might have a Control Center that is responsible for everything as well as local stations that control only their local area ALL You could come up with some other scheme for the access areas not based on geography it s completely up to you how you do it When first created the OpenEnterprise Database has only one access area By default that access area 1s called ALL All parts of the Database which utilize access areas initially reside
109. want to be collected by OpenEnterprise Name cress init Retain POD OPC SIMPLEW SIMPLE yA peatertow fT dT A a O DRAN OPEN o SO L start PUMP o d S i ALARM ANALOG i SLAR ARAL ibDitable o oullarmSeq i ATER _TEMP_ALARM_SEQ_NMUM sGlobalSeq WWATER_TEMP GLOBAL SEQ NUM AStatus WATER_TEMP_ ALARM STATUS isAlariivar tail inma iaHiL innit iaLoLinmnit isLoLoLinnt iaHiDeadBand isLoDeadeand iHHiPriority iHPriorihy iLOPricwrity GLoloPriority iebrLinits Tent ishrwese Tiewt Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE Specifying a Global Variable in a ControlWave Project Global variables in ControlWave Designer are variables that may be accessed by all the program organization units POUs in the project If you don t know what a POU is you probably need to review the documentation accompanying ControlWave Designer In your ControlWave Designer project we recommend that the only variables you designate as global should be I O variables Configure your I O variables in the ControlWave Designer s I O Configurator first e Variables in ControlWave Designer are designated as global if they are defined within a global worksheet with the VAR_GLOBAL Usage e The variables must be marked for OPC collection as well A global variable is identified by VAR_GLOBAL in its Usage field J ConholWave Deageer UNTITLED TESINIVIPDCSITEST Ld E
110. want to modify then click on the Modify button OE Trend Client Control Properties x pepee e e General Ranges L Data Data Source Default BristolB abcock Bristol EristolE abcock Bristol Remove EriztolB abcock Bristol _Fiemove Remove All Apply Click on the Axis button Pen Configuration Data Ranges Limits Styles OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Axis Configuration e The Axis Configuration dialog box will appear Click on its X Aais l i Label Angle E E o have a separate Styles tab Label Font C a 8 axis displayed for this Color E pen check the Visible e Inthe Styles page of the Axis has box for that axis Configuration dialog box check Spn the Visible box for the X axis Label Angle 90 deorop and or Y axis if you want either or gn z P both of them displayed for this ca pen Click on OK when finished E Repeat this procedure for each pen for which you want to display an axis Later in Runtime Mode separate axes will appear for each pen Here we are using auto scaling but each pen has a significantly different range of values In order to help the user interpret the traces correctly we have included separate Y axes one for each pen in the trend Untitled OEContainer File View Configure Help Caen amp 1 a A A 21 fame NL escriNon Quality Timest
111. when we want to have the trace turn yellow It should be apparent that this is a pretty powerful feature OpenEnterprise for Beginners Here s the signal we want to trend _ b204 P5180 DENSTY S O204 P5150 FLOW m Deonna oW This is its Historical Group Number j G204 P5180 FLOW SCL a nena DSANN A DIIM TRIP Double click on the rate which identifies the data you want to trend In this case we choose samples Os Attribute 7 31 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Now click on the Exit Tag Browser File Tag Type Help button Exit Tag Browser button OEExpressionEditor Edi The uestionable The Tag Browser will close and aoe dh ri the selected attribute in this Case Tag BristolBabcock BristoIHDAserver 1W ridb realanalog_t A attribute S TOWN in the Tag field Default Return alue eres of the Conditions Questionable will be copied automatically into the Tag field Expression Editor Now click on the Add button to add the conditions Now click on the Add button and of your expression the Edit Condition dialog box will appear Cee ree We want to have the trace turn We want to have the trace change yellow when the Questionable color when that Questionable attribute attribute for this signal is TRUE In is ie aa ile rO ET Wan OF l equal to 1 0 the OE Database logical Boolean values which are tr
112. will log historical data You may choose from a series of configuration Templates or ma configure historical data by pressing Advanced Selected Templates Session Fimsh OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 13 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Another alternative is that you can pause the configuration and set up the historical system on your own using the Historical Configuration Tool by choosing the Advanced button See Chapter 6 for details on using this tool If none of the templates meet your needs you can optionally start the Historical Configuration Tool and define the historical parameters manually Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Historical Data You may configure your system so that it will log historical data You may choose from a series of configuration Y emplates or manually configure historical data by pressing Advanced Selected Templates E Analog 1 minute samples with houry and daily corhpression ABC Description 200 Signals Finish 3 Advanced Click on Next gt Choose the desired historical You also have the option of not configuring the collection template Historian now because you can configure it later using the Historical Configuration Tool If you want to do oe emplate that click on N ext gt Analog 1 ninute samples with hourly and daily compression fp A Analog Signal Triggered
113. you organize the users into different categories called groups For example you might create a group of users called OPERATORS which refers to all the people who are plant operators You might also create another group called ADMINISTRATORS who are the plant managers 10 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Some examples of possible groups appear below You can name the groups whatever you want e ADMINISTRATORS Every system should have a System Administrator who has full access to the entire system Administrators are typically also responsible for security configuration Only someone with administrative responsibilities for the entire system should be able to configure security because they would know who should have privilege to access particular portions of the system You might have more than one System Administrator but in general you want to limit this to a small number of people e ENGINEERS You might have engineers who are responsible for programming the system modifying the Database configuring displays and trends They would typically be given access to the entire system except for security configuration tables which are reserved for the System Administrator e OPERATORS Operators would typically be the largest group of people using your SCADA system They monitor processes in your plant view displays and trends acknowledge alarms and take actions as necessary to ensu
114. you want to insert in the table The number of attribute s must match the number of value s If you re inserting more than one attribute at a time separate the attributes with commas and separate the values with commas For example let s say we have a table called accessareaconfig Access areas are a feature of OE Database security which is discussed elsewhere The accessareaconfig table has two attributes called accessarea and description and currently has two accessareas defined called ALL and operators The table is shown below pnn a a aaaea a accessarea description pesn a ee eS ae ee PAGD Default Access Area operators Signals for operator use SSSSSSeSeSe54 S555 pS SSS SSS SS SS SS Se SS eS SSeS To insert a new access area called Administration with a description of Signals for Administrators only into the accessarea config table enter the following SQL gt insert into accessareaconfig accessarea description Values q Adminstration y signals TOE Administrators only A 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users To take a closer look at this command see the figure below This is the table into which These are the names of the data willbe inserted __ attributes columns into which The INSERT command medai wal bu vended SQL gt insert into accessareaconfig accessarea d
115. your query more specific and thereby limit the amount of data returned For example if you specified in the Attributes page that you wanted to see the names and values of entries in the realanalog table you could receive thousands of responses depending upon the number of objects such as ACCOL signals in your database This may be much more data than you want and it also could put an unnecessary burden on communications as the server attempts to fulfill the request for massive amounts of data The Conditions page however lets you tailor the request by entering more specific criteria thereby making the resulting data more usable for you and more manageable for the communications system 4 16 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Database Object Viewer New Query fe lx File Options Query Help aati aa ZAN Tables Conditions Parameters Joins Attributes SQL Filter Time Zone Objects Auto run without conditions Available Attributes Conditions SUPPIessiorigrauip timestamp timestampdstottset timezone totalnotes units Updatemask valueovernide workstation writeoweride E i Remove fo realanalog value foat I 0 ET g rindb1 Click on the attribute you want to specify a condition for then click on the Add push button Then specify a condition for that attribute and click on the Update push button Click on the nam
116. 061 FLOW D204 PS500B2 FLOW regionname datumaddress D04 ERRCT 003 D2 ERRCT O04 D204X6S815B1 PF D204 PQ315B2 PF D204 PGRSCHEME D204 PS815B1 KWH D204 PS815B2 KWH D204 RIOSTATS D204 PS815B1 VARS D204 PS815B2 VARS D204 PS180 FLOW 24T D204 PS180 DENSTY D204 55100T1 LEVEL D204 55100T2 LEVEL D204 55100T 3 LEVEL D204 S5100T4 LEVEL D204 PS260W 1 LEVEL ee Show All Objects Click on Next gt Click here to bring more signals when finished into view Click on Finish and you re done Logging Group Summary Logging table realanalog Logging group 9 Logging is enabled Description Flow Data 1 minute samples Name column name Raw data will be saved to table raw9_table Compressed data will be saved to table comp9_table Only log enabled objects An estimated 1000 objects will be logged Columns Column timestamp Raw value as lastcollected Column questionable Raw value as questionable Column currentdstoffset Raw value as currentdstoffset Column value Raw value as value Maximum value as value_maximum Minimum value as value_minimum Average value as value_average Occurrence time as value_maximum_occurrencetime Occurrence time as value_minimum_occurencetime Datasets Dataset Os Description Flow Data 1 minute samples 6 50 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Example 4 Using the Archive File Tool We ve talked a lot about
117. 1 yi sendstr A wiseo1 The standard Windows Open dialog box will Bosra yi 05701_NEW appear yiios701_old wfi21031_old wilz1061 Ss uu gt Files of type OpenEnterprise Displays adf v Cancel Use the controls to locate the directory containing your displays The recommended directory for storing OpenEnterprise displays is OEStore Displays so you might want to look there first When you find the display you want to open double click on the name of the display file must end in GDF or click once on its name then click on the Open button and the display will appear on the screen Using the Example Displays If you can t locate any displays the OpenEnterprise Software CD comes with a selection of example displays which you may use as a starting point for creating your own displays The example displays are located in the Examples Workstation sub directories on your OpenEnterprise Software CD OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 5 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process A Quick Look at the Drawing Tools This section will briefly discuss the most commonly used drawing tools For more detailed information please see the GraphWorX32 User Manual Choosing Colors One of the first things you will want to do when you open up a display is to set the background color of the display To do this click on Format gt Background Color The Color Palette wil
118. 1 rei Data Tags gla mle E pl tap e at ag a V Range Ovenide oe ee orc E nd Size 4 f Scal gt E orc C a Delete Object Name PO Description KI Custom Data Custom 71 Display OpenEnterprise by Bristol Fie View Tools iain Help OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Variations on Example 3 Making more realistic looking objects using the drawing tools The tank we just drew consisted of two boxes PAMAGAT one for the tank and one for the liquid in the File Edit View Format tank If you want to make a more realistic Aw H ml amp looking tank for this example you can use the aa drawing tools provided in the toolbar In fact it is a good idea to experiment with the drawing Select an existing object on the screen tools to see what sorts of objects you can Draw a straight line Draw a box create Draw an ellipse hold down Shift to make a circle Draw a curve Draw a multi line segmented object Type text labels ei Pm a Fill an enclosed object with the currently selected color The straight line and curve tools operate similarly to the box tool just click on their icons in the toolbar then click within the display and drag the cursor until the tool draws the line or curve as you want it The ellipse tool also operates similarly however if you want to create a circle hold down the Sh
119. 4 18 26 PUBLIC 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 SYSTEM 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 x a Events 40 PUBLIC SYSTEM OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms OpenEnterprise for Beginners 8 13 Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop What is OE Desktop OE Desktop is an application that allows you to pre configure the look and feel of your OpenEnterprise Workstation It lets you organize the screen so users can easily find the information they need OE Desktop controls several different things including e The types of OpenEnterprise components which will appear in windows on the screen displays alarm views trends etc e The size location and number of windows on the screen e The interaction of different OE components for example allowing pop up menu items on displays to call up an alarm window or a trend Why use OE Desktop The advantage of using OE Desktop is that it allows you to customize the appearance of the OE Workstation screen thereby making it easier to use Operators can have a menu of just the displays trends etc that they need to see eliminating the need for them to search through a lot of extraneous information The OE Desktop application saves all user desktop settings in an OE Desktop File An OE Desktop file allows you to pre configure the look and feel of your OpenEnterprise Workstati
120. 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Report Configuration Alias Values Aliases can be used to allow E aT mT the same report to be re used Report Configuration Alias Values i This page allows the user to define the values of any alias defined within the report with different signals that are chosen based on the aliases Genera See l This is a fairly advanced eiir e epia ai ir n epe Publishing the values to be used for the available aliases within this Report configuration topic so we re not going to kiai Defaut Valse ae F cover it here r BASETIME 110657 Undefined DATASERVICE Undefined Alarm Conditions Just leave the defaults as is and click on Next gt Click on Next gt Report Configuration Publishing Specify the path and folder where you want reports to be generated in the Directory field or use the Browse button to locate it Now click on Next gt Specify the folder where you want reports generated t Report Configuration Report Configuration Publishing This page is used to define the default publishing properties of the report The values defined ox fhis page where applicable can be overridden on a per Report Format basis Location A default directory can be defined intp fhich all published reports associated with this report configuration will be created are Directory C OE Reports Schedules Report Purging
121. 7 12 00 00 AM Click on Next gt when finished 11 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Report Properties Event Logging A log may be maintained of all events that occur as part of generating this report This page lets you specify that the Msia Report package will maintain a log of FePor Properties a ae con events that occur regarding how it is operating etc We suggest you Enable az Logging and choose a folder where the MESES log should be stored since this log file can be helpful if you re trying to debug problems such as Why didn t my report run etc All events that occur during report xecution can be logged to a file di JULLZ folder Vv Enable Logging V Use default log filenayhe Filename Folder C Event Logging CJ Create a new file or append to an existing file Create a new file Rename existing file Append to existing file Click on Finish to complete the report properties Click on Finish to go into Excel and begin configuring the report template In Excel click on the cell where you want to display the data for the report then click on OpenEnterprise gt Import History gt New Query Click here to access the OpenEnterprise plug in in Excel EJ Microsoft Excel DAILY_REPORT xls CE El Eile Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help AdobePDF OpenEnterprise T est x Import History E
122. 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process What is the OpenEnterprise Graphics Software The OpenEnterprise Graphics software also called OEGraphics or GraphicsView is a specially licensed version of the Iconics GraphWorX32 software which has been specifically modified to support additional functionality It is used to build and view graphical displays sometimes known as mimic displays which allow operators to monitor their plant or process from the OE Workstation The entire collection of displays used by the operator is referred to as the human machine interface HMI or graphical user interface GUI Fi Seaside_PS OpenEnterprise by Bristol File View Tools Configure Help q Seaside Drive Pumping Station Emergency RTU AC Eye Wash Fail In Use Chemical Tank Air Compress Pump No 2 ge Low Level Failure Status E UB Main Sewage Coommon Illegal Entry AAE ARELET Pumps Fail Problem Low Pressure Wet Well Wet Well Hazardous ea High Level Gas Danger enerator ITC EVE Low Level acer Foture Generator Stopped 120 WetWell ai E ae S Start Stop Reset Pump 1 Stoppec oo Stat Stop Reset OE 53Build56 OpenEnterprise 9 Seaside _P S OpenEn Data is collected from the plant or process via instrumentation devices e g flow meters electrical contacts pressure transmitters and transmitted to RTUs Data from the RTUs is then sent to the OE Database wher
123. ADMINISTRATORS since that is the first group we want to create NOTE You might already have a group called ADMINISTRATORS since that is one of the default security groups created by the Database Project Builder If so you can choose a different name When finished press the Enter key 123 a3 10 Historian Locked Objects Reporting Security Config 8 Secuty Corday Detak Group Users E PUBLIC SYSTEM 3 Groupa R ADMINISTRATORS E Security Config Pit Messaging NV S000 NV 3000 Archives Monitor o TAGS FE Ape fie wu KA Security Group Signal Builder Suppression Privileges Groups Double click on the Security Config icon To start creating LA Deiat croup a new group right C E B PUBLIC click on the Groups Pi Sc icon and choose ki Token Ee New Group from the e EJ Acces Add Default Groups Group FullName Description ia SO MINISTRATOR 10 6 pop up menu Type a name for the new group in the box that appears in the other window pane OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system The Properties page of the Group Properties User Properties dialog box will appear with the name ADMINISTRATORS in the title bar These fields don t apply when IN defining groups Group Properties AOM NISTRATORS When checked forces users in this group to change their password the next time they log on
124. ATURE After you enter COMMIT and both statements are run the entire table will look similar to this OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 13 Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users MOTORIL TEMPERATURE MOTORIL TEMPERATURE MOTORIL TEMPERATURE RPC MI PRESIN MOTOR1 TEMPERATURE RPCO ML TEMP s IN RPCO M1 DPIN RPC5 M1 DAILY FLOW MOTORIL TEMPERATURE MOTORIL TEMPERATURE MOTORIL TEMPERATURE MOTORIL TEMPERATURE RPC ML HOURLY FLOW RPCO IMA PRES IN RPCO M2 TEMP IN RPCO M2 DPIN and it would continue on throughout the entire table As you can see you have to be careful when using the UPDATE command DELETE command As you might expect the DELETE command removes records from the OE Database Be careful when using the DELETE command Use extreme caution when using the DELETE command You are actually deleting records from the OE Database Make sure you enter the command correctly or you could accidentally delete an entire table instead of certain records in the table The basic syntax of the DELETE command is DELETE FROM table_name WHERE condition where table_name is replaced with name of a table within the OE Database table_name is replaced with name of a table within the OE Database WHERE is used to specify some sort of criteria to limit the A 14 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Cour
125. CURITY SQL file will accomplish these changes update realanalog set accessarea CENTERVILLE update realanalog set accessarea LARABY where basename DEMO commit 10 22 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system This process must be repeated for each object you want to move There are hundreds of tables containing objects which objects you move is up to you Allow Users Access to Particular Access areas Users do NOT automatically have access to particular access areas Access to any particular access area must be specifically granted to each user In the Security Configuration Tool right click on the user s icon and choose Properties from the pop up menu From the Properties page click on the ny Aaa Don t get fooled by the Accessarea field on the Properties page On the Access Areas page select the accessarea to which you want to grant access from the Available Accessareas field and then click on the Add button Now some of you are thinking Hey I know what to do I ll just use the Accessarea field on the Properties page of the dialog box right Wrong that s not what that s for That field is to assign a particular user to an accessarea NOT to grant them access to that accessarea That accessarea will be added to the Associated list for this user To grant this user access to additional access areas repeat the process of selecting
126. Create a Repar Tem Y 7 ae PT ET T EEEE E AIE EE TN Aes Step 2 Create a Report from the Template in rA Previous Step LEE E 14 Step 3 Test the Report PAPE AEAEE N EN AA T A L nep 4 Create a Timed Schedule iot the bea reread OOE E A IAE Y E Step 5 Choose Who Will Receive the S Recipients TOEP O EITTEN 11 24 Specify the Format of the Report PN PNE IE EIN EEA T EEEE ee 11 28 Appendix A Learning SQL A 1 Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise OpenEnterprise often abbreviated as OE is Bristol s primary Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA software package It is used primarily in the water waste water and natural gas industries It also includes an integrated human machine interface HMI to provide data to plant operators via graphical displays mimics trends alarm summaries and web pages The name OpenEnterprise is derived from two of the principal philosophies behind the product It is open in that its individual components utilize industry standard architectures languages and protocols SQL ODBC OPC TCP IP DDE etc making it extremely flexible particularly with respect to communicating with third party hardware and software products The enterprise part of the name applies because it is designed to provide data to other parts of your business enterprise Client workstations called OpenEnterprise Workstations
127. Default Pen 1 BristolB abcock Bristol If you re already in the OE Trend Client Control Properties dialog box you can call up the Pen Configuration dialog box by going to the Pens page selecting the pen you want to set alarm limits for and clicking on the Modify button Otherwise call up the Pen Configuration dialog box by the method we discussed on page 7 11 select the pen you want to change then click on the Modify button Click on the Styles button Pen Configuration Data Ranges Limits Styles When the Pen Configuration dialog box is opened click on the Styles tab and the Styles page will be displayed Next click on the Styles button OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 17 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Usually you ll want to leave Visible should remain checked the Plot Style at Line lf you de select this the pen will be hidden not visible in the Graph pane V Visible pots line OOOO M You can set the Width to be width y from 1 to 6 points in size Style Solid Anything other than 1 requires Ee a solid line style eN MgAer Styles Style lets you change the pen trace from a solid line to a dashed line O Exp sgion Other choices are also available Style Color If desired each data point Click here to call up a along the trace can appear color palette for changing as some symbol There are the color of t
128. E You can add additional information to the report template but don t try to change the actual data timestamps headers that come from the database since any changes you make will be overwritten when the report is generated We can however add We ve added a Title to the top additional information in and included names for each station 7 unused cells of the report a ST p ZZ such as a title and station names STATION 1 STATION CW7 GV R1 DP_Al CW7 GV R2_DP_Al CW7 GV_R4_ DP Al timestamp value value value Okay now you ve completed your report template Save the Excel file by clicking on File gt Save As or by clicking on the Save icon OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 13 Chapter 11 Creating Reports You could just print the Excel file and call the resulting printout a report since it has real data in it but it s really just a report template To have a fully configured and useful report you ll want it to be generated automatically at a particular time and you might want to automatically send copies to people You might want to print it or you might only want to save a copy of it in a file The remaining steps of report configuration allow you to set up these features Step 2 Create a Report from the Template in the previous step Y Report Configuration Tool Okay Now you ve got a report template Let s create an actual report from the template To Fie Edit Help do this click on Edit
129. Enterprise for Beginners Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise What sorts of things are saved in the OE database All the configuration data for the OE Server as well as all of the real time and historical data collected from the network of process controllers is kept in the OE Database What do we mean by Real Time Data and Historical Data Real time data describes conditions occurring right now 1 e the current state of your process or plant Granted there is a slight delay usually measured in a few seconds or less between the time when the data is sent by process instruments flow meters level switches etc and when it is actually inserted in the OE Database but this is usually inconsequential The data reflects current operating conditions and you can act on it to change those conditions Conversely historical data refers to things that happened some time in the past It is data that was collected at some previous time such as last week last month etc Generally historical data is used to help identify trends in system operation and also to generate reports required by regulatory agencies such as the Environmental Protection Agency EPA etc In summary real time data means data from right now and historical data means data from some time in the past The data in the OE Database is stored in hundreds of different tables most of which we re never going to look at because
130. Historical Logging Digital Signal Triggered Historical Logging If you did choose Add the Historical Template dialog prikrii box will appear Historical Template You can now select from one of several pre defined historical collection templates which determine how SS frequently the historical data is collected and what calculations are performed on the data e o Rule Name When you choose a particular template a description of 3 c6 Se the operations it performs appears in the Template meee Details box PEER Once you ve chosen a template you must establish Estimated Number of Signals tobelogged 627 lt some filtering criteria for which signals you want 3 14 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database collected and stored otherwise NO signals will be collected and stored by the Historian To add a rule specify the portion of the Base Extension and or Attribute that represents the signals you want to collect For example if you only want this historical template applied to signals that have a base name beginning with PUMP enter PUMP in the Base field Then optionally assign a name for the rule and click on Add You can repeat this entire process to configure additional templates and rules for them For the concept of rules to work effectively you must have established a consistent signal naming convention When you ve
131. IME ERROR D204 PWRUP OO0 0204 COMM FAIL ALRM D204 POB ACTIVE D204 PO6B AUTO D204 PO6 DONE Show All Objects Click on Next gt Click here to bring more signals when finished into view Click on Finish and you re done Logging Group Summary be saved to C History Log Files cji ely 4303050 b in lengt The fact that they were logical signals instead of analog signals only makes a difference in the choice of the source table 6 38 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Example 3 Logging Hourly and Daily Flow Calculations and using Timed Archives NOTE This example is heavily based on Example I so you re going to notice some repetition Again we re skipping the initial steps related to starting the Historical Configuration Tool If you don t remember those please go back to page 6 12 and review those steps Let s say that instead of just saving 1 minute samples of data that we want to do some calculations on the data If we have signals that represent flow rates through a pipeline maybe we want to know what time of day the minimum and maximum flow rates occurred Maybe we also want to know the average flow rate for an hour or for the whole day This type of data can be obtained using the compression options we talked about way back in the beginning of the chapter See Table 6 1 on page 6 7 Step 1 Create a Logging Group To start out fill in
132. If User Cannot Change Password is checked this CANNOT be checked This is the name of the Group File Token Properties OPC Item Token Tokar Group Access Areas Application Token Custom Token You can add additional text about the group in N Account User Seg Administrg n these fields Optional leme I Grange Password At Next Logon Full Nrg O kresna oange Password Checking this prevents These fields don t apply Description a user in this group from when defining groups m N T IE ageourt Disabled changing their password Verify Panna sooccsses C Account Boek Qut If Change Password At ACCESSAREA refers to Access Arsa Z Grantor Next Logon is checked areas of the OpenEnterprise this CANNOT be checked Database We won t cover this right now Load SED File C Login Group privileges Checking this prevents a user in this group from logging on or changing their password This invokes the Security Group Privileges Tool C Logout Checking this prevents a user in this group from logging on or changing their password Lockouts If desired you can have a particular OED file OE Desktop loaded whenever users in this group log onto a workstation To do this select the Login box then use the button to browse to the OED file you want to have loaded on login If desired you can have a particula
133. M If you want to have your reports reflect these sorts of time shifts you can specify an Offset from midnight of 8 hours or 6 hours or whenever you consider that your work day begins Feel free to play with the different controls on this page to get the exact period of time from which you want data for the report You can see how the changes you make will affect things by looking at the If this report were run on and The report would contain data from fields at the bottom of the page When you ve got the time window defined the way you want it click on Next gt This page defines the date time window from which you want data for this report Based on the choices you make for the Report Period the actual timeframe to be used for the report will be calculated and displayed here OpentEnterprise Report Properties Report Properties Report Perioc Define the default period of time that this report wil cover Enter the period of time his report covers The period is defined as an inter a Data Service of time relative to Midnight with an optional offset from midnight Report Penod Report Period Event Logging Calendar period Today v Cine N Da Ofsettom miarigh NS Timezone and daylight saving adjustments Local Local non DST adjusted UTC If the report were run on The report would contain data Wednesday Ma from 5 2 2007 12 00 00 AM J UTC at 1 28 01 PIS to 5 3 200
134. Mode To choose Performance Mode click here then click on the Advanced button to configure the associated settings DE Trend Client Control Properties As an alternative to Data Mode you can opt to use mi Tink Performance Mode Performance Mode limits the oie as amount of data collected for the trend to only what Beto pee Nee als can actually be displayed Trends optimized for m N Use sub menu Performance Mode can be displayed on the screen _ Hide urresolvable pen X imits much faster because they don t have to collect as Dielis Fa much data and consequently they don t useas T n a onn gt q y gt Details Performance much communication bandwidth You have two options to choose from in Performance Mode This number represents the width of the current trend in pixels Advanced Optimization If you choose the Resolution aa Pixels Per Sample Current X Axis Width 694 Pixels T option with a number Pixels Per Sample i Show a maximum Oea greater than 1 this means an individual sample will be spread out over multiple pixels If you choose the Samples Per Pixel option this is the number of samples that will be displayed at that pixel width location This is the maximum number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen at any one time based on these settings and the number of pixels of the X axis If you choose Pixels Per Sample yo
135. O04 D204 P591561 PF D204 P591 562 PF D204 PO6 SCHEME D204 P597 567 EH D204 PS5 97562 BH D2U4 FRIOSTATS D204 PS97561 WARS D204 P5915b2 WARS w mom od m d m m Lm dI how All Objects a Objects list box Instead of logging data Click here to for all objects in this case bring additional signals we only log data aE ig signals into the for selected objects pag box OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 29 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Browse Objects Refresh Options Next Logged Objects Show All Objects The Browse Objects area is optional It allows the number of objects displayed in the Objects list box below it to be reduced by entering one or more filter strings for particular columns When a filter string is entered the Objects list box can be refreshed by clicking on the Refresh push button For example if collecting signal data and only those signals beginning with the word PUMP should be logged enter PUMP in the name field of the Browse Objects area This push button refreshes the Objects list box below it based on filter strings entered in the Browse Objects area You should also use this push button after removing objects from the Logged Objects list box so they will re appear in the Objects list box This push button calls up the Options dialog box Options Retrieve Objects It allows the user to make selection ea
136. OPER _RIVER EFFLUENT FLOW CTH _ COOPER_RIVER EFFLUENT FLOW PDAY Ca Caan ATOM CECCI ICAT Ci al aa Attribute Lill PA Use the scroll bar to locate the signal you want to trend OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Once you re in the Tag Browser use the scroll bar to locate the signal you want to trend Double click on the signal to expand its branch of the tree Locate the rate for the data you want to trend and double click on it In this case we chose Os which is the raw sample data but we could have chosen 3600s for hourly data or 86400s for daily data Once you choose the rate you want to trend by double clicking on it the right side of the Tag Browser will display the attributes which have been logged at that rate In this case that s just the Value and Questionable attributes We will want to trend the Value attribute since that s what has the actual signal value so select the Value attribute Now click on the Exit Tag Browser button Here s the signal we want to trend This is tts Historical Group Number j G204 P5180 FLOW SCL a nana OSs A DIM TRIP Double click on the rate which identifies the data you want to trend In this case we choose samples Os Attribute questionable Fie Tag Type Help bul Loz Exit Tag Browser button The Tag Browser will close and th
137. OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Database Tree Control Window This window occupies the left hand side of the screen It displays all of the databases in the hierarchy If the database is currently connected it will be displayed with a small GREEN box around it If the database is NOT currently connected it will be displayed with a small RED box around it with a diagonal line through the center If the database is connected and Database Explorer is currently performing a query to obtain detailed information about the database a small AMBER dark orange yellow box will appear If you click on the icon associated with the database a list of the tables and views which make up that particular database will be displayed Database Explorer File view Options Window Help E scada web rtrdb1 KA All Databases abcomplex alarmcondition rkrdb1 abdevice alarmcondition_table abdevicehealthalarmcondition alarmconditionlookup alarmconditionlookup table aoe abdriver alarminhibitalarmncandition abdevice Z abintegeranalog alarminhibitstatealarmcondition z abdevicehealthalarmcon abnetwork alarrnmailFormat abdigital alarmpagingFormat abdriver abrealanalag alarmpagingrecipient abintegeranalog accessarea Elalarmpattern accessareacontig alarmpriorityblock abnetwork _ abnolllist accessareaconfigforuser alarmpriorityb
138. Properties Account Since we haven t set up any other accessareas just leave this as is The ADMINISTRATORS group has access to the ALL accessarea For now just leave the Access area unchanged We ll talk more about this concept later in the chapter 10 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system All the remaining pages of the Group User Properties dialog box deal with tokens so we better talk a little about them Tokens give you privileges to access certain OpenEnterprise components If you don t have the proper token to access a particular OpenEnterprise component you are denied permission to use it What are Tokens Tokens are like tickets or passes that grant you certain privileges Possessing a token gives you permission to do something In the real world for example you might purchase subway tokens that give you permission to ride on a subway train You present the token when you want to board the train and you are allowed to get on board If you don t have the right token the conductor won t let you get on board the train Tokens in OpenEnterprise operate similarly Every component of OpenEnterprise has certain tokens associated with it In order for a user a person or a group of users to make use of that OpenEnterprise component they are required to possess the appropriate token otherwise they are denied access A user or group is
139. RTANT If you have already configured a Realtime Alarm View in the previous examples we recommend that you save that AC file and open up a new Alarm View file or else your previous configuration will be erased by what you do in Example 4 So far as we ve been using the Alarm Viewer we ve been looking at all current alarms 1 e alarms that either have not cleared have not been acknowledged or both It s possible though to look at the history of the alarms That is we can look back at older alarms that have already been both acknowledged and cleared as well as a journal of important system events This information is stored in the eventhistory table e Click on the General tab of the OE Alarm Client Control Properties dialog box and select the Historical option OE Alarm Client Control Properties Print Properties Sound Time Zone Filter Attributes Suppression Databases Historical General Display Font Show mSecs Show column headings Allow runtime configuration Auto resize columns Data Type Realtime Historicak Use sub menu OE Menus Config File Choose Historical first before doing any other configuration e To view the alarm and event history configure the Alarm View as described in Example 1 specify the Database etc e When you click on OK and go into Runtime mode no current alarms will be displayed instead the alarm event histor
140. S ONLY Your OpenEnterprise Server should be backed up That means all files should be copied to backup media CD tape disk or to another computer This ensures that you can restore the system in the event of a failure during the database creation process OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Install Open BSI and configure the Open BSI Network Bristol s Open Bristol System Interface called Open BSI is the communications software which runs on the OE Server and allows communications between the OE Server and the network of Bristol remote process controllers If this is an all new system or you are upgrading to a new version of Open BSI as part of your OpenEnterprise upgrade you need to install Open BSI on the OE Server computer and define the network of controllers within the Open BSI software This is outside the scope of this document but you can find instructions on how to do this in the Open BSI Utilities Manual document D508 1 Verify that communications are possible to RTUs via DataView Use the Open BSI DataView program to verify that data can be collected from RTUs in the network See Chapter 8 of the Open BSI Utilities Manual D5081 for help on doing this Install OpenEnterprise Server software on the Server Computer Follow the instructions in the OpenEnterprise Installation Guide portion of the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide for information on how to install OpenEnterpri
141. Select the token group s you want to award to this group or user from the Available Tokens list then click on Include gt gt to put them on the Include List Group Properties ADMINISTRATORS fx Properties File Token Access Areas Application Token Custom Token OPC Item Token Token Group Available Tokens Name amp OE Alam Banner Ng amp OE Aam Cient F AQE Aam Printer amp OE Desktop QE Graphics OE Notes Client 4 OE Signal View amp amp OE SQL Viewer OE Trend Client amp amp OE Web Client A Secure Desktop Test String Include List Name Exclude List String checking is not applicable for this token type ok J _cancet_ don JK Hee Select the token group s you want to deny from this group or user from the Available Tokens list then click on Exclude gt gt to put them on the Exclude List 10 14 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Choosing File Tokens OPC Tokens and Custom Tokens File tokens can be used to restrict access to certain files OPC tokens can be used to prevent data values from certain OPC tags from being displayed trended etc Custom tokens can be used to restrict access to user defined menu items in OpenEnterprise components We recommend you place all these tokens on the Include List unless you have a specific reason not to For more in
142. Table Detail and Attribute Detail windows can be modified to appear in one of four presentation modes Large icons small icons lists or detail To change the mode click within the window you want to change then click on View in the menu bar and choose Large Icons Small Icons List or Detail from the pop up menu Alternatively you can choose the mode from the icons in the menu bar D D L l oo oo os oo Large Icons af ef af go s accessarea acknowledged acknowledged acknowiledgedtim In this mode only a few large icons are visible at any a dstoffset i Ww one time E ae D Small Icons amp accessarea amp acknowledged amp acknowledgec amp alarmcondition alarmilinit amp alarmtext a base a calloutarea calloutdisplay In this mode many more icons are visible They are sienttype el eneen amp devicename amp display amp dstorfset shown in left to right across order extension amp hasnotes helptext lt gt 0 0 List amp accessarea amp alarmtext amp clientkype one LIST amp acknowledged amp attribute amp condition acknowledgedtime base currenteventinde acknowledgedtimedstotfset calloutarea description This mode is similar to small icons except the icons Z fmcendition Ce Me a o amp alarmlimit amp cleared amp display appear in lists from top to bottom Li gt zz Detail _ Type a
143. Table Detail Window displays the names of the tables associated with whatever database has been selected in the Database Tree Control Window The format of the window can vary see Changing the Appearance of Detail Windows When database named scada web rirdb1 is selected in the Database Tree Control Window the tables as sociated with scada web rtrdo1 are shown in the Table Detail Window Daiabase Explorer BEA Fie Vikw Options Window Help alla web rtrdb1 a gA are e Base Table Depth scada web rtrdb1 abcomplex abcomplex scada web rtrdb1 0 E abdevice Plabdevice scada web rtrdb1 E abdevicehealthalarmcon abdevicehealthalarmconditiog scada web rtrdb1 abdigital abdigital scada web rtrdb1 E abdriver abdriver scada web rtrdb1 abintegeranalog scada web rtrdb1 abnetwork scada web rtrdb1 abpolllist scada web rtrdb1 abrealanalog scada web rtrdb1 abintegeranalog E abnetwork abpolllist ooocoococc 0c 0c 0c cc fo E abrealanalog Placcessarea scada web rtrdb1 accessareaconfig scada web rtrdb1 F accessarea E h PARR accessareaconfigforuser scada web rtr accessareaconfi E g adminuser scada web rtrdb1 accessareaconfigforusel adminuser alarmcondition alarmcondition_table E alarmconditionlookup E alarmconaonnonup ta alarmcondition scada web rtrdb1 alarmcondition_table scada web rtrdb1
144. This is chosen via the Sample Rate list box You also need to choose the Tenane aa one type of data to be trended by this pen for example the anribute Name CTA average minimum maximum etc eee z Historical Data Tyge he values in each sample period The minimum ofthe values in each sample period The average cf the values in each sample period The estimatef area bound by the values in each sample period Realtime Tag to Historical Tag Object Name C wW GV A1_DP_LIVE Then from the various types of data logged in that dataset choose the one type of data you want to trend OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 21 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Example 3 Trending a Historical Data Value On the OE workstation start the OE Trend Viewer by clicking as shown below Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt Views gt Trends The Trend View Container will appear Go into Configure Mode by clicking on the Configure menu bar item Click on Configure OE Trend iew Container File View Configure Help gt poi Mame Description Quality _ Timestamp value Units _ Data Source Minimum Range Maximum Range visible D NOTE We re repeating a few things here since we know some of you skipped over Example 1 and 2 You really should read those because they ll be useful to you later 7 22 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data e Right click in the cent
145. Training Manual D5091 June 2007 Bristol OpenEnterprise OpenEnterprise for Beginners Ss Remote Automation Solutions EMERSON www EmersonProcess com Remote Welcome to OpenEnterprise for Beginners This manual is the first real exposure most readers will have to the OpenEnterprise product and we recognize that first impressions count We have tried hard to provide a basic introduction suitable for anyone with basic knowledge of SCADA or process control However OpenEnterprise is a powerful flexible product and as a result there s a lot to learn and this manual is just the beginning As OpenEnterprise has expanded into newer and wider markets more of our customers have become interested in a do it yourself approach to setting up their systems Because of this the need arose for a more user friendly manual that explains how to set up the basic features of OpenEnterprise with special emphasis on examples The result is this manual OpenEnterprise for Beginners We recommend you work though the manual and set up each of the examples On the OpenEnterprise CD we have included some example loads programs for Bristol RTUs If you don t have your own RTU loads you can use these Initially most of the SCADA systems we sold were configured primarily by our own in house system engineers as well as experienced third party system integrators with a high level of technical expertise For these customers we developed a very detail
146. U 2 z kl b i A rial f10 H U ls te SS gt D A oy gt A i A H g O e i Select the pump by dragging a bounding box around it When you release the mouse edit handles will appear around all of the pieces Group the pump into a single symbol by using a m Arrange gt Group into Symbol 5 34 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 4 Click on Dynamics gt Actions gt Color Step 5 Let s say that when the pump is running you want to show it in RED Drag the OPC tag for the pump status signal value into the upper part of the Data Source field then click on the Add button This will cause the tag to be copied to the lower part of the field Once here its value can be used to change the color of the object Click on the Add Drag the OPC tag in button and the tag as usual will be copied to here Property Inspector Rectangle Color Defaut Pick Data Source Drag Dropata Source BristolBabcock BristolObeServer ttrdb1 dic Data Tags Change gt Remove Apply Color Change To Change Order 4 gt Iv Fill Color a Change Color On True C CPssqge Color On False V Line Color B Shadow Color Dee C hoose the N EW Object Name color you want the C e In this case we pump to change to Custom Data fs Custom want to change from the color m a color when the pallette value is ON OK Cance
147. We want to add a new menu bar item called Displays so click on New Enter the name Displays then click The New Menu Item dialog box will appear Type the ON Configure name Displays in the Name field This defines the New Menu Item name that will appear in the menu bar of the OE a are Desktop Now click on the Configure button go Display in empty desktop too OpenEnterprise for Beginners 9 1 Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop The OE Menu Editor will be called up In the Menu Editor right click on the Menu icon and a pop up menu will appear You have some choices about what you want to do e If you want to have the user be able to perform something from this menu item such as call up a display directly choose New Command The user would call up the display by clicking on Displays gt display name e If you want to have the menu item call up another part of the menu called a group which contains your display choose New Group The user would call up the display by clicking on Displays gt group name display name e If you want to insert a separator line between menu items choose New Separator Command first When we do so a new menu item will appear in the menu hierarchy called New Command e Type in the words System Overview since we want our first display to be the Overview display 9 12 Ri
148. Will they appear in multiple windows side by side or will each new display called up fill the entire window Will the displays be scaleable All of these and other properties of the displays should be determined and set as preferences in the Display Properties dialog box before the displays are built otherwise they will have to be set individually for each display Step 2 Adopt a consistent method for navigation throughout the displa hierarchy Each and every display should include a toolbar or menu object with links to other Lverview Display displays in the system Although the display links in it will vary from display to display you should include this object in the same Back Display Next Display place on every display so operators know how Step 3 Determine what objects you will need on your displays The display building process will be much easier if you use a consistent library of objects for all your displays You might for example determine that you will need three different pump symbols two types of valve symbols and one type of liquid tank and that you want all of your process points to follow a particular format These symbols when you have built them as part of a later step in the process can be saved in a library and re used on all of your displays Be sure to check and see what symbols are already available in your symbol library it may include most of the objects you need 5 54 OpenEnterprise f
149. Window If you double click on a listed table its location in the hierarchy will be displayed in the Database Tree Control Window and the attributes associated with the table will be displayed in the Attribute Detail Window Searching the Database for A Primary Key Attribute A primary key attribute is simply an attribute that is used as an index or part of an index for manipulating information in a table because it is unique for each record row A primary key might include multiple attributes For example a timestamp attribute and a name attribute might be combined to form the primary key Search for Primary Key Attribute To search through the tree hierarchy for a particular primary key attribute click on the database s icon in the hierarchy presented in the Database Tree Control Window then press the right mouse button Choose Search For Primary Key Attribute from the pop up menu and the Search for Primary Key Attribute Enter the name of the primary key attribute below name dialog box will appear Cancel Help Enter the attribute name you are looking for or enter the first few characters of its name followed by a wildcard character then click on the OK push button Tables with the specified primary key attribute or matching the partial name and wildcard will be listed in the Table Detail Window If you double click on a listed table its location in the hierarchy will be displayed in the Database Tre
150. a blue checkmark In the Archive File Tool click on the name of the Archive File that you want to take offline then click on the Take Offline button The file will be taken offline and will now appear with a red X preceding its name First select the file you want to make offline Archive File Tool File Help Archived Data Backups ga 1 RealAnalog minute samples with hourly and daily compression Os 3600s 86400s S A 4 Raw data collection from realanalog table rc Os XX 01 JUN 2007 06 05 54 to 04 JUN 2007 06 08 54 PERA 04 JUN 2007 06 08 54 to 04 JUN 2007 07 05 54 X O04 JUN 2007 07 05 54 to 04 JUN 2007 10 05 54 S A 9 Flow Data 1 minute samples Os Flow Data 1 minute samples 3600s Flow Data Houry Calculations S va 31 MAY 2007 09 01 00 to 01 JUN 2007 08 01 00 vA 31 MAY 2007 09 01 00 to 01 JUN 2007 08 01 00 2 acr 86400s Flow Data Daily calculations a 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 to 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 Wh 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 to 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 f ancel Then click on Take Offline Take Offline a Ba cvs 6 56 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Setting Up Automatic Backup of Offline Archive Files As your system continually generates archive files of old log data you consume more and more hard disk space Eventually your disk will fill up with archive files Some people prevent this by periodically copying the offline archive
151. a from the 1 minute samples dataset we defined earlier not the hourly dataset Data is coming from the samples dataset we defined earlier e We want to collect the data by We want to save a year s worth of daily data polling and we need to specify the polling rate at 24 hours or 1 days or 86400 seconds because we are We want to collect the data every day vpenEnterprise Historical Configuration Dataset Configuration _apchive Configuration logging data once every hour The 5 s Fed From Dataset Os start time must be in the past so we ee chose 12 15 AM Collect Data by Polling Every e We want to keep an entire year s irae 2 1500 5 3 2007 worth of daily data in the log file so Keep for at least is set to 1 years Keep For At Least 1 Years Maximum Unsaved Data 5 Days e Maximum Unsaved Data is set s to 5 days That means the log C History LogFies buffer contents will be emptied into the Log File on disk every 5 days OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 47 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Once again on the Archive OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration p Configuration page enter Dataset Configuration Archive Configuration parameters defining how TE Click on Add many archive files you want ID Description Start Time Repeat Interval to define the Timed online for this dataset and Archive where you want to store
152. able in the OE Database Every logging group must have a unique ID number You cannot advance to the next page without complet ing this field You can optionally enter a meaningful description here X hese fields identify internal database tables which will store the historical data Group Id Unique logg Description Raw data collection from realanalog_table Historical Access Tables Raw mwi abe ae a Defaults names for retieving logged data eee edited later inthe wizard fora new Compressed oumpd tate map Cant be modified for exiting groupe Logging Estimated number of objects to log nm Required for buffer size calculations gg All Objects You log all objects in the source table or select which to log later Advanced Enabled Uncheck to disableNogging for this group Configuration Options When logging signal data this would be the number of signals to be logged To log every object signal for example in the source table choose Log All Objects Otherwise leave it blank This enables disables logging for this Logging Group 6 14 Most applications don t require the Advanced features When finished click here to go to the next page OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Let s talk about the various fields on the Logging Group page Source Table Group ID Description Name Column Raw Data Table Compresse
153. accessible to the user This time we want to specify that the hourly data gets archived on a weekly basis Specify a Start Time in the past and a Repeat Interval of Weekly We specify that we want the Archive File generated at 12 15AM every Sunday Click on OK when finished Then click on OK again to exit the OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration dialog box The hourly dataset is now complete 6 46 We want to generate an archive file of the hourly flow data every week Create new Timed Archive Flow Data Hourly Calculations Start Time 12 05 004 5 31 2007 Repeat Interval Offsets Month Hours Minutes The flow data will be stored in the archive file every Sunday at 12 15 AM NOTE 10 minute offset OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Step 6 Define the Dataset for the Daily Data Click on the raw dataset then click on Add Jogging Group Define Datasets Datasets control how often data will be logged and how long data will be kept online We need to add the last dataset for the daily data Again this dataset will be fed from the raw 1 minute samples 5 dataset Don t feed it from the hourly dataset All historical streams require one dataset for storing raw sample data The raw dataset can be used to feed one or more compressed datasets Select the raw dataset and click on Add This daily dataset gets its dat
154. age of the Flash Configuration Utility allows usernames and passwords to be created for ControlWave series users and for user privileges to be defined See the Security section of the ControlWave Designer Programmer s Handbook document D5125 for details If you are using the Point to Point PPP Internet Protocol via the ControlWave series controller s serial ports you should consider using either the PAP or CHAP security protocols CHAP is considered more secure than PAP because it uses encryption For information on these protocols see the Security Protocols section of the ControlWave Designer Programmer s Handbook document D5125 for details Also once ControlWave series controllers are configured and running you should remove the RUN REMOTE LOCAL keys from the controllers and put them in a safe place Otherwise someone could accidentally or deliberately change the operating mode of the controller Security in Network 3000 series Controllers The running ACCOL load file incorporates six different levels of security access 1 to 6 as well as security level 0 which indicates no access Operators possessing a particular security level have on line access to any system function or structure with a security level less than or equal to their own For example an operator who signs on to an RTU with the security level of 3 will only have access to those system functions which accept security levels through 3 functi
155. all this data The Database Project Builder allows us to e Create all the tables that make up the OE Database e Configure real time data collection from controllers RTUs e Configure basic historical data collection and perform initial configuration of historical data e Configure the default security accounts e Configure which programs run when the OE Server is started Starting the Database Project Builder If not started already Open BSI must be running If it isn t click on Start gt Programs gt OpenBSI Tools gt NetView Confirm that communications are functioning By default the Database Project Builder starts automatically following OpenEnterprise installation see the OpenEnterprise Installation Guide for more information It may also be started by clicking as follows Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt Administrative Tools gt Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 3 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Using Database Project Builder When the Database Project Builder starts click on Next gt to proceed beyond the Welcome screen This will take you to the File Locations screen This is a list of steps to be performed by the Database Project Builder When a step is completed it appears in italics Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Welcome This Wizard will guide you through the process of building an OpenEnterprise project
156. alog_table or digital_table We chose to log it in the earlier example because in that example it could have been different from the time at which data was placed in the Historian because data was being put into the Historian at a fixed rate For example say you re collecting real time values into the realanalog _table every minute and then every 15 minutes you re collecting the value and putting it into the Historian The time automatically stored by the Historian will only change every 15 minutes 1 e the time it does its historical storage but the timestamp in the realanalog_table is changing every minute That s why we saved the timestamp in the earlier example In this example however we re doing something a little different We re collecting by exception i e when something changes So as soon as something changes in the digital_table it will be copied into the Historian The timestamp in the digital_table therefore is the same as the Historian s own time of storage which is automatically logged Since there s no difference we don t need to collect the timestamp Still confused Don t worry about it We re getting into some pretty arcane material here and most people don t need such precision in their historical data since they re more concerned with hourly and daily averages How come you re using the readvalue column instead of the value column It s really just a matter of choice The readvalue colu
157. alue of the trace s at that point in time OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Another thing you should know about trends is that you can enlarge the view of a part of the Graph pane to see more detail This is called zooming Zooming lets you enlarge parts of You can zoom in at a certain pre defined percentage by right clicking in the middle of the Graph pane and choosing the trend oon from the percent zoom options shown on the pop up menu Alternatively you can choose the Custom choice to specify your own percentage of zoom If you aren t sure what percentage of zooming to use try the Zoom In or a claliaddadcbai Zoom Out options They allow you to ae incrementally zoom in or out without specifying a percentage Refresh Export Data Zoom In Zoom Out These are pre defined You can set your zoom levels own zoom percentage Zoom In and using Custom Zoom Out are good if you re not sure how much you want to zoom Dragging a box in the Graph pane to enlarge a particular area is is called rubber band zooming There s also a technique called rubber band zooming where you click and drag the area of the Graph pane you want to enlarge When you release the mouse button the zoom is activated OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 9 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Once you ve set a zoom level you can always go back to t
158. amp Value unts Data Source 5 l Good 20 J4M 2005 11 21 00 000 l BristolB abcock Bris Be 0204 P9180 FLOW TY PS PRIMASLUDGE Good 20JAN 2005 11 21 31 000 24141 593750 s Bristolb abeock Bris l D204 TIME 001 Good 20 J4N 2005 11 21 31 000 58850 000000 SECS BristolB abcock Bris il E E Y axis for first pen Y axis for third pen Y axis for second pen OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 37 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Example 6 Optimizing your Trend for data or speed We mentioned back in Example 3 that you shouldn t try to display more data that can actually fit on the screen For example if you have a screen that is 1024 pixels wide 1 e 1024 x 768 the absolute maximum number of data samples you could display would be 1024 In practical terms the number of samples would be much less than that because you also would need space to show the axes labels etc but for purposes of this discussion let s assume you could actually use all 1024 Optimization for Data Data Mode The default optimization mode for the Trend Viewer is Data Mode Here s how it works Let s say you had 90 days worth of 1 minute data and you wanted to try to display all of that on the screen at one time That would be 24 x 60 x 90 samples of data or 129 600 samples That s a lot of data to try to display within a width of 1024 pixels If that s what you request though OpenEnterprise will try to accommodate you OE will c
159. an click and drag on these handles to re E E E size the object in various directions To move the object just click on the 7 a E w object not the handles and hold down the left mouse key while you move the object to the desired new position To select more than one object drag the mouse to form a Drag bounding box bounding box around the objects you want to select then to select multiple release the mouse button and all the complete objects in the T objects box will be selected a If a display contains many objects close together and you are unable to select the right one you can select any object on the ae l display and repeatedly press the Tab key As you keep E pressing the Tab key a bounding box will move through each of the objects on the display allowing you to eventually select the desired object OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 7 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Drawing A Box To draw a box click on the Rectangle Square icon then click in the location in the display where you want to draw the box and drag the mouse until the box 1s the desired size then release the mouse To draw a square follow the same procedure except hold down the Shift key while you are dragging the mouse If you want to re size the box you can drag on the handles which appear around its edge when it is selected To move the box after it is finished select it and drag it to the desire
160. apter 11 Creating Reports The Create New Query This page gives you the option of specifying a Query Period page allows you different time window for the data that will appear to optionally override the in this query To accept the default time window you defined earlier in the Report Properties just period of time from which data click on Next gt should come for this report This might be necessary in certain situations where you might not have enough data to OpenEnterprise Import History Create New Query Query Period Select the span of data to display properly test the report so you vice E Override default report pei want to specify a different time apy Arana a window E nterval Das al Offset from midnight D Hours Transform If you want to change the time frame click on Override Output and Data Formatting Iar an default report period and If the report were run on The deed would contain data change the time frame as 5 2 2007 12 00 0 desired To continue click on Next gt Click on Next gt On the Create New Query Data Transform page you choose which columns from the historical tables you want to include in the report Typically you would choose Value the actual value of the signal but you may choose others as well For each of the Available columns you want to include on the report click on gt to add it to the Display columns wind
161. archive files We explained earlier that because log files are periodically overwritten with new data data from the log files gets copied to archive files for permanent long term storage We also said that a certain number of archive files are maintained online so they can be accessible for queries and that if an archive file is off line it is inaccessible Therefore if you have a particular offline archive file containing data you need to view you will need to bring it online again How do we keep track of all these archive files How do we bring old ones online or take other ones offline You guessed it we use the Archive File Tool Before You Begin Obviously in order to make use of the Archive File Tool you need to have some archive files They could either be online in your Archive Files directory in an offline archive files directory or you might have them on some other computer or storage media NOTE If you have archive files you saved previously on CD ROM or some other storage media their Windows file attributes MUST be set to read write after you restore them or else they cannot be read by the Archive File Tool Starting the Archive File Tool File Security view Mode Help From the OE Toolbox double click on the Archive Files icon Alarm Alarm Prioriti Conditions Calculations Diaries and Histor Calendars Archive Files ea OPC Client Patterns Security Suppression RDI Config Groups Dou
162. ase is now complete Click on Finish to exit the Database Project Builder Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Finish Your OpenEnterprise database configuration is now complete Sacre nN Click on Finish If you accepted the default settings when creating the OE session the OE session will be started automatically Look for a blue icon with a green checkmark through it in the taskbar and double click on it to view the status of the session _ MySession Session Manager Session View Options Help 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Demo 18 days remaining 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Software Watchdog started 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Started Scheduler 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Started Report Scheduler 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Started RDI3000 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Started Database 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Started Calculation Server 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Started Archive File Manager 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Standalone State 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Mode Test State 07 Mar 2007 17 24 15 Started Session 07 Mar 2007 17 24 14 Opened Session Task N Module Execu Command Line Argume Ac Vis Disa Critical Proc Working Direct Resource Archive C Program Fil rtrdb1 True False False True C Program File Calculati C Program Fil DataService rtrdb1 True False False True C Program File Database C ProgramFil m realtime mmf s512 True False False True C Program File RDI3000 C Program F
163. asets Datasets control how often data will be logged and how long data will be kept online All historical streams require one dataset for storing raw sample data The raw dataset can be usede feed one or more co datasets a Raw Every 1 Minutes Raw 1 minute data Click on Next gt On the next page you can optionally rename the internal table used for holding this dataset Change the name if desired then click on Next gt Here you can optionally enter a new name for the internal table used for holding this dataset Dataset View Names Click on Next gt 6 28 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Logging Group Select Objects Page NOT applicable in all cases Remember way back at the beginning of this example we said that we only wanted to log data for certain signals We indicated that by not checking the Log All Objects option on the Logging Group dialog box see page 6 14 Now it s time to actually identify which signals we do want to log That s the purpose of the Logging Group Select Objects page logging Group Select Objects x Browse Objects Logged Objects D204 FS180 FLOW 0204 PS50061 FLO w D04 PS50062 FLOW devicename regionname datumaddress D204 P51780T 5 D204 4LINEE O01 D204 LINKE O02 D204 4LINEF O01 D204 ALINEF OOS D204 4ERACT OO1 D204 4ERACT O02 D204 ERRCT 003 D204 4ERACT
164. ata can be passed in using aliases and the aliases dynamically filled in from columns of a Database Object Viewer query See the OF Menus section of the OE Reference Guide document D5092 for more information OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 51 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Tips For Planning Your Human Machine Interface HMI System So far we have discussed the mechanics of how to create a particular display The examples presented some basic techniques and if you needed to do something not described in the examples you referred to the GraphWorX32 User Guide to find out how to do it Once you are familiar with how to create a display you may be tempted to rush forward and start generating all of the displays for your particular system before you do this though we strongly recommend you spend some time planning your human machine interface HMI system The goal of a human machine interface is to provide your operators with the information they need in a clear understandable format Operators should not have to hunt for information during a critical situation displays should be organized such that an operator can access the information he or she needs with a minimal number of mouse clicks Don t make displays too complicated for the user Displays should be Don t make displays too designed to be clear and easy to use Displays should not be overloaded with complicated for the u
165. ata exchange DDE links between OpenEnterprise and a third party DDE compliant package such as Microsoft Excel This allows the creation of spreadsheets containing live data which will update as it changes in the database Before You Begin Before you can add live data to a spreadsheet you must have already e started the third party application e g Microsoft Excel and created a spreadsheet e installed and started up the Polyhedra DDE Server See the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide document D5092 for instructions on how to do this e started the OE Database e started the Database Explorer and established a connection with your running database See pages 4 2 through 4 4 e read through and become familiar with how to create and run a query of your database See pages 4 13 through 4 19 for details An example illustrating this process 1s included below 4 24 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Example Adding An Analog Value To A Spreadsheet Using DDE The Brighton Hills tank farm has a series of tanks that hold liquids They use Network 3000 series controllers to monitor the tank levels and they want to display the tank levels in FEET in a spreadsheet for the operator Step 1 Start creating your query by selecting the Table containing the data fF Database Object Viewer On the Tables page of the Database Object Viewer there are numerous tables lis
166. ay the tank level as a used to represent process point just below the graphical the tank level The representation on the display m level will also be L displayed below L as a process point Am OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 25 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process If you re unsure how to create this graphic please review Example 3 beginning on page 5 18 If you re unsure how to create a process point please review Example 2 beginning on page 5 14 Step 2 Step 3 Using the segmented line tool draw a triangular pointer which will be used as the setpoint slider You can draw the pointer on another part of the display and drag it over later it doesn t have to be right next to the bar representing the tank level yet eventually however the tip of the pointer should be next to the bar representing the tank level Double click when you have finished enclosing the pointer to exit the segmented line tool then with the pointer still selected choose a color for the pointer from the color palette and click on the fill tool to set the new fill color ly B Segmented gt line tool g A Fill tool k g t H O ce Color palettey m m lt E 99999999 Use the segmented line tool to create a triangular pointer Then choose a color for it from the color palette and click on the fill icon to set the new color Create a process point next to the t
167. be entered manually see Help for details types except Printer the Destination defines the directory within cata si will be A prior to it being distributed For a Printer it is the name of a local or networked pri Ddstination RICOH Aficio 1045 PCL amp Browse ile Name OUA E i jt TH J F j AT C g De l GUI IC ur f ji If you choose Printer as the format Type you will need to specify the network Destination for the printer Use the Browse button to locate it if necessary 11 28 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports The figure below shows that for a format Type other than printer a file is generated so you will need to specify a Destination path and File Name format For any format Type other than Printer you will need to specify a File Name You can type a name in directly or click on the Format button to choose items that will be used to make up the filename such as the date and time Create a Name for the format and optionally enter a Description for the format Format Configuration Format Configuration General This page allows the general proNerties of a Report Format to be configured G i General Ao Name onma ZOOO O O De Recipients Description Generate PDF Alarm Conditions Type Adobe Acrobat pdf m Location The File Mame and Destination may
168. ble click on the Archive Files icon In order for the Archive File Tool to run properly another program called OEArchiveFileManager exe must be running Normally this would be started automatically by the Session Manager Session Manager configuration is outside the scope of this manual See the Online Help for details If Session Manager hasn t been configured yet you can start it manually from the OpenEnterprise BIN folder OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 51 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data When the Archive File Tool appears you can see a list of all Archive Files known to the system both online and offline This list is called the Archive Catalog The files are organized in a tree structure Logging groups for particular table s are displayed and then a list of datasets associated with each Logging group is shown Any online Archive Files for each dataset will be listed If a particular dataset does not show an Archive File it could be that archiving has not been configured or that logging has not been underway long enough for an Archive File to be generated Click on the sign to view branches of the Archive File tree The archive files are named based on the date range they encompass You can find out more information about a particular Archive File by selecting it and clicking on the Properties button Archive files preceded by a red X are currently offline Archive files preceded by a blue
169. box It can m ass m Q aso AB also be started from Accel I R Accel ro the Configure Group S a a 06 OU ee a m Privileges button of aS the Group Properties Double click on Security dialog box Group Privileges OE Systems Group Names O 1 Security Group Privileges Editor File Edit View Security Tools Hgip administrators dispatchers engineers guests operators trainees gt Refresh Alams None None None None None None Archive Catalogue None None None None None None Calculations None None None None None None Distribution None None None None None None Events None None None None None None To g ran t Field Devices None a Historian None privileges click on an None Nome OEL Control item and RO choose x J either RO Local Signals Messaging Read only Remote Sinngls or i RW Read Write Click on the sign to assign privileges to individual tables of an OE system Here OE historical tables are shown The top line of the Security Group Privileges tool displays the names of all the security groups defined in your system Along the left edge are the names of the various OpenEnterprise systems Historical Alarms etc to which you can grant table privileges If you don t want to grant a group privileges to all the tables for a particular OE system click on to display individual tables and grant privileges only on sp
170. box and choose Toggle Value for the Action and drag in the start stop value OPC tag from the Database Object Viewer Specify 0 as the Toggle Valuel state STOP pump and 1 as the Toggle Value state Choose Toggle Value Property Inspector Drag in the start stop pump OPC tag Action Toggle Value Execution Trigger Mouse Left Button z mO sie While Down Type Normal Button v CSer Tags Menu Toggle Value 1 Taa I Specify 0 for START PUMP and 1 for STOP PUMP Confirmation Key Shortcut None Delete Object Name ss Description E Custom Data Custom In Runtime Mode the operator can now start stop the pump by clicking on the pump symbol There are variations to this example as well For example instead of clicking on the pump symbol we could have created Start and Stop push buttons for the operator to click on using Dynamics gt Instrinsics gt Pushbutton Try that as an exercise OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 37 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Example 7 Creating a System Overview Display Most plant operators create an Overview display that they leave up on the screen when not looking at other displays Typically the Overview display consists of a photograph of their plant or a map of their system Links are added to various parts of the picture or map that the operator can click on to bring up a display cor
171. by flooding the system with repetitive alarms Example alarm limits and deadbands Let s say we have a tank full of water which must be maintained at a certain temperature range A temperature transmitter 1s mounted on the tank to measure the current temperature of the water and it has been decided that the water temperature should be kept between 40 0 C and 70 0 Celsius Any temperature reading outside of that range indicates an alarm condition The figure below shows a plot of the value of the variable measuring Celsius temperature in the tank as it fluctuates over time Four alarm limits and two deadbands have been defined Starting from the left of the graph the value of the variable increases until it reaches 70 0 C the high alarm limit see Item 1 At this point a high alarm message is generated and the variable is considered to be in a high alarm state The value of the variable eh Alera phil ps continues to increase High Deadband 10 0 When it passes the high high alarm limit of 90 0 C a high high alarm message is generated see Item 2 At this point the variable is considered to be in a high high alarm state Temperature Degrees C oSB8BESESSSB The value of the variable then starts to decrease Although the value passes below 90 0 C it is still Time Low Alarm Limit 40 0 Low Low Alarm Limit 20 0 Low Deadband 10 0 8 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners C
172. cally in Example 1 when we dragged a value from the Database Object Viewer into the Graph pane of the Trend Viewer Actually we could have dragged the value directly to this field if we had had the Pen Configuration dialog box open Pen Configuration This is the signal which is being trended Dia esa ee eiates eS by this pen The entry can either be typed arame char CWZ EGV alue fost in manually filled automatically by dragging in from the Database Object Viewer or chosen by clicking the button to select the signal via the Historical Data Access HDA Server a Desertion S Select this to have the Trend System fill in the Device Status Name Description E A Populate wth Signal Data and Units fields by extracting them from attributes of the Data Source signal which are already defined in the OE Database The other fields on the Data page Device Status Name Description and Units are not important to the operation of the trend itself but are used to fill the Detail pane with information about this particular pen You could fill them in yourself by dragging entries from the Database Object Viewer directly into a field It s much easier though to check the Auto Populate with Signal Data box to have the Trend Viewer automatically fill in the fields The Trend Viewer does this by looking in the OE Database and extracting
173. ccessarea alarmsurnomary scada web rtrdb1 char ho In this mode more detailed information is presented acknowledged alarmsummary ee ee acknowledgedtime alarmsurnmary scada web rtrdb1 datetime No for each item including information on its location acknowledgedtimedstottset alarmsummary scada web rtrdb1 integer Mo 7 amp alarmcondition alarmsummarY scada webirtrdbl integer No and function in the database lt 4 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Searching the Database for A Particular Table A particular OE database can be made up of hundreds of different tables Sometimes you may not remember where a particular table is located in the hierarchy of the database or even its exact name to solve this problem you can use the Search For Table dialog box To search through the tree hierarchy for a particular table iisuiubbllbites click on the database s icon in the hierarchy presented in the Database Tree Control Window then press the right mouse button Choose Search For Table from the pop up menu and the Search for Table dialog box will appear Enter the ea table name you are looking for or enter the first few characters of its name followed by a wildcard character Cancel Help then click on the OK push button Enter the name of the table below Tables and views with the specified name or matching the partial name and wildcard will be l
174. ccessed NOTE Before attempting to establish a connection with a Database the Database must be running If itis NOT running you must explicitly start it In addition you must have logged in with security access for this particular Database or data you wish to view must be accessible to the PUBLIC user To establish a connection click on the icon for the database in the tree hierarchy then press the right mouse button and choose Connect from the pop up menu Initially the database will be shown surrounded by an orange box indicating that a connection has not yet been made The amount of time required to make the connection varies depending upon the size of the database and the bandwidth of your connection When the icon for the database is iiiienpt Explorer surrounded by a GREEN box the connection has been successfully established E scada web rkrdbi x E Ti Connect Fie View Options Window Help Add Database 4 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data IMPORTANT Once a connection has been successfully established Database Explorer will issue a query to the database to obtain details on its internal structure This structural information is retained until the database is disconnected Whenever a re connection 1s made the query will be issued again to update the structural detail information If while connected the database structure is altered by som
175. ck on the Fill Unfill icon aah amp B me Arial 10 EZ U Next click where you want to draw the ellipse and drag the mouse until it is at the desired size bes 2 To draw an ellipse or circle first click on the Ellipse mi Circle icon ve ass 2 gt wv For information on the other drawing tools see the GraphWorX32 User Manual LJ Saving A Display To save a display click on the Save icon shown above or click on File gt Save The Save or Save As dialog box will appear It 1s recommended that you save your displays in the directory OE Store Displays OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 9 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Switching Between Configure Mode and Runtime Mode Configure Mode is used to build your displays add dynamic data etc Live data is NOT visible in Configure Mode NOTE In order to make changes to your display or to add live data to your display the OE Graphics package must be in Configure mode if you are in Runtime mode click on the Configure menu bar item to return to Configure If there is no Configure item but you see a Runtime item you are already in Configure mode If you see Runtime here you are in currently in Configure Mode Clicking on Runtime will switch you into Runtime Mode If you see Configure here you are currently in Runtime Mode Clic
176. cked For this example we aren t doing any compression just using the Raw choice Any source table column name selected from the Available Fields list box which stores boolean data will appear in this box The compression options are Raw First Last AND OR Count Percent Occurrence Times and Duration To select a particular compression option go to the line which holds the desired column name then click on the cell underneath the desired compression option The option is selected when it appears checked For this example we aren t using any Boolean fields When finished with the Logging Group Select Fields page click on the Next gt push button The Logging Group Name Fields page will appear 6 20 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Logging Group Name Fields Page The Logging Group Name Fields page displays each of the source table columns selected on the Logging Group Select Fields page along with any selected compression options for each column and a default name for the destination column that will hold the logged data The main purpose of this page is to allow renaming of the destination columns Any new column names you define here will be used when SQL or ODBC compliant programs access the data held by the Historian Each destination column name must be unique for a given destination table By default if a duplication conflict could cause
177. cker currentlocker inalarm value OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 7 Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users readvalue nits lowlimit highlimit Query Done 54 records selected SQL gt Example 4 Finally let s use a wildcard If we want to look at the entire table called dvi_schedule we could enter SOL gt select trom dvi schedules f f scheduleid maxinterval mininterval offset disable f f w i OLS JTAN O00L 0000S LO J NULG NULL NULL 254 Ni SOLSJAN 0002 OOS00200 NULL NULL NULL f f f Query Done 2 records selected It s a small table and we didn t know what the attribute names in it were so we just used the wildcard character where we normally would have listed the attributes Just as we did for Realanalog though we could have requested the names of the columns from the attributes table SOL gt select name from attributes where table name dvi_schedule pase
178. click on OK Then click on OK again to exit the dialog box C Auto Archive s Automatically Online Archives 7 Maximum Online Archives Archive Cataloguing Click on OK Step 5 Define the Dataset for the Hourly Data We now have defined a Select the raw dataset and click on Add dataset for the raw 1 minute samples Now we Datasets control how often data will be logged and how long data will be kept online need to define two more All historical streams require one dataset for ee raw dataset can be used to datasets one for the hourly data and one for the daily data Each of these additional datasets will be fed from the raw 1 minute samples dataset Logging Group Define Datasets Raw Every 1 Minutes How Data 1 minute samples Select the raw dataset you just finished and click on Add 6 44 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data This new dataset gets its data from the 1 minute samples dataset we defined earlier We want to collect the data by Data is coming from the samples dataset we polling and we need to specify defined earlier the polling rate at 60 minutes or We want to save a month s worth of data 1 hours because we are logging We want to collect the data every hour data ever y hour The start time UpenEnterprise Historical Configuration must be in the past so we chose Dataset ConfiguraliS achive Configuration
179. contain date time and alias values as well as report proppie Use the ormat button to insert date and time and report formatting characters into the Elet Destinajfon strings Alias values must be entered manually see Help for details mea at types except Printer the Destination defines the directs cre E paiar 60 i lesen hadi For a Printer it is the name laser an ER ret Ensure Unique File Name Create Destination during publishing if it doesn t S lf you choose a format other than Printer as the format Type you will need to specify the Destination path for the resulting file Use the Browse button to locate it if necessary Click on Next gt when finished OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 29 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Format Configuration Purging This page allows you to specify that older reports be deleted Just click on Next gt to proceed Purging can be used to remove old reports from the system We wont cover this here so just click on Next gt Format Configuration Format Configuration Purging This page is used to configure how and if the published reports generated using this Format are managed Purging itis possible to define a method through which old or obsolete published reports geferated using this Report as Format can be deleted or managed Note that purging only relates to the intial pubfshed report and not to any Recipients distribu
180. crosoft term for multiple document interface A MDI child window is a window that can t be moved outside of another window The other window is called the parent window For our purposes the parent window is the OE Desktop When a ship comes into port and is tied up to the pier it is attached to the pier with ropes 1 e docked so it doesn t move around A docked window means the window is attached to a particular side of the desktop it doesn t move and can t be dragged to other areas of the screen Going back to our ship analogy just as a ship that isn t tied up to the pier can float by itself and can be towed around the harbor or even out to sea a floating window can be dragged around the screen even outside the confines of the OE Desktop A floating window will always appear on top of any MDI or docked windows Choose the type of OE component you want to occupy the new window Zem OE Alarm Ribbon ACOE Alarm View APOE Alarm Printer View d DE Notes View BB OE Signal View OCX DE SOL View E DE Trend View OE Web View OE Control Display pf Bristol OpenEnterprise Display Window Type Docked i v Name Alarm Window Optionally enter a name for the window here OpenEnterprise for Beginners 9 7 Choose the window type MDI Child Docked or Floating For this example we re going to choose Docked Click here if you want to
181. ct to your running OE Database then start the Database Object Viewer and query the data that you re interested in trending If you re unsure how to use Database Explorer and the Database Object Viewer please review the examples in Chapter 4 of this book Locate the Value attribute for one of the signals you want to display and drag it from the Database Object Viewer and drop it into the Trend grid A real time trend is automatically configured Drag the value from the Database Object Viewer and drop it into the grid of the OE Trend View OE Trend View Container l oX File View Configure Help Cah amp Internet E lt plor er td Windows Explorer 7 Description Quaity Timestamp value Units DataSource Minimum Range Maximum Range Visble e lt 5 4 Database Object Viewer TER Fie Options Query Help J 8SBRRR a aye J Tables Conditions Parametefs Joins Attributes SQL Filter Time Zone Objects mame sid CERL CPU OVERLD CERL DLM PORT CERL T1 CUR DUR p CERL T1 M4x DUR 1 CERL T1 MIN DUR CERL T1 5LIP p CERL T1 TASK PERIOD v i For Help press F1 Objects 606 606 0 3 scada web rtrdb1 a Ras OE Trend view Contai 7 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data You ve now defined a real time trend pen As real time values are collected for that signal they will be displayed and gradually you will see a graph
182. d because only the result of the calculation is stored NOT the individual raw samples used to make the calculation NOTE It is possible to keep both the compressed and original raw values on the system though this consumes more disk space Historical Data is Stored Temporarily in Log Files The historical data is stored in files on the OE Server called log files Storing historical Sometimes they re referred to as history files or historical files but data in a file is called it s all the same thing files that store historical data Log files are logging the data active meaning that the system continues to deposit more historical The files containing data in them Depositing data in log files is called logging the data the data are called Log files are defined during Historical system configuration to be a log files Log files fixed size Before they become full of data the data in them gets are for temporary saved into another file called an archive file Then the oldest data in Short term storage the log file is overwritten when new data comes in Because of this they are only used for temporary short term storage 6 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Historical Data is Stored Permanently in Archive Files As we said when the log file fills up its oldest data gets overwritten Wait you say I can t have my data overwritten Don t worry that s where arc
183. d later we ll provide you with some specific examples e Defining a Logging Group e Choosing Columns to Be Logged and Calculations to be performed if any e Specifying Characteristics of the Log File and Archive Files Defining a Logging Group A logging group defines what data you want to log e A logging group defines what data you want to log and how often you want to and how often you want to log it log it 6 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data e A particular logging group can only log data from a single table The table containing the data you want to log is called the source table e You can define as many different logging groups as you need Each and every logging group must have a unique logging group id number however to differentiate it from all the other logging groups in the system e Logging groups are configured by making entries into the oelogcontrol table using the Historical Configuration Tool Because of this logging groups are sometimes referred to as logcontrols e If you don t want to log all the records from a particular table you need to assign only the records you want to log to this logging group Choosing the Source Table The Historian can save data from almost any table in the OE Database The table containing the data you want is referred to as the source table Most users will be saving data from only two tables Realanalog_Table this table incl
184. d push button The imaan word units will appear in the Condition line add the following kaikiaan text to the line value FEET Condition units FEET realanalog units char Objects 628 628 0 80 rtrdb1 Now click on the Update push button and the condition you made will appear in the Conditions box above Step 4 Run the query Click on the Active Query icon and then run the query by clicking on Query gt Apply or just click on the Run Query icon The results of the query analog signal values which have units of FEET will appear on the Objects page of the Database Object Viewer Z Database Object Viewer aT File Options Query Help FLEECES Tables Conditions Parameters Joins Attributes SOL Filter Time Zone Objects D204 551007T LEYEL SP z0 FEET D204 S5100T1 LEVEL 0 FEET D204 551007T1 LEYEL HHL 2U FEET b204 55100T2 LEVEL 0 FEET O204 55100T2 LEVEL HHL z0 FEET D204 55100T3 LEVEL 0 FEET O204 55100TS LEVEL AHL z0 FEET D204 55100T4 LEVEL 0 FEET Active query running Objects q 9 0 o a rtrdb1 2 4 26 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Step 5 Leave the Objects page of the Database Object Viewer on the screen and open up your spreadsheet if not already open Keep the Objects page of the Database Object Viewer which contains your ana
185. d Data Table Estimated Number of Objects to Log Use this list box to select the name of the table in the Database from which you would like to log historical data If you are collecting signal data you would typically want to choose either realanalog or digital as the source table we ve chosen realanalog because that s where the flow data we want to collect would reside Once you have defined a particular logging group you CANNOT change its associated Source Table NOTE This field will omit the suffix _table from any source table names that happen to end in _ table This is an integer that uniquely identifies the number of this logging group so we don t get it mixed up with any other logging groups we define In general your first logging group should have a Group ID of 1 the second logging group should have a Group ID of 2 etc This entry CANNOT be changed once this logging group is fully configured For this example we will choose a Group ID of 4 You can optionally enter a textual description of this logging group here This is the name of a column in the source table which uniquely identifies the data in the table Anytime you want to collect signal data from realanalog or digital you should always choose name as the Name Column which we ve done here because that column is used to hold signal names which are unique throughout the table The
186. d location If you want to change the fill color of the box select the box then click on the desired color in the color palette If you want to turn on off the fill color you can click on Format gt Toggle Fill or just click on the Fill Unfill icon Ba Display OpenEnterprise by Bristol File Edit View Format Arrange Draw Dynamics 2 w i i amp BE arial ft BB To draw a box first click on the Rectangle Square icon _ _____ Next click where you want to draw the box and drag the mouse until the box is at the desired size 5 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Drawing An Ellipse or A Circle To draw an ellipse or circle click on the Ellipse Circle icon then click in the location in the display where you want to draw the ellipse and drag the mouse until the box is the desired size then release the mouse To draw a circle follow the same procedure except hold down the Shift key while you are dragging the mouse If you want to re size the ellipse circle you can drag on the handles which appear when it is selected To move the ellipse circle after it is finished select it and drag it to the desired location If you want to change the fill color of the ellipse circle select it then click on the desired color in the color palette If you want to turn on off the fill color you can click on Format gt Toggle Fill or just cli
187. d object name and saved it in the symbol library Then we could have re used it on other displays and simply inserted the desired alias information when placing the symbol by using Dyamics gt Edit Local Aliases NOTE Dynamics gt Edit Local Aliases makes the choice of aliases ahead of time and permanently sets them for a particular display In this case no pushbutton for setting aliases is needed by the operator because the operator does not make the choice the choice was made when the symbol was placed within the display Drag the symbol in from the Now delete lt lt tanknum gt gt here symbol library and right click and enter the alias value you want on it choose to use for this particular display Dyamics gt Edit Local Aliases e g 1 _ lt Display OpenEnterprise by Bristol A 2 2 gih g l mhen Pe o at a Aa ages Edit Local Aliases Selected Alias Alias Name Alias Definition a a lt lt tanknum gt Data Tags Double click list items to select Expression duplicate alias names Object Name Alias Definition lt lt tanknum gt gt Permanently Resolve Aliases On Ok Cancel Heb MEO erreso Using aliases to pass data between OpenEnterprise Components Another powerful use of aliases is to allow data to be passed between OpenEnterprise components Users can create customized trends displays etc that can be activated through one OE component and then d
188. d the questionable data bit questionable Click on Next gt when you re ready to proceed to the next page OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 33 Choose the fields you want to log Logging Group Select Fields Available Fields forcewrite hasnotes inalarm instance lastdataset lastoveridevalue lastreadvalue locked locker name notcurentstate occurrencetime occurencetimedstoffset offtext ontext operator plantarea printer private readchangemask readtrigger regionname resetalarmstatistics scheduleid status suppress m mmmn ad Fields to be Logged Text Date Fields Column Name Raw First Last Occuy nce Ties Duration Length Indexed gt Analog Fields Column Name Raw f in Ava Occurrence Times Integral Dure questionable pa Boolean Fields Column Name Raw First Last Occurrence Times AND OF Count Perce a readvalue o alarminhibit controlinhibit _ ae Cae Ce Click here when finished Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data How come we didn t log the timestamp The Historian automatically logs the time at which signal data 1s placed into the Historian from the realanalog_table and digital_table Hold on you say How come back in the earlier example we did choose to log the timestamp Good question The timestamp attribute reflects the time the data arrived from the RTU and was placed into the realan
189. d to learn SQL A little secret you might want to know though is that most of what these configuration tools are doing behind the scenes transparently to you is to generate SQL statements to query the database Therefore it might aid your understanding of the system if you knew a little SQL SQL statements can often allow you to obtain data very quickly that might take many mouse clicks through a configuration tool Also there are certain advanced configurations that a power user might want to do that can only be done via SQL If you re not planning to do any of those you really don t need it If you are you probably ought to read this appendix SQL queries follow a certain pre defined structure thus the name structured query language SQL What is S QL It is important to create the queries properly in order to perform the desired action successfully If you SQL stands for structured query type something in the wrong order or misspell the language Sometimes people will command or put a semicolon in the wrong place say the word sequel instead of your SQL entry won t be correct and you won t SQL They both refer to the same achieve the desired result thing SQL is an industry standard method for communicating with a There are dozens of different SQL commands and database Query is essentially before you re done configuring the more advanced another word for question or request features of OE you r
190. database to be included on displays for viewing by operators at the OE Workstation This is an essential part of the display building process and is discussed in Chapter 5 Establish links to external spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel using drag and drop DDE links To perform these functions you must first start the Database Explorer then add the database to the hierarchy if it isn t already visible and then establish a connection with the database Then you will be able to examine various parts of the database and call up actual data using the Database Object Viewer OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Before You Begin Before you attempt to start Database Explorer the following must be done e Your OE Database must have been created and must be running See Chapter 3 for information on this e You must know the service name of the OE Database or the IP address and name 1f it resides on another computer Consult your site specific documentation for details If you don t know what a service is don t worry we re going to explain that e You must have successfully logged on to your OE Workstation with sufficient security privileges to access the OE Database Consult your site specific documentation for details NOTE Security will be discussed in detail in Chapter 10 Starting Database Explorer To start Database Explorer click on Start gt Programs
191. database still needs to identify who he is If this comes up we suggest you disable the user s account see next section That way their name remains in the system for record keeping purposes but they are unable to log in and do anything 10 28 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Disabling a User s Account If a user is going eee away on vacation or Custom Token File Token OPC ltem Token Token Group will be away for an waa Account Summary PEND Application Token extended period you User Name Ci change Password At Next Logon can disable their Full Neme User Cannot Change Password Select Account Disabled account While the mee PEA this user s account account is disabled ioy iien oem E Accost Lackin this user will not be Access Aea ALL Bi De select it to re enable able to log into the Group this user s account system Parent Group OPERATORS v Load OED File C Login PT C Logout To do this start the Security Configuration Tool and call up the Group User Properties page for this user by double clicking on the icon for this user Select the Account Disabled box and click on OK Later to re activate the account simply de select this box and click on OK Removing the Lock out of a user Users can be locked out of User
192. database supports a 32 bit ODBC data access data can be directly extracted from it by any ODBC compliant application such as Microsoft Excel or Access or you can use the data in the OpenEnterprise Report Configuration Tool See Chapter 11 Historical data is also frequently incorporated into graphical trends to allow a graphical representation of data from a given period of time Trends are a big enough subject that we re going to discuss them in Chapter 7 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 1 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data How Does the Historian Work The Historian is actually an extension of the OE Database it is simply another set of user defined tables and columns which hold data extracted from specified OE Database tables at either specified intervals or based on specific events In some cases the actual data value is stored this is referred to as raw data In other cases calculations are performed on value s before storage is performed for example minimum maximum average etc this is referred to as compressed data because only the calculated result is stored not the values used to generate the calculated result Differences between Raw and Compressed Data e Raw data is data that is unchanged from the way it was at the RTU No calculations have been performed on it e Compressed data is the result of some sort of calculation on the raw data such as minimum maximum average etc It is called compresse
193. dentical water tanks rather than creating 8 separate displays one for each tank you could create one display to handle all of them That single display would use aliases to dynamically call in the correct signal data from the database for whichever tank the operator wanted to see To do this your database must use a consistent naming convention e g TANKI LEVEL TANK2 LEVEL TANK3 LEVEL TANK8 LEVEL Now create a simple display for tank 1 using the TANK1 LEVEL signal All text displayed should be taken from attributes in the database name value and units attributes in the Realanalog table Verify that it works correctly in Runtime Mode simple display for Tank Number 1 All text shown comes directly from the database vi Display1 OpenEnterprise by Bristol File View Tools Configure Help ST err rr err er E e 9 80 FEET RPC4 TANKT LEVEL 5 46 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Now go to Configure Mode and use the Edit gt Replace command to change the OPC tags in the display to include an alias Instead of TANK1 we want to use TANK lt lt tanknum gt gt where tanknum is an alias that gets replaced with a value of 1 to 8 depending upon which tank we want to look at IMPORTANT Aliases are case sensitive 1 e Tanknum TANKNUM and tanknum would all be considered different aliases Click on OK and execute the changes for all objects in th
194. disable the logging group by de selecting the Enabled check box and simply create a new logging group If checked all objects rows in the source table will be logged If you are logging signals checking this means that ALL signals in the designated table will be logged If left unchecked only those rows that have the Group ID of this logging group in their Dataset column will be logged NOTE If this option is NOT selected objects must be selected individually on the Logging Group Select Objects page That s what we ll do for purposes of this example This calls up the Historical Advanced Settings dialog box We re not going to use it in this example but we ve included an explanation of it below in case someday you want to experiment with it Historical Advanced Settings Enable Colum controlinhibit s Timestamp Column timestamp s The Historical Advanced Settings dialog box should only be used by those experienced in database configuration It contains three fields that allow particular columns of the source table to be singled out and configures the Historian to alter the normal logging based on the data in those columns Enable Column identifies a column in the source table which holds a boolean true false value which enables disables logging for the current row For example 1f collecting signal data the ReadControlInhibit field could be specified here to disable collection
195. displays and when necessary review the on line help and the GraphWorX32 manual Before you do this though there are three more important topics that need to be covered They are important because they can save you hours of time and effort if you understand them and use them when building the actual displays for your system These topics are covered in the following sections e Saving Your Own Symbols in the Symbol Library and Updating Objects Through Share Keywords e Using Aliasing to allow you to re use the Same Objects with Different Data From the Database e Tips for Planning Your Human Machine Interface HMI System OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 41 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Saving Your Own Symbols in the Symbol Library and Updating Objects through Share Keywords Earlier in this chapter we described how to retrieve pre defined symbols from the symbol library What if you want to create your own symbols Let s say you have defined a symbol that is good enough that you want to re use it For example suppose you have created a symbol for a water tank and you want to use it throughout your displays You can save it in the symbol library Saving objects as symbols in the symbol library Let s say your display uses some simple shapes to represent a meter Step 1 Select the entire object i ag Step 2 Group the object into a symbol by clicking on gt a Arrange gt Group Into Symb
196. dress and name if it resides on a computer other than the current one Cancel Help In the Add Database to Hierarchy dialog box enter the OE database name for example rirdb1 If the database resides on a different computer than the one you are currently using the name of the database must be preceded by the IP address of the other server for example 120 0 210 10 mydatabase You may also use an alias for the IP address for example if the text MYSERVER has been defined in your HOSTS file as being equivalent to an IP address of 125 45 2 8 you could enter either MYSERVER rtrdbl or you could enter 125 45 2 8 rtrdb1 To connect with this database choose the Connect Database option Click on OK to exit the dialog box The database will be added to the tree hierarchy OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 3 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Database Explorer File View Options Window Help The database icon will be surrounded by a RED box with a diagonal line through it until an actual connection 1s E 1 h B scada web rtrdbl ka ith establis ed All Databases scada web rtrdb1 scada web irtrdbt Tree Hierarchy Establishing a Connection with the Database Once a database has been identified for Database Explorer by adding it to the tree hierarchy a connection with the Database must be established so that the Database structure can be a
197. e s something about the trend you don t like it s usually pretty easy to change Double clicking on the line for a pen in the Detail pane or right clicking and choosing Modify Pen from the pop up menu will call up the Pen Configuration dialog box which lets you change configuration for that pen only Remove Pen Hide Fen Show Axis NOTE Depending upon how your system was configured you may need to click on the Configure item in the menu bar to go into Configure Mode if the person who set up the Trend didn t allow Runtime Configuration In Configure Mode the Configure menu bar item will be replaced with a menu bar item called Runtime this is similar to Configure Runtime modes used in OE Graphics View when you see Runtime you re in Configure Mode and when you see Configure you re in Runtime Mode You should also know that we could have configured the Real Time trend in Example 1 from Configure Mode instead of dragging and dropping in Runtime Mode OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 11 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Specifying what should appear in the Detail Pane for an individual Pen Right click on the pen you want to modify in the Detail pane and choose Modify Pen from the pop up menu In this case we only have one pen The Pen Configuration dialog box will appear The only field filled in at this point is the Data Source field It was filled in automati
198. e These complex interactions between tables are part of the database design also known as the schema OpenEnterprise contains a schema specially designed to handle the information gathered from complex industrial processes Learning the Real Database Lingo Attributes Records and Objects ach box in the table can hold one OBJECT This particular table can hold 36 objects The people who write database programs use a whole different Attribute 1 Attribute 2 Attribute 3 Attribute 4 Attribute 5 Attribute 6 Attribute 7 Attribute 8 Attribute 9 set of terminology when they refer to the structure of tables in a database Record 2 Record 1 Instead of referring tothe name of a particular column or a heading they call the column name an attribute Attributes are characteristics or qualities associated with something Record 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 1 3 Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise Instead of calling the row of a table a row they call it a record That makes sense because a record implies something that is recorded or kept for a certain period of time Another word used to refer to a record is object A simple table from the OE Database called dvi_schedule is shown below NOTE The first row shown isn t actually part of the table it s the names of the attributes in the table The attributes are called scheduleid maxinter
199. e Control Window and the attributes associated with the table will be displayed in the Attribute Detail Window Searching the Database for Owned Tables An owned table is a table in which the Owner attribute has been set to the name of a particular user When you choose Search for Owned Tables all tables for which the Owner attribute matches the name of the currently logged on user will be listed 4 12 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Viewing the Contents of the Database Using the Database Object Viewer You can use the Database Object Viewer to e Examine the data residing in the database tables by requesting data that meets certain user specified criteria This is called querying the database for information e Configure real time process points in graphical displays using OPC Tags e Configure real time data links to third party packages such as Microsoft Excel using DDE Links dh starting the Database Object Viewer Once the Database Explorer has been started and a successful connection has been made to your running database you can start the Database Object Viewer by clicking on the icon shown above or by double clicking on certain Table names in the Database Explorer tree control window or by clicking on View gt Database Object Viewer The Database Object Viewer will appear with the Tables page displayed first You can now proceed t
200. e Example 1 earlier in this chapter for help on doing this e You could even draw or import other items like your company s logo You could add buttons process points anything that appears on any other display Talbot Hill ToP Bielenville Valley Center Franktown NMSCGC Garrett Long Control e Louville r Center Griffeth Town 5 Rahrnanten State Gillette Route 9 Masonville 6 Crystal Lake Cliff Rock Johnson Lake Hunte Town Corners View Rolling Forest State Park Route 103 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 39 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 4 Add Links to Call Up Other Displays This step is similar to one of the variations discussed in Example 6 e Using the drawing tools create objects you could use buttons or little boxes or circles or whatever that users would click on to load a display and position them where you want the user to click Typically this would be on the map location Hill Top _Bielenville Valley Center Franktown i NMSCGC Garrett N Long or photo location which Baral e 9 corresponds to the display you g center acen om 1 Rohrmanton want to ae For this particular Siae e ciste example we ve added little Route 9 o boxes to be used as links IMPORTANT Be sure you save your current display before you try this e Select one of the objects li
201. e Files Contain raw and compressed e Contain raw and compressed historical historical data which came from data which was copied in from log files realtime data values Are a fixed size when they become Are a fixed size but data is never full the oldest data is overwritten overwritten It is maintained in the archive with the new data file Can receive additional raw and Are closed They CANNOT receive compressed historical data additional data Can be queried at any time Can only be queried if the archive file is currently ONLINE How is the Historian Configured Configuring the Historian is one of the most difficult concepts in OpenEnterprise to understand For one thing while real time data collection is always dealing with what s happening right now historical requires you to deal with the issues of both time and space 1 e in this case how much time should I keep certain data and how much space do I need to store the data The Historian is configured using the Historical Configuration Tool in the OE Toolbox Configuration involves setting several parameters which interact to identify what gets logged and when the logging occurs As with most things in OpenEnterprise this interaction is governed by entries in database tables We re going to oversimplify this a little bit but the main tasks you need to perform when configuring the Historian are described below We ll talk about them in general terms first an
202. e OE Database When finished click on Next gt This is the data service for your OE Server Click on Test Connection to verify that the Report package can communicate with the database Then click on Next gt OpenEnterprise Report Properties Report Properties Data Service Enter the default database dataservice for this report Enter the dataservice address of your OpenEnterprise Server Report Perioa air Gas The dataservice must be specified in the format host service For a redundant server specify both servers in a comma separated list e g hosta rtrdb1 bostb rindb1 To run a report using the standby append the Server service with the ro qualifier OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 5 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Report Properties Report Period This page defines the time window starting and ending time for the data you want to appear in your report By default the choice is data from today but you could choose data from yesterday last month last year etc This also assumes that the data you want to choose actually is stored somewhere in your OE Database obviously you can t put data on your report that doesn t exist Also by default days run from midnight to midnight Some applications however may consider a day to be when the first working shift starts say 8AM one day to 8AM the next day Some natural gas companies use the concept of a gas day that might run from 6AM to 6A
203. e a warning if you request data without any limiting conditions but in the SQL Client or certain third party packages such as Microsoft Excel you don t receive any warning For advanced users there is a special database parameter called query_max_intermediate_record_count number located in the POLY CFG file that you can set to prevent killer queries from doing any damage This parameter is like a safety valve that basically cuts off the query after a certain number of records Specify a number which represents the largest query you want to allow and this parameter will prevent the query from returning more records than that number If you re not sure what number to use experiment a little bit before the system is active with live equipment Try 10 000 to start and adjust the number up or down slightly depending upon your results OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 9 Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users INSERT command The INSERT command puts information into the OE Database The basic syntax of the INSERT command is INSERT INTO table_name attribute s VALUES value s where table_name is replaced with name of a table within the OE Database into which you want to insert data attributes s is replaced with the name of the attribute or attributes columns into which you want to insert data The number of attribute s must match the number of value s value s is replaced with the actual data
204. e display We want to replace all the TANK1 occurrences in this display with TANK lt lt tanknum gt gt Replace x Nvnamic Tag Cancel f Mat case Whole Display Apply Match kole word only C Multiple Files al Help Find what ANKI v Advanced lt lt Replace with TAN K lt lt tanknum gt gt v Tags Menu Options Report to Notepad OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 47 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Next add a button to the display which will Property Inspector allow the operator to select which tank Button Pick Entera label tor should be displayed To do this choose TetCoo B the button here Dynamics gt Instrinsics gt Pushbutton i FilColoc Shadow Color PI r Gradient Fill Bi Fill Pattew NoPatten On the Button page of the Property ro Gar Inspector enter the label Choose Tank Z Stretch Text On Bashe Number Font Arial Size 10 Font a Choose Tank Number Text Center Bound Center Object Name Description E Share Keyword Custom Data Custom Choose Alias Dialog Then click on Set Aliases Property Inspector Action On the Pick page of the Property Mouse Left Buton v Inspector choose Alias Dialog for the Action then click on the Set Aliases push button Set Aliases Key Shortcut None Delete Object Name Description Bi Custom Data Custom
205. e dragged the real time value OPC tag from the Database Object Viewer into the trend grid we were essentially filling in this field dynamically We could have actually dragged that value right into the Data Source field The Data Source for a pen can either be a real time OPC tag value dragged in from the Database Object Viewer or a historical tag from the Historical Data Access HDA Tag Browser Pen Configuration Data Ranges Limits Styles Data Source a Device Status Name Pen 1 Description g g o Units C Auto Populate with Signal Data Since for this example we want to trend historical data we need to access the Historical Data Access HDA Tag Browser To do this click on the button next to the Data Source field For this example however we want to trend historical values To do this we need to activate the Historical Data Access HDA Tag Browser To do this click on the button next to the Data Source field il OpenEnterprisz Tag Browser 28 OPC Data access 28 OPC Historical Data Access scada web rtrdbi eventlog_table J realanalog_table 7 24 Expand the tree F BristolBabcock BristolHDAServer 1 _ COOPER_RIVER EFFLUENT FLOW CMAX _ COOPER_RIVER EFFLUENT FLOW CMIM COOPER_RIVER EFFLUENT FLOW CTMN CO
206. e external tool such as the SQL Client queries to the database may NOT be successful depending upon how the database was changed Should this occur you should disconnect and then re connect so a new query can be initiated What if wasn t able to connect Any of the following items could prevent a successful connection e The OE Database isn t running You can t connect to it if it isn t running e Communications are faulty or you didn t specify the correct service You should verify that you can actually communicate with the OE Server computer Try pinging it using the DOS ping command e Firewall software a type of security software is running that has prevented the connection with the IP socket The IP socket for the OE Database must be accessible By default this socket is 11101 Check your Windows Services file to verify the correct socket and notify your System Administrator that the OE socket must be accessible through the firewall Viewing the Overall Structure of the Database Once Database Explorer has successfully established a connection with the database the internal structure of the database can be examined OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 5 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Viewing Databases Tables Views and Attributes Each database consists of a series of named tables Associated with each table are a collection of attributes remember attributes are just the column na
207. e going to use several but To make a structured query means to we re going to concentrate on just seven of them generate a formatted request for because they are the ones you are most likely going information from the database The to use when working with OpenEnterprise structured part is important In order to get useful information back Also we re only going to deal with the basic usage you must carefully construct the of these seven commands Sometimes there are more query according to a predefined set complicated options that you can use with these of rules In order to enter actual SQL commands but we don t really need to get into those commands we use a program at the options here so don t worry about them right now OE Server called the SQL Client While you re still learning SQL don t use a LIVE system Because SQL is a programming language it doesn t include some of the protections built into other parts of OpenEnterprise Always be careful when entering SQL commands and don t use them on an OE system which is connected to a real plant or process unless you are sure of what you are doing Otherwise this crash course could really end up in a crash OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 1 Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users Starting the SQL Client To start the SQL Client click on Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt SQL Client NOTE Every SQL Client command begins with the comma
208. e it can be extracted for use on displays OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 1 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Displays consist of a mixture of static and dynamic objects These objects are drawn to resemble specific parts of the plant or process such as pumps valves compressors tanks etc Static objects do not change and are not connected to the OE Database Dynamic objects however are linked to live real time process data in the OE Database through the use of OPC Tags The dynamic objects can be configured to change color size or flash based on how the real time data changes For example an analog value might flash when it has entered an alarm state or a Z Lah Bristol abcock Bristol PCS erer oent rtrdb digital name c This is an OPC Tag pump might turn green when it is running and yellow when it is undergoing maintenance Besides allowing an operator to monitor the plant or process displays can be configured to help the operator control the process by allowing data entry of setpoints by allowing the operator to start and stop devices depicted on the display such as pumps motorized valves etc In each case these actions are possible by sending commands from the display down to the OE Database and then on to the controller network Objects which are to be used on multiple displays can be saved as symbols in the symbol library They can then
209. e of the attribute you want to specify a condition for in the Available Attributes list box then click on the Add push button The attribute name will be added to the Condition line below the push buttons enter an equation specifying the condition you want to apply Here are some examples of conditions NOTE You must leave a single space on each side of an arithmetic operator lt gt value lt 500 manualinhibit TRUE units MGD extension INPUT name LIKE PUMP OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 17 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data When finished entering the condition click on the Update push button The specified condition will be displayed in the Conditions list box and the Condition line will be cleared so that you can specify any additional conditions NOTE When you enter multiple conditions all conditions must be satisfied Database Object Viewer New OQuery EJE x File Options Query Help aa a zw NP Tables Conditions Parameters Joins Attributes SOL Filter Time Zone Objects P Auto run without conditions Available Attributes Conditions uppressiongronp value lt 00 timestamp timestampdstoffset timezone updatemask valueoyveride workstation Wwiriteoverride Condition realanalog value foat Objects 0 0 0 NUAN rindb 1 To edit a condition click on aN then click on the Edit push button then
210. e prevented from logging on even if they then have the correct password After being locked out they cannot get back in unless the System Administrator allows it or Lock Out Duration has been configured and has expired Normally automatic log out applies to the entire workstation logging off all users If there are multiple connections to the OE Database active for example a program extracting report data as well as a user viewing trends you can check this box so that automatic log out only applies to the particular connection meeting the log out criteria 10 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Why bother having all these rules about passwords and accounts Good question Which rules you establish is entirely up to you You certainly don t have to force people to change their passwords regularly or specify that passwords have to expire If you don t choose Expires In that user s password will never need to be changed Similarly if you want people to be able to use a simple 1 character password you can let them do that by not specifying a Minimum Length You don t have to log people out if there is no operator activity The idea behind these and other items on the Accounts page is to increase the security of your system Having people change passwords regularly having people use passwords that aren t easy to guess and logging people out if there is no activity is t
211. e selected attribute will be copied automatically into the Data Source field of the Pen Configuration dialog box Click on OK to exit the Pen Configuration dialog box then click on Runtime to view your trend Historical sample data will begin to appear on the screen OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data OE Trend View Container File View Configure Help OD bed 2 Nam Description Quality Timestamp Val Units D h Fa LI qat lood E i all UL D LS E i ru l km i bm m m n l m m H OC 1 4 ooo l Variations on Example 3 Changing the Time Range for Displayed Data In all of the examples we ve done so far we ve been starting the trend from the current workstation time We did that for the Real time trends and we did that when we were looking at historical samples Usually we were only showing about an hour of data on the screen Let s say though that you ve saved a week s worth of historical data and instead of seeing the historical samples for the last hour you want to see the historical samples from 4 days ago How do you do that You would have to adjust the starting time of the trend and check that the period and viewable time range are correct 7 26 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data There are three things that determine the time range of the data you can see on the Trend The period specifies the total lengt
212. e summary area of the page will report the resulting schedule based on your choices so you can verify that you created the schedule correctly based on your needs When finished click on Next gt Specify the time you want the report to be generated and then specify how frequently you want it to be repeated In this example the report is scheduled to run daily at 11 55 PM Schedule Configuration Schedule Configuration Type This page allows the user to define the type specific properties of the sche file Timed Please enter peate and time at which fe schedule will be triggered la Repeating Reports Period At 11 55 00 PM Summary This schedule will trigger at 11 55 00 PM every 1 Days Local time DST adjusted Time Base Select how the defined period will be interpreted by the Report Scheduler Local time DST adjusted Local time Non DST adjusted UTC Click on Next gt OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 21 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Schedule Configuration Reports On this page you are actually associating a report with the schedule you are creating The Available Reports window displays a list of all the reports that have been created Click on the name of the report you want to associate with this schedule then click on gt and the report will be added to the Selected Reports field Click on Next gt to proceed to the next page Click on the report you
213. e will be taken offline by the system it will remain online until that moment OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Click on OK and the Archive File will be brought online Restoring Offline Archive File s from Backup Media or a different Server If you have Archive Files that are currently not visible in the Archive Catalog tree you will need to add them in First copy them to the Online Archives folder archdirectory in oelogdata you specified during historical configuration If you are copying the files from a CD ROM they will typically be read only even after you restore them to Online Archives folder the server If this is the case you must change their file attribute to read write before you try to add them into the Archive Catalog Once you have copied them to the Online Archive folder and adjusted the file attribute as necessary you need to add them into the Archive Catalog Click on Add Archives Archive File Tool File Help Archived Data Backups B ga 1 RealAnalog minute samples with hourly and daily compression To do this click on the Add Archives EE 86400s button in the Archive File Tool E 4 Raw data collection from realanalog table Os X 01 JUN 2007 06 05 54 to 04 JUN 2007 06 08 54 04 JUN 2007 06 08 54 to 04 JUN 2007 07 05 54 The Archive File Import dialo g box will 04 JUN 2007 07 05 54 to 04 JUN 2007 10 05 54 9 ow Data 1
214. eas anne does eas 6 11 Example 1 Logging 1 minute data for a few signals aes OPPERE E E E EO ETEN Le 2 Logging Status Values by Exception sesseeessseeeesssssserssssseree EEEE EETA 6 32 Example 3 Logging Hourly and Daily Flow Calculations andi using s Timed Arhivei 6 39 Example 4 Using the Archive File Tool 000 ee eeesseecceeeeesseececeseesssesceeeesesseeseeesseess O O L iii Chapter 7 Trending Your Data pasion E EOE A apnea eee 7 1 What are Trends I 1 Example 1 Trending a eal time dats Yale nnn erent PESEE O ENEE R FE Mac aT 11 see a Eaa Basic Modifications i ihe Trend Yo Example 5 Working with N fultiple P Peis in the Sam Example 6 Optimizing your Trend for data or aad EESE EA AIE OEA ET TAEST ee ter s Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms ssssssssssssscosococococceccececccsssssososoooocceeeee 8 3 1 What are the ferent cise ee een PE A EE esse EE EE E A TAN olan age A T E EAE 8 1 Logical Alarms E A A E A Sree enone TreT 3 Change of State A NENE MA VOER NEE IANA AERAR AIA ER EIIE PONIA AIE Example 1 St l 3 E tarting the Alarm ie sae Viewing All Hoong Alera nT Rane gt 5 o Example 2 Acknowledging Alarma ieee Rina EA ne E an ne rte eter ee Example 3 Changing the Attributes D iiss in ihe Alaro Vieta ae eee eee 10 Example 4 Viewing the Alarm Event E ea 2 CO I CO
215. eas reside in the ALL access area To perform these assignments we need to start the SQL Client For information on SQL please see Appendix A The format for moving objects from the ALL access area to another access area is as follows update tablename set accessarea accessarea_name commit where tablename is the name of a table in the database accessarea_name is the access area where this object will reside You can also choose to assign only certain portions of an object to a particular access area for example you can put certain entries of a table in one access area and other entries in another access area Such a statement would appear as follows update tablename set accessarea accessarea where condition where condition specifies some attribute related to the object and the value that attribute should have in order to assign corresponding parts of tablename to accessarea NOTE There are hundreds of different tables in the database each of which includes one or more attributes For more information see the OpenEnterprise Schema Reference Manual Examples Continuing with our previous example we are going to assign the realanalog table which holds live ACCOL analog signal data to the Centerville access area except for certain signals with an ACCOL basename of DEMO which will be used in the Laraby access area The statements below when included in the OBJECT SECURITY section of the CUSTOM_SE
216. ecific tables 10 24 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Find the box intersecting the OE system and the group and click on it to grant a privilege There are two privileges that can be allowed RO Read Only or RW Read Write If neither of these are specified the default is None 1 e no privileges After you have granted privileges as desired click on OK to exit the tool OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 25 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Common Security Tasks for Users Lo in Onto the S stem pkn OpenEnterprise Login Client From the OE Desktop menu bar click on Security e gt Login to call up the OE Login Client NOTE Usemame m If the OE Desktop hasn t been configured yet you Password can click on Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt Login wre oo rtrdb1 SYSTEM E U ond P d and NOTE If this icon doesn t have a nter your Username an assword an green box around it you can t log click on OK in because the Database is unavailable The name of the user currently logged on at this workstation always appears in the status bar in the lower right corner of the OE Desktop window Verify that your username appears in that location Logging Off the System in Off the S stem PENI OpenEnterprise Login Client Options Help To log off the system call up the OpenEnterprise i Log
217. econds Minutes Hours Days Weeks Months or Years The Historian will convert the specified units into a format of either seconds or months since that is how the Historian computes time internally NOTE This setting CANNOT be modified once the dataset has been saved This indicates a time which must be from the past at which polling began for this dataset If NOT selected polling will begin immediately upon completion of dataset definition This is used to define the offset at which storage will occur e g 10 minutes past the hour Unless you specify a date it is stored in the database as an offset from the beginning of 12 00 midnight on January 1 2001 Greenwich Mean Time GMT That particular date is Day 0 in the OE historical system time is measured internally from that date forward This determines in conjunction with the Maximum Unsaved Data field the amount of data to be stored in the log file This setting CANNOT be modified once the dataset has been saved NOTE When polled collection is used this is measured in time units seconds minutes hours days weeks months or years If triggered collection is used this is expressed in generations of saved data Recommendations e For minute samples the log file should hold 24 hours worth of data e For compressed hourly data 1 hour averages for example the log file should hold one week s worth of data e For compressed daily data daily averages totals
218. ect Viewer or you can click on to access the HDA Server Tag Browser and bring in a historical value for the limit Lixit Configuration Cone Click here to call up a color palette from which you can select the color you want the trace to be when this limit is exceeded You can have other aspects of the trace appearance change when the limit is exceeded such as the point size of the trace width or the style Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Using the Default Pen to Set Characteristics for Pens The default pen doesn t You may have noticed the Default Pen in the Pen dialog boxes trend any data It s an earlier in this example The default pen is special It can t actually optional feature that trend data it s just a mechanism where you can set default lets you set default characteristics for any new pens you add to this Trend Just go into characteristics styles the Pens page select the Default Pen just like any other pen for example for all and set your defaults Then when you add any more pens to this subsequent pens used trend they will be based on the characteristics you defined for the in this trend default pen To set default characteristics for all subsequent pens in a trend select the lt Default gt pen and then choose Modify to set the characteristics OE Trend Client Control Properties Pens ld Data Source lt Default gt 7 20 Ope
219. ecurity for your system Creating a user outside of a group n Security Configuration Fie Edit Tools Help To create a user but not assign them to a particular group just right click on the Users icon in the left pane of the Security Configuration Tool and choose New User from the pop up menu Right click on the Users icon then Default Group choose New User i i o from the pop up D Security Config PUBLIC menu SYSTEM An empty box will appear in the right hand pane of the Security Configuration Tool Type the name of the user into the box When you press the Enter key to complete the name the Group User Properties dialog box will appear Define the user as explained earlier Assigning a User to an existing Group There are two ways to assign a user to an existing group Method 1 User Properties TOM OPC Item Token Access Areas Custom Token File Token Properties Account Summary Token Group Application Token One way is to call up the Group User User Settings Administration Properties dialog box for that user either by User Name E Change Password At Next Logon double clicking on the icon for that user or Full Name User Cannot Change Password right clicking on it and choosing E Password C Account Disabled Properties from the pop up menu and then select the group for that user The group RISERS ro is selected through the Parent
220. ed set of reference manuals which can be found on the OpenEnterprise CD After you have completed the examples in this manual we recommend you use these reference guides as you design and implement your system You will also find that the product itself includes a comprehensive online help system we recommend you use it regularly Thank you for buying OpenEnterprise All of us at Emerson who have worked on this product are proud of it and would like to hear any feedback you may have good or bad We try hard to incorporate improvements into each new release and many of those improvements and new features arise out of suggestions from our existing customers Please email or call me with any suggestions or comments you may have either on this manual or on the product Steve Hill SCADA Program Manager Emerson Process Management Tel 1 860 945 2501 Email stephen hill emersonprocess com Contacting the OpenEnterprise Support Team Telephone support for OpenEnterprise users is available Monday through Friday from 8AM to 4 30PM Eastern U S excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns at the following number 1 860 945 3865 You can e mail the OpenEnterprise Support Team at openenterprise emersonprocess com D5091 OpenEnterprise OE for Beginners Table of Contents TA ee a e a T E E sce tt ee ee ee 1 Contachne the OpenEnterprise Support Group sisseseade risen 1 Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise OE
221. ent users We recommend therefore that you either choose all UPPERCASE or all lowercase when entering usernames and passwords or you could get confused later OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 3 Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users SELECT command The SELECT command is a great way to view various columns attributes of a table What s nice about it is you can look search for various items in a table which meet some specified criteria For example if you want to look at all the signals in the realanalog table which currently are in an alarm state you could do that The basic syntax of the SELECT command is SELECT search_item s FROM table_name There is also an extended version which looks like this SELECT search_item s FROM table_name WHERE condition where search_item s is replaced with the name of the attribute or attributes columns you want to view from the table If searching for more than one attribute separate them with commas If you enter the wildcard character for search_items s all attributes in the table will be included in the search NOTE Exercise caution when using the because if you enter that there are no limits on the amount of data you re requesting from the table If it s a really large table you could crash your system table_name is replaced with name of a table within the OE Database We talked about some of the commonly used table names earlier in this appendix
222. enter the word Filter Displays Filter Displays since we want to group iced bined together the filter displays for our plant ee Overview Eneu Tin a System Overview The Filter Displays rator Group menu item will call up another menu a list of the filter displays Jen epa EIn 9 14 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop Menu Editor n rate mmand Now you eed to add a a ad ate New Co a d Pop up menu hierarchy Now you need to add for each of the filter displays in the group and we ac ee a New Command under configure them similarly as you did the Overview a the Filter Displays for each display ma Ee of the filter displays Menu Editor x Now yo u have Pop up menu hierarchy th ree new menu e You must specify a name in place of E Menu items one for each 6 9 4 stem Overview i the New Command Bia Separate of the three filter fey Filter Displays i z a ra displays 66 99 1 A Filter2 In the onma Target list box Again we want choose Bristol OpenEnterprise to load our display i Direct Invoke Insert Before Parent Menu Display Seite into our display Target Bristol OpenEnterprise Display Y window that IS Action Load Fie z called Main Display Window Nane You can optionally No Parent 4 MDI Chil specify a title for the window here e Choose Load File in the Action li
223. er 7 Trending Your Data different traces apart To tell the different traces in the trend apart the Trend Viewer will automatically use a different color for each trace We ll talk more about this later The X axis is horizontal It represents the time range for the trend Trends are drawn on a grid The X axis is a horizontal line with marks evenly spaced along it Each mark represents some moment of time The distance between two adjacent marks could represent a minute an hour etc The Y axis is vertical It represents the range of values of the process variable The grid also has a Y axis which is a vertical line corresponding to the range of values which will be displayed for the trend or a particular trace within the trend A particular trend may show more than one set of X and Y axes This is recommended if you are showing more than one variable in the same trend and the variables don t share the same range of values Each set of axes would correspond to a particular trace The plural of axis is axes SO we say X and Y axes Y axis shows the range of values forthe Grid variable Trace for a particular variable i Untitled OEContainer File view Configure Help Cah amp 4 X axis shows P the time scale j gt m Name Description Quality Timestamp Value Units Data Source a Good 20JAN 2005 15 40 00 000 174 000000 BristolBabcock BristoDASewer t seada webi Deta
224. er of the container and click on Properties when it pops up Right click in the middle of the grid and choose Properties from the pop up menu Untitled OEContainer File View Runtime Help Ose Se Hide Details Hide Marker rend Client Configure Mode Name Description Quality Timestamp value Units DataSource MinimumRange Maximum Range visible The OE Trend Client Control Properties dialog box will appear Click on the Pens tab to go to the Pens page then click on the Add button Click on Add to add a new trend pen OE Trend Client Control rcoperties Ce Fiemove Remove All ok carce J _aevty J Hee OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 23 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data The Pen Configuration dialog box will appear If you check the Auto Populate with Signal Data box the Trend Viewer will attempt to fill in the Device Status Name Description and Units fields with corresponding entries from the OE Database based on the Data Source These fields are not essential for the trend to work they are simply used to provide useful information in the Detail pane during Runtime You will also be prompted to confirm that you want to use this feature as it overwrites anything you typed in directly into those fields The Data Source field is the most important field In Example 1 when w
225. es the value of the Chlorine Leak signal Property Inspector Hide or Disable Hide Object Disable Object f Hide Disable when False Hide Disable when True Delete Object Name Pe Description Choose which state will cause the text label to be hidden In this case we don t want to display the Chlorine Leak label unless the associated signal is ON true so when it is false hide the label 5 32 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 5 To test that the label is displayed correctly simulate a chlorine leak by turning the associated chlorine leak signal ON via Open BSI DataView then verify that the chlorine leak label is displayed in Runtime Mode Be sure to turn the signal OFF when you re finished testing vi Display OpenEnterprise by Bristol File View Tools Configure Help CHLORINE LEAK DETECTED Variation on Example 5 Making the CHLORINE LEAK DETECTED label flash on and off when it is ON In the example we just completed we displayed the CHLORINE LEAK DETECTED label when the associated signal was ON Suppose to grab the attention of the operator we also want the label to FLASH on and off To do this click as follows Dynamics Actions gt Flash Go to the Flash page of the dialog box Specify the state when flashing is to appear in this case Flash When True and if desired
226. es dialog box for the signal you must select the Report By Exception box e If this is an analog signal you must enter a deadband Do not leave the deadband field blank or you could overload your communications network e You must configure the RBE Module This is discussed in the RBE section of the ACCOL II Reference Manual document D4044 Select Report By Exception to identify this as an RBE signal Signal Properties General Settings Initial State Units Text T Mark as Global If this is an analog signal you MUST specify an RBE deadband here Saving Compiling and Downloading the ACCOL Load When you have finished editing in ACCOL Workbench you must save the ACCOL source file by clicking on File gt Save or by clicking on the Save icon You must then build the ACCOL load ACL file from the ACCOL source file using the Build command in ACCOL Workbench Click on Actions gt Build or click on the Build icon When the ACCOL load has been built successfully without errors you must download it into the Network 3000 controller using the Open BSI Downloader The Downloader is accessible from within ACCOL Workbench by clicking on Actions gt Download or by clicking on the Download icon For full instructions on downloading see Chapter 7 of the Open BSI Utilities Manual document D5081 2 6 OpenEnterprise for Beg ae j inners Chapter 2 Config
227. escription values Administration Signals for Administrators only This is the actual data which will be inserted in the table It s important to note that the number of attributes columns into which you are inserting must match the amount of data you are putting in So if you are inserting data into two columns you must have two items of data to put into those two columns NOTE The data is isn t actually entered in the database until you enter one additional command which we will talk about later It is called the COMMIT command SQL gt commit Once the COMMIT command has been run the table will be updated If you look at the table now it will appear as shown below accessarea description FAGE Default Access Area operators Signals for operator use Administration Signals for Administrators only OpenEnterprise for Beginners A Il Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users UPDATE command The UPDATE command lets you change information for records that are already in the OE Database The basic syntax of the UPDATE command is UPDATE table_name SET attribute expression There is also an extended version which looks like this UPDATE table_name SET
228. ettings click on Next gt On the Create New Query Output page you can optionally change the location of the cell where data will be displayed by clicking on the button You can also choose whether or not you want to display column headers or signal names over the data in the report After making your format selections click on Finish You can optionally change the way items appear OpenEnterprise Import History Create New Query Output Define where the import history data will be put and formatted ars Object names would Enter where you want the data to appear be the signal names Existing worksheet cell reference Sheet t4 a LJ eave this checked if daria deni 3 you want the signal Data Formatting name to be included Z Show object names io V Show column headers Define timestamp setting Column headers are Ree ee mh the column attribute ect the background cell color for questionable data pe aes from the database questionable fs Leave this checked if you want that on the Next gt Help report Click on Finish Click on Yes You will be prompted as to whether you want Successful query creation to run the historical query right now Click on al tener eae Yes e Do you want run it now 11 12 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports The queried data will now be displayed within Excel column headers The report template now includes
229. ew Window icon or click on Desktop gt New and the New dialog box will appear Click on the New Window icon or use Desktop gt New and the New dialog box will appear Nio OpenEnterprise Desktop l Il le Se e m OE Alarm Ribbon ACODE Alarm View APOE Alarm Printer View E OE Notes View HB OE Signal View OCX OE SQL View PE DE Trend View 0E Web View OE Control Display el Bristol OpenEnterprise Display Window Type MDI Child You can optionally enter a name for this window here Here you choose which type of OE component you want to have loaded into this window 9 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop e Inthe New dialog box select the type of OE component you want to load into the window For this example we re going to choose Bristol OpenEnterprise Display but you could choose any of the OE components listed e We can optionally enter a name that will appear in the title bar of the window in the Window Name field It s actually useful to give it a name because we can make use of that name in a later example We re going to call it Main Display e Click on OK You now have an empty OE Desktop that s configured to hold a Display We now have an empty window on our desktop which is configured to hold a Bristol OpenEnterprise Display The name Main Display comes from entering that text in the Window Name field of
230. ewer that lets you search through the contents of the OE Database view portions of particular tables etc For information on how Database Explorer works please refer to Chapter 4 Understanding how to use the Database Explorer is one of the best ways to get the most out of your OE system re Database Explorer File View Options Window Help Brn HEA e e E plantarea realanalog E realanalogalarmcorn E realanalogchangeta E realanalogchangeve realanalogdeviation E realanalogequalsala eee realanaloglimitalarme p ree ates Ea realanalograteofcha alarminhibit amp description E realanalogsignalalar amp attribute devicename E realanalogsignaltrigc amp base amp disable E realarchiveindex calloutarea display recipient calloutdisplay amp dstoffset amp changemask amp extension amp cleared amp forcepoll amp controlinhibit forcewrite currentalarmprecedence hasnotes currentdstoffset amp highlimit currentlocker amp inalarm E recipientassociation E recipientassociation E recipientgroup E recipientusernotes redundancy Gel redumdsn i ouslarnoac Derived Tables 0 OwnAttributes 54 Total Attributes 54 amp lastdataset amp locked locker amp lowlimit amp manualinhibit amp name occurencetime occurencetimedstoffs amp plantarea amp printer amp private amp questionable amp teadchangemask
231. ey could be other limits you define Pen Configuration Data Ranges Limits Styles Visible 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Then click on the Modify button First select the limit you want to define To specify a limit click on the type of limit you want to define Hr for example then click on the Modify button The Limit Configuration dialog box will appear You can type in a limit directly drag a value from a signal in from the OE Database using the Database Object Viewer or click on the to specify a historical value using the HDA Server Tag Browser Now click on the Line Styles button to choose the color for the pen when its value exceeds this limit In the Line Styles dialog box click on the Color box to bring up a palette and select the color you want the trace to be drawn in when this particular limit is exceeded You can also for example have the trace drawn in a different style thicker point size different style while exceeding the limit by modifying the Width and Plot Style settings Click on OK repeatedly until you have exited all the way out of the dialog boxes Go to Runtime mode and when the trace exceeds that limit it should appear in the selected color and style OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 19 You can enter in a value directly drag one in from a signal in the OE Database using the Database Obj
232. ey need to have multiple displays open to perform certain tasks Perhaps your hierarchy is too cumbersome or requires too many mouse clicks to locate certain displays Revise the system as necessary to accommodate your user s concerns Make sure the displays are organized in a way that people can easily find the information they need Change things if necessary 5 56 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 8 Build all of the objects for your system Create all of the objects needed for your system pumps valves tanks compressors analog setpoints faceplates etc and set up aliases for them according to the previously established convention Save the objects in the symbol library with shared object names Step 9 Build the Displays Finally you should build the displays using the objects from the symbol library Each display should be included in the proper place of the previously defined hierarchy Step 10 Test Your HMI System and Revise as Necessary Test each of your displays and verify that they function as expected Make any necessary corrections OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 57 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data What is Historical Data The OE Database by its very nature is constantly Unlike live real time data which being updated with the latest available data values is continuously being updated as from signals in the RTUs Data fro
233. files to CD ROM and then deleting them An alternative way to back up the offline archive files is to periodically copy them to a different computer You can do this manually or you can automate this process using the Archive File Tool Click on Add Archive File Tool To do this go to the Backup page of the Fie Heb Archive File Tool and click on Add Archived Data Backups Specify a name and description Specify a Name and Backup Set Properties description for your backu h P d n h p e C Choose when you want your SC eme an C OOSE W en you nce Repository for old archive files archive files transferred to the want the files transferred to ate other computer the backup machine You can O When Offine specify that you want them Timed Using Diary sent as soon as they are created as soon as they are offline or at some predetermined time of day Then click on Add Backup Items Click on Add to specify the location of the other computer or folder Now choose the logging group and the dataset samples Os hourly 3600s daily 86400s etc from which these archive files were generated Also you must select the folder containing the offline archive files and the destination on the other machine to which you want to transfer the archive files OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 57 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Choose the Logging Group t
234. for any signal that is currently control inhibited Timestamp Column identifies a column in the source table that holds a date time value This allows a timestamp to be associated with each 6 16 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data historical sample By default all timestamps saved in the historical system reflect the time the data was saved This feature however allows some other timestamp to be associated with the saved data Rate Column identifies a column in the source table that holds an integer value This value will be used as a special collection rate for this particular row instead of the collection rate configured for the dataset discussed later For example if you are collecting signal data you might want to collect certain signals faster than normal based on changing conditions in your process When finished in the Historical Advanced Settings dialog box click on the OK push button When finished with the Logging Group page click on the Next gt push button The Logging Group Select Fields page will appear The tables for signal data do NOT support this feature by default if you want to use this feature you will need to customize the signal extensions table to include an additional column for this purpose OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 17 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Logging Group Select Fields Page The Logging Group Select Fields page s
235. formation on these subjects please consult the Security Configuration Tool section of the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide document D5092 Repeat this process for each group you want to define If you need to change any of the token choices or other settings just double click on the name for that group and make your modifications When you re finished defining groups you can assign users to them Modifying a Group To modify a group just double click on the icon for the group or right click on the icon for the group and choose Properties from the pop up menu Make your modifications in the Group User Properties dialog box and click on OK to exit OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 15 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Creating Users Right click on the group into which you want to assign the user then choose New User Just right click on the name of the group you want to svareM Hered from the pop add the user to and choose New User in Group from 8 ones Now that we ve created our groups creating users 1s easy Properties a DISPATCHERS the pop up menu PPAR Nev User In Group a GUESTS Remove All Users A OPERATORS Security Configuration An empty box will appear in the Fle Edit Tools Help right hand pene of the Secur ity Lr O User FullName Description Group Configuration Tool Type the name of ea Epo the user into the box When you press ete i the Enter
236. gger which says OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 5 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data log this data now This is similar to the Report By Exception RBE data collection used in real time data collection except here the concept is being applied to historical logging Assigning individual records to the logging group optional By default all records of the source table will be logged Depending upon the size of the source table that may require you to create a very large log file The Realanalog_table for example might contain thousands of different signals but maybe you only want to log data for a few hundred If that s the case it would waste considerable disk space to log all the signals in the table You ll need to identify which signals you want to log If this is so then you have to use a technique called userenable logging In userenable logging a logging group will only log records in this case rows of signal data from records which have been specifically assigned to that logging group via the dataset attribute in the source table The assignment of records to a logging group 1s performed in the Historical Configuration Tool Choosing Columns to be logged and calculations to be performed if any e Most any table you log data from contains many columns attributes which you don t need to log You should decide which columns contain the data that is worth logging e Choosing to log only the columns you
237. ght click on the Menu folder icon Menu Editor Pop up menu hierarchy Direct Invoke Insert Before Parent Menu Group Invoke All Submenu Items Enable Disable Window Choose New Command i Menu Editor Pop up menu hierarchy For purposes of this example we re going to choose New New Group New Separator Copy Type in System Overview here Menu Editor Pop up menu hierarchy Menu Editor Pop up menu hierarchy OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop In the Command Target list box choose Bristol OpenEnterprise Display Choose Load File in the Action list box In the Window portion of the dialog box enter the name of the window into which you want to load this display Since Main Display is the only window we have configured to hold OpenEnterprise displays that s the name we enter NOTE We chose the name Main Display in an earlier example on page 9 3 You can optionally enter a title for the display which will appear in the title bar of its desktop window by clicking on the Caption button and entering the title there First choose Bristol OpenEnterprise Display in the Target list box Specify here the window into which you want this display loaded Since we only have one window in our OE Desktop for displays called Main Display that s the one we specify 8 Menu Editor
238. gle Fill Toggle Freeze Font Property Inspector Edit Local Aliases Edit Connections Create VBA Script Create VBScript Create JScript Property Inspector Text PPT DE Default Data Source nstolBabcock BristolOPC Point Type lv Update uP W Data Entry Clie Confirm For OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Changing Background amp Foreground Colors of the Process Point Changing the Font The Text page of the Property Inspector dialog box includes various fields for changing the style of how the text appears You should experiment with this to see a style you prefer Property Inspector Test PPT DE Default Pick Use this list box to Text Color W ewin fo change the edge Fill Color Line Style No Line F around the text Shadow Colo f 3D Edge None You can have a z l NoPaten f raised edge a Freeze Obit sunken edge etc W Stretch Text OrNgesize Font Arial Size 10 Font Text Left l Click here to call up Bound Let the Font dialog box Object Name to change the font Description Styles of the text Share Keyword Custom Data Custis Call up a pallette to select a different background color for the data Cancel Apply Help Common Mistakes Which Occur When Creating Process Points Dragging data without first clicking the Process Point icon and clicking in the dis
239. gt to put them on the Include List Group Properties ADM NISTRATORS File Token OPC Item Token Token Group Properties Account Access Areas Application Token Custom Token Available Tokens Include List Name A Name Component E0 Close Windows ace Acknowledge OE Alam Client SED Configure Mode acc Acknowledge All OE Alam Client 9 0 Create OE Alarm Banner o 0 Create OE Alam Client o 0 Create OE Alam Printer oD Create OE Control Display oED Create OE Graphic View oeo Create OE Notes Client Exclude List 0 0 Create OE Signal View Name Component 0 0 Create OE SQL Viewer o 0 Create OE Trend View 9 0 Create OE Web Client 0 Create Windows oED Customize Dialog OED Dieta Filas lt Test String String checking is not applicable for this token type Select the application token s you want to deny from this group or user from the Available Tokens list then click on Exclude gt gt to put them on the Exclude List Application tokens are tokens associated with one of the OpenEnterprise tools such as the Trend Viewer the Alarm Viewer etc Each of these tools has several tokens If you deny access to a particular item it will either be grayed out on the menu for that tool or it won t appear at all So for example if you choose to prevent all Operators from silencing alarms and put the Silence and Silence All tokens on the OPERATORS Exclude List those o
240. h of time encompassed by the trend For example if you want to trend the last 7 days of data then your period is 7 days NOTE You could have different periods defined for different pens in the trend The viewable time range determines how much of the period can be displayed on the screen in the trend at any one time For example you might want to show 1 day worth of data on the screen at any one time If the viewable time range is less than the specified period that means that the entire trend can t be displayed all at once so a scroll bar will be added at the bottom of the trend so you can scroll to the data you want to see The start time specifies the earliest time for which data will be displayed The system takes the start time and searches the OE Database for the data closest to that start time and then retrieves it into the trend By default the start time is calculated by taking the current workstation time and subtracting the amount of time represented by the period Alternatively you can override this default and specify the start time yourself To specify the period for the Common X axis total length of time encompassed by this trend specify the period for the e Call up the OE Trend Control Properties dialog common X axis here box and go to the X Axis portion of the Ranges page e Specify the total period length of time you want to be reflected in this trend using any combination of the Period days
241. h went into alarm value The current value of the signal units The engineering units associated with that signal if applicable acknowledged The acknowledgement state of the alarm i e has the operator or the system acknowledged that the alarm has occurred cleared If true the signal is no longer in an alarm state description Descriptive text about the signal in Alarm condition The condition limit that caused the alarm e g High LowLow There are many other attributes you could include For a full description of what all these attributes mean please see the alarmsummary table description in the OpenEnterprise Schema Reference Manual When you ve finished setting up the Alarm eS Viewer the way you want it be sure to save it You can save the configuration of your Alarm Viewer in an Alarm View AC file Just click on File gt Save As while the Alarm View is visible and enter a name when prompted then click on Save You can then open that AC file configuration in the Alarm Viewer at any time by specifying that as the Config File on the General page of the OE Alarm Client Control Properties dialog box Ss naan You can also include the AC file as part of an 3 OE Desktop which we will discuss in Chapter 9 File name OpenEnterprise for Beginners ll Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms Example 4 Viewing the Alarm Event History IMPO
242. hange click on the lt Back push button and continue using the lt Back push button on earlier pages until you reach the items you want to change If there are no items you want to change click on the Finish push button and changes will be written to the database Wow We re done Woo hooo OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 31 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Example 2 Logging Status Values by Exception Let s say you have many logical signals in your database They change values as pumps start and stop valves open and close etc If you wanted to keep a history of their value changes you could log them every minute but it s probably the case that they don t change that frequently so you d be logging the same value over and over most of the time A more efficient way to log this information is to use logging by exception that we mentioned earlier NOTE We re skipping the steps about starting the Historical Configuration Tool and clicking on Add to add a new Logging Group because we re assuming you re familiar with them If you don t remember those please go back to page 6 12 and review those steps Step 1 Create a Logging Group In the first page of the Logging Group dialog box you must specify e The OE Database table from which the data will be logged must be specified in the Table field Since we want to log changes to logical signals this must be the digital_table e You must
243. hapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms considered to be in a high high alarm state because there is a 10 0 high deadband in effect deadbands are shown as shaded areas on the graph When the variable value falls lower than 80 0 C point 90 0 C high alarm limit minus the high deadband of 10 0 C the variable is no longer in a high high alarm state See Item 3 It is still however in a high alarm state As the value of the variable decreases below 70 0 C it remains in a high alarm state until its value falls below 60 0 C 70 0 C alarm limit minus a 10 0 C high deadband See Item 4 At this point the variable is in its normal range and a return to normal alarm message is sent Then however the value of the variable continues to drop When it reaches 40 0 C a Low Alarm message is generated See Item 5 The variable remains in a Low Alarm state until the variable value drops to 20 0 C See Item 6 This causes a Low Low Alarm message to be generated The variable remains in a Low Low Alarm state until the variable rises above 30 0 C 20 0 C low low alarm limit plus low deadband of 10 0 C See Item 7 The variable is still in a Low Alarm state however Once the variable rises above 50 0 C 40 0 C low alarm limit low deadband of 10 0 C it has left the low alarm state and a return to normal alarm message is sent See Item 8
244. hat a oa viene aa A collected if SAME its value changes significantly from its previous value The determination of whether or not a ee change is significant is determined by a value SAME called the deadband The deadband is a range SAMF above and below the signal s value and must be configured for every signal If it hasn t changed more than the value defined by that range since the last time it was collected any change is considered insignificant and the signal isn t collected RBE is a useful method of data collection because it reduces the amount of data that has to be collected while also allowing data to be displayed more rapidly than would be possible via Polled List collection Array and Archive Collection via Open BSI Converter The Open BSI Harvester utility can collect array data and archive data directly from the controllers and store it in files on the OE Server computer A related utility called the Open BSI Converter can insert the data from these files directly into tables of the OE Database 1 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise How do we view the contents of the OE Database The main method for viewing the contents of the OE Database is the Database Explorer Database Explorer is a program that runs on the OE Server or OE Workstation Database Explorer lets you examine the structure of the database It also includes a feature called the Database Object Vi
245. hat has the archive files you l want backed up on another Specify which dataset When finished click on OK and computer you want backed up 1 1 1 Backup Item Properties x o e E 5 OK al 7 elect the folder containing you return to the Backup page of Oesinton ow Das ass i A 2 lt _ the archive files you want the tool Logging Group 1 Real4nalog ming samples with hourly gpedail vw backed up Table realanalog_ty Me You can then exit the Archive isi Specify the destination for Source Folder File Tool if you are finished with ciistoy archFies the files i e where they will your configuration activities Target Folder be backed up name and Docpe e folder on other computer Click on OK when finished What can I do with all this historical data So you ve saved and archived tons and tons of historical data What s it good for Well most customers like to create trends of certain variables from their historical data If you want to do that we have a whole chapter Chapter 7 which talks about creating trends Customers also like to generate reports based on their historical data You can use the Report Tool to generate reports from data stored in the OpenEnterprise Database See Chapter 11 for information on using the Report Tool Alternatively you can use any third party ODBC compatible reporting package to generate reports Finally if you re comfor
246. he un zoomed state by right clicking in the Graph pane and choosing Zoom Undo to undo the last zoom or Zoom Undo Full to undo all of your zooming Trend configurations can be saved in a TVD file for re use at a later time OE Trend Views tvd You should save your trend because we re going to use it some more in Example 2 Trend configurations can be saved in a file by using the File gt Save As command This is helpful because it lets you pre configure trends and recall them at a later time Trend files have TVD file extensions Once you have configured a trend and saved it ina TVD file you can e Re open that TVD file at any time in the Trend Viewer using the File gt Open command e Save it under a different name and then re use it as a starting point or template when creating other trends e Embed the trend within an OE Graphics display This is beyond the scope of this chapter e Load the trend into an OE Desktop file or tie it to a menu item using the OE Menu Editor Details on how to do this are outside the scope of this chapter 7 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Example 2 Making Some Basic Modifications to the Trend You Just Made This example assumes you created the trend discussed in Example I and that you saved it or at least didn t close it without saving and that it is open for modification If ther
247. he Report Schedules that will be used to trigger the generation of this Report Available Schedules Selected Schedules Credentials Alarm Conditions Click on Next gt 11 16 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Report Configuration Credentials On this page you should choose SYSTEM as the Named User and then click on Next gt You should choose SYSTEM t Report Configuration Report Configuration Credentials This page allows the user credentials to be associated with the Report Credentials This configuration page allows th user credentials of an OpenEnterprise user to be specified through which the Report satel eset mpl es OpenEnterprise Server administrative user can be selected or a specific Ope ETE can be selected seal yale available Local Administrative Acog Named User SYSTEM v Click on Next gt OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 17 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Report Configuration Alarm Conditions Optionally you can specify that an alarm will be generated if a problem occurs with the report You can also specify that you want an alarm generated when the report runs successfully Make any choices as desired then click on Finish Okay now you ve created your report It s time to test it You can optionally choose to have alarms generated if there are problems with the report generation process t Report Co
248. he information in the Detail at the left side of a line in the pane with the trace by its color Detail pane matches the color of the trace for its corresponding variable Another thing to notice is that prior to when we dragged the value in the Y axis was a scale from 0 to 100 representing O to 100 percent 7 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Now that we have an actual signal in there the scale has been redrawn to show the range between the highest and lowest values that have been collected into the Trend window This is called auto scaling because the X axis is automatically changing based on the actual values coming in the window In fact the scale will continue to be redrawn if values go above or below those values received thus far Actually the Y axis actually goes from slightly below the lowest value yet received to slightly above the highest value yet received This area above and below the signal value range is called the deadband Auto scaling can be turned off Remember that we did the simplest possible trend by just dragging and dropping a signal into the trend We ll talk about this more later OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 7 If auto scaling is ON the Y axis changes based on the values coming in The Y axis is re drawn to show only the range of values coming in for the trend pen This is called auto scaling For example if the values being collected for the var
249. his example assumes you have the Alarm Viewer up and it currently has active alarms in it See Example I for help on setting up the Alarm View The information displayed as part of the alarm message in the Alarm Viewer comes directly from columns attributes in a table from the OE Database By default all attributes from the Alarmsummary table are included in the alarm message You can change this so that only those attributes you are interested in are displayed By default all attributes are selected You can click on Remove All to de select them all and then add back only those which you are interested in OE Alarm Client Control Properties Historical Suppression Time one Filter Print Properties General Databases Attributes Display Font Sound l Available Attributes Selected Attributes accesarea A i occurencetine acknowledgedtir d P emove name acknowledgedtir gt gt value alarmcondition ddd All Remove al units TH Ja emove All alarmlimit Remove All acknowledged The order in which alarnmntext A attributes are displayed attribute on the alarm line is l audiblesound determined based on their audiblesoundrep Colors Aliases order in this list If you aze k want to change the order just drag the attribute to the desired position in the list Select any attribute s you want to have displayed in the Alarm Viewer from the Available Attributes lis
250. his pen s several symbols to choose trace from Note If the Width is greater than 1 the Styles choice is automatically set to Solid and can t be changed We suggest you experiment with the various options in the Styles dialog box and see how your choices look in Runtime mode For example the figure below shows a trace where a diamond was chosen as the Marker Style ES OF Trend View Container File View Configure Help Cae amp Bsc Name Description Quality Timestamp vale Units Data Source Good 174 2005 21 08 45 000 119 000000 BristolBabcock BristolQ PFCS ervers scada web trdi 7 18 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Modifying the Color of a Trace if its Value goes past a pre defined limit If the value of the signal being trended passes a pre defined limit it is sometimes useful to have that portion of the trace drawn in a different color to draw attention to the situation The pre defined limit could be an alarm limit defined for the signal in the RTU but it doesn t have to be It could be some other arbitrary limit that has been defined To configure this go to the Limits page of the Pen Configuration dialog box On the Limits page of the Pen Configuration dialog box you can specify up to six different limits and corresponding trace colors for a pen Again these could correspond to actual alarm limits defined in the RTU or th
251. hive files that we mentioned before come into play When you configure the historical system you specify the size of the log file and you also say at what percentage of the log file size you want an archive file generated That way you don t lose data when the log file fills up because the data gets copied to an archive file Archive files are very similar to log files except they are closed to accepting new data and they don t get overwritten A certain number of archive files are kept on line that is they are available to be queried for data from OE tools such as Trend windows All other archive files are off line they are inaccessible and cannot be queried for data That s not a problem though because if for some reason you need to retrieve some data in an off line archive file you can easily make it on line using the Archive File Tool We ll talk more about the Archive File Tool later in this chapter Okay you say Why don t I keep all of the archive files on line Well you can t do that because on line archive files consume lots of memory especially if people are viewing them If you try to keep too many of them on line at the same time you will exhaust system memory and system performance will suffer until the point that the system won t work at all Please don t confuse archive files in OE with archive files in the RTU The term archive file in the context of OpenEnterprise
252. iable being trended are currently ranging between 72 and 95 then the Y axis will show a scale from slightly below 72 to slightly above 95 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Another thing you might have noticed about the trend is that as new data comes in the Detail pane is continually being updated with the latest value received 1 e the value at the far right of the X axis The reason you re getting the latest value is that the Marker Bar sits at the far right of the X axis when you first open the trend The Marker Bar is a vertical bar that chooses from where along the trace the data being presented in the Detail pane should originate Marker Bar can be moved to any point along the trace by double clicking Description Quality Timestamp Good 20 JAN 2005 15 53 00 000 The timestamp and value shown in the Detail pane are the timestamp and value at the location of the Marker Bar 7 8 Use the Marker Bar to find out a Value along the Trace To find out the value of the signal at any given point along the trace double click on that point of the trace or drag the marker bar to the point of interest and the value at that point will be displayed in the Detail pane You can move the Marker Bar to any point along the trace by simply double clicking on that point in the trace or just dragging the Marker Bar The Marker Bar will move to the new location and the Detail pane will be updated with the v
253. icking on these buttons Historical files log files and archive files are stored in these folders OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Database Project builder NOTE If one or more of the folders specified on this page doesn t exist you will be prompted to confirm whether you want to have Database Project Builder create it Click on Yes to do so D The specified Archive File location does not exist ane Do you wish to create it move Allowing Open Access to Database Tables During System Configuration Normally users only need access to certain OpenEnterprise Database tables and are prevented from accessing other tables This would be referred to as Secure database privileges While you re in the process of building your OE system we recommend you choose Open for the Database Privileges This will simplify your configuration activities We recommend you choose the default of Open while you re building your system Database Project Builder A ALALLA A Time Zone Device Drivers Summary Build Signal Data Users are by default given access to all the tables C Secure TARE Users are by default only given access to the tables Historical Data necessary for OpenEnterprise to operate correctly Database Size Session Finsh Click on Next gt to proceed to the next screen Click on Next gt to go to the
254. icularly important for historical data management By default the time zone is set to match the Windows time zone for your computer Make sure this represents the correct time zone for your geographical area Database Project Builder EaR OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Time Zones You must chose the Time Zone for the database in order for date time values to appear in local time What Time one do you wish fie database to be built im MT 10 00 Hawaii r SM T 75 20 Alaska GMT 08 00 Pactic Tif US amp Canada GMT 18 2 00 Pacific The US amp fae CLO RULES GMT Summary GMT 07 00 Chihy nua La Paz Mazatlan Device Drivers i on zy W untain D US amp Canada OLD RULES Signal Data Database Size Historical Data Session Finish GMT 05 00 Eastem Time US amp Canada L_ lt Back Jl Next gt C Click on Next gt If the correct time zone is selected click on Next gt 3 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Choosing How You Will Communicate with the Controllers Now you must select the proper device driver If you are using Bristol controllers choose Network 3000 and ControlWave Driver Now click on Next gt If you are using Bristol controllers the Network 3000 and ControlWave driver must be selected Database Project Builder The database can be built with default Device Driver ent
255. id Configuration Settings section check the X axis Bld eelines oe ef rf s ena E hoe and or Y axis ewe motel a ae show the common axis or de select it to Cor i hide the common axis Click on OK when finished Tick Marks Settings if asis Visible Y axis Visible This calls up a color palette to let you change the color of the axis While you re in this dialog box we should also note that you can click on the Color box to change the color of the common axes OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 35 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data To show a separate Axis for Each Pen To display a separate axis for a pen you first have to enable multiple axes To do this e Call up the OE Trend Control Properties dialog box and go to the Graph page e Check the Show Multiple X Axis and Show Multiple Y Axis boxes e Now click on the Pens tab and select the pen for which you want to enable the axis and choose Modify to call up the Pen Configuration dialog box e Inthe Pen Configuration dialog box click on the Styles tab then click on the Axis button 7 36 OE Trend Client Control Properties Ums Parameters General Pens Ranges Border Style None Grid i Fill Anale degrees Show Multiple 4 413 Show Multiple Y Ass JAZ Ceres Ci te lf youre going to have multiple X and Y axes on your trend these boxes must be checked first Click on the pen you
256. if you have an expression that says WHERE description LIKE MOTOR OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 1I5 Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users that means the description must begin with MOTOR but the can be replaced with anything else SoMOTORI MOTOR2 or even MOTOR HOME would all be okay For example say we want to delete all the signals from a table that have names starting with the word SYSTEM We can use delete from realanalog_table where name LIKE SYSTEM COM ec COMMIT command We ve already used the COMMIT command in several of our examples but we didn t really talk about what it does Any SQL command which actually changes the database 1 e it is writing to the database not just reading information won t actually be executed until aCOMMIT command is run This is actually useful because you can enter several different commands that you all want performed sequentially and they won t be executed until the COMMIT is issued So in other words if you are using the UPDATE INSERT or DELETE commands they won t be executed until a COMMIT is entered because they all change the contents of the OE Database The advantage of COMMIT is that if you make a big mistake and you haven t typed commit yet you can exit out of the SQL Client ending the session without any of the erroneous commands being executed because you didn t issue the COMMIT You can also type in the co
257. ift key while using the ellipse tool One thing to remember when using the multi line segmented tool is that to exit that tool you must double click the mouse on the endpoint where you want to stop drawing lines otherwise it will continue to try to draw more line segments For more information on using these tools see the GraphWorxX32 User Manual Making changes and corrections to objects To make changes to the non dynamic parts of the object just click on them in Configure mode and make changes using the drawing tools etc To make changes in the dynamic properties i e sizing based on an analog value right click on the object in Configure mode and make any necessary changes in the Property Inspector If the dynamic properties are too difficult to change in this way you can select the object by clicking on it until you see red handles then from the menu bar click on Edit gt Delete Selected Dynamics You can also do this by right clicking on the object and choosing Delete Dynamics from the pop up menu Now re create the dynamics as you want them OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 21 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Using Irregularly Shaped Borders You can use the drawing tools to create an irregularly shaped object for your tank for example a cut away view which will be re sized based on a real time value in the database To do this create the irregular but enclosed object with
258. igured to limit access to different portions of the database particular displays etc Many other features are available in OpenEnterprise but these are the most common ones used on nearly all systems The OpenEnterprise Server responds to requests for data from the client OpenEnterprise Workstations When the OE Workstation requests the data the OE Server looks for the requested data in the OE Database and then responds by sending back the requested data 1 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise How does the Database work A cell of the table This particular table has 36 cells We ve been using the term Database a lot but we never really said what a database IS Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Column 7 Column 8 Colui A database in its simplest form 1s Rowt really just a bunch of tables that have some pre defined interrelationship Row 2 When we say tables we re referring to a grid of rows and columns like in a spreadsheet program Row 3 Row 4 The intersection of a row and column is called a cell and contained within the cell is a single piece of data called a value It could be a numerical value a string of text a Boolean ON OFF value etc When we talk about the interrelationships between tables we mean that certain information in one table references other data in yet another tabl
259. il True False False True C Program File Report S C Program Fil srtrdb1 True False False True C Program File Scheduler C Program Fil rtrdb1 True False False True C Program File Stand Alone Unknown Congratulations You ve now got an OE Database and an OE Session up and running To verify that communications are operating properly you can now connect to the OE Database using the Database Explorer We ll cover all of that in Chapter 4 3 18 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data ior What is the Database Explorer Well we ve talked about building the database now let s talk about how to find out what s in the database Database Explorer is a tool that runs on the OE Workstation and OE Server Typically you would use the Database Explorer during system configuration and debugging activities It allows you to Examine the hierarchical structure of the OE Database including tables attributes and something we haven t talked about much yet called views View the contents of the OE Database using the integrated Database Object Viewer The contents include all of the actual data objects in the database e g signals configuration data etc Establish live data points by dragging OPC Tags from the database onto a graphical mimic display created with the OE Graphics package This allows real time process data or any other information contained in the
260. iles will Fed From Dataset Description Collect Data When Triggered By Column be stored This is a read only field If it shows the word Raw which is the case for this example it means that the data comes directly from the source table If instead a textual description appears in this field or a description showing the rate start time and period appears it means that the current dataset you are configuring receives data from this other dataset This is used to enter an optional textual description of this dataset If this dataset will be used as the source for another dataset the description entered here will appear in the Fed From Dataset field in the Dataset Configuration dialog box when you configure the other dataset When selected this indicates that data should be collected based on a change in the value in the specified column This is called logging by exception This function is only available in a raw dataset but we re not going to use it in this example anyway NOTE This setting CANNOT be modified once the dataset has been saved OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 23 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Collect Data by Polling Every Starting From Keep For At Least When selected this indicates the rate at which data should be collected from the source table of this logging group or from another dataset if the Fed From Dataset field is NOT Raw The units can be S
261. ils pane shows information on the variable being displayed Fy Z 7 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Now let s look at some examples Please follow them in order because the later examples build on information introduced in the earlier ones Before You Begin these Examples e To perform any of the following examples you must be logged on at an OpenEnterprise Workstation which is currently connected to a running OE Database e You must be familiar with how to use Database Explorer and the Database Object Viewer For information on these see Chapter 4 of this manual e In addition you must know the name of the signal s you want to trend e Your OE historical system must have been configured if you want to trend historical data and it must have been running long enough for some data to have been collected that you can trend In addition you must know which historical groups contain the data you want to trend See Chapter 6 for information on historical configuration OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 3 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Example 1 Trending a Real time data value On the OE workstation start the OE Trend Viewer by clicking as shown below Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt Views gt Trends Something called the Trend View Container will appear It s called a container because it will hold the trend information Start Database Explorer and conne
262. in Client and click on the Log out button Alternatively if you are in an OE Desktop window Sere you can click on Security gt Logout Cancel Changing Your Password oer OpenEnterprise Login Client To change your password call up the OpenEnterprise Login Client and click on the Change Password button Usemame PO Password SYSTEM Options Help In the dialog box that appears enter your current password in the Old Password field and enter the new password you have chosen in both the New Password and Confirmation fields and click Click on Change Password on OK OK Change Password El Enter your current User Name SYSTEM pasword here NOTE If you are unable to change your password EAPO due to insufficient security privileges contact your How Password gt Enter the new Administrator Confirmation password in both of these fields Click on OK to exit 10 26 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Common Security Tasks for Administrators Adding a New User to an existing Group Right click on the group into which you want to assign the user then choose New User Just right click on the name of the group you want to P yee shen OMEN POR add the user to and choose New User in Group from SkA a Start the OE Security Configuration Tool 2 Properties DISPATCHERS the pop up menu PERERA New User In Gr
263. individual Y axis displayed for the pen in addition to the common Y axis we didn t do that So we just need to turn off auto scaling for the common Y axis Any changes to common settings for the trend are done in the OE Trend Client Control dialog box To bring up the OE Trend Control Client dialog box you need to switch to Configure Mode by clicking on the Configure item in the menu bar 7 14 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data You must then call up the OE Trend Client Control Properties dialog box by right clicking in the Graph pane and choosing Properties from the pop up menu In Configure Mode right click in the middle of the Graph pane and choose Properties from the pop up menu Untitled OEContainer File View Funtime Help Dah 4 l Hide Details Hide Marker rend Client Configure Kode Maj m Da aenn ee ee ee e e ae annae ae gt F Click on the Graph tab OE Trend Client Control Properties The General page of the OE Trend Client Control Properties dialog box will appear Click on the Graph tab General Settings OE Menus Allow runtime configuration Force Save As a z i C Hide unresolvable penslimits Use sub menu Display Type Optimize For Data O Perfomance Advanced Coox cce C a OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 15 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data OE Trend Client Control Pro
264. ing the Name and Location of Yat Pabati TEE A E E E eet Using the Add Database to Hierarchy Dialog BOX ssssssssssssssssssessssssssssssereessssssseseeeeessssssee AO 3 ae a ee ae weii the EE S A Viewing Son Tables Views sal pease ene erent 6 Database Tree Control WV Wy se jantmtovccssioasveniomnavaassiuane E E RT E SETET E EE 4 7 Database Detail Window Table Detail WindOW vessssssssssssssssssssesssssseccsssessssssssssessssssssssssnene f 8 Attribute Detail Wy Oi sce cais cctnesisesnicunaseniseaanssensdetaientaasunsnenierisassarniuasseesieasasseninnateviiassstaunn N Searching the Database fost A Particular Table Tr A gt 11 Searching the Database for A Particular as out Name w ALI ea the Database for A Primary Key Attribute 0 0 cc cc ecccesssceceessssstceeeeesssssseeee 412 searc hine Tie Database Tor Owied Apes nantes le Viewing the Contents of the Database Using the Datshase Objed VINA PEE re 4 13 arine the Datania UD eot Vie WE en ee ee a ee eee ene eee nee ee vee 4 13 oar Data By Constructing Simple Queries EE a ne Identifying the Table You Want to Query seseeeseeseeeesssssssssssssseeereeessesssssssssssseeseeee 14 Specifying the Attributes You Want to Examine 00008 E AE I 4 15 Specifying Conditions to Limit the Amount of Data Ret Yo our Ee 4 16 Run the Query and View the Results nit 9 Applying Filtering Criteria to Your Query My ogee ca oe l
265. is too high When using Bristol hardware we recommend that alarms be generated at the controller RTU If you are using third party devices that don t support remote alarm generation or if you need to define other special types of alarms the OpenEnterprise Database can generate local alarms Local alarm configuration is handled via the Alarm Condition Tool item in the OE Toolbox We won t cover local alarm configuration in this manual however it 1s covered in the Alarm Condition Tool section of the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide It might be useful at this point to go over the different types of alarms What are the different types of alarms There are three basic types of alarms Analog Alarms These alarms are generated when an analog signal or variable s value exceeds a pre defined alarm limit A return to normal message is generated when the signal or variable s value returns to within the pre defined limit There are four different alarm limits that can be configured in Bristol controllers low low low high and high high OpenEnterprise for Beginners 8 1 Analog alarms are used for variables that measure things like flows temperatures pressures equipment run times Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms Deadbands can be established around the analog alarm limits so that the value can fluctuate slightly near the alarm limit without constantly going into and out of an alarm state and there
266. ise the system would be attempting to save the entire log file at the same time it is receiving a new log buffer of data We recommend that you perform the archiving at from 70 to 90 of a full log file Alternatively the Historical Configuration Tool lets you specify that archive files be generated at a particular time of day week etc These are called timed archives Enough talk let s show some examples OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 1 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Example 1 Logging 1 minute data for a few signals Let s say we have three flow meters connected to our controller and we want to log the current flow readings every minute Let s also say since we want to keep this example somewhat simple for illustration purposes that we want to log only the three flow signals associated with those flow meters Step 1 Start the OE Toolbox To start the OE Toolbox click as follows Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt Toolbox Step 2 Start the Historical Configuration Tool ae To start the Historical Configuration Tool double click on the Historian icon igi in the OE Toolbox window The Historical Configuration dialog box will Ese iE appear NOTE If you do not see the Historian icon you may have not logged on with sufficient security privileges Click on Security Login and log on with appropriate security privileges Ask your System Manager for help if you are unable to
267. isted in the Table Detail Window If you double click on a listed table its location in the hierarchy will be displayed in the Database Tree Control Window and the attributes columns associated with the table will be displayed in the Attribute Detail Window Searching the Database for A Particular Attribute Column Name A database can include hundreds of different tables and a particular table can include hundreds of different attributes which we ve said before are column names Sometimes you may not remember which table holds a particular attribute and you might not remember the exact name of the attribute to solve this problem you can use the Search for Attribute dialog box To search through the tree hierarchy for a particular attribute click on the database s icon in the hierarchy presented in the Database Tree Control Window then press the right mouse button Choose Search For Attribute from the pop up menu and the Search for Attribute dialog box will appear Enter the attribute name you are looking for or enter the first few characters of its name followed by a wildcard character then click on the OK push button Search for Attribute Enter the name of the attribute below value Cancel Help OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 11 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Tables with the specified attribute or matching the partial name and wildcard will be listed in the Table Detail
268. ith Historical Data e We want to collect the data by polling and we need to specify the polling rate at 60 seconds or I minutes because we are logging data every minute and we start it from the current time and date e We want to keep an entire day of 1 minute data in the Log File so Keep for at least must be 1 days or 24 hours or 1440 minutes or 86400 seconds The choice of units is up to you they all equal day e Maximum Unsaved Data should be set to 1 hour or so That means the log buffer contents which are in RAM memory and so could be lost in a power failure will be emptied into the Log File on disk every hour We re collecting the data every minute so choose Enter a textual 60 seconds or 1 minutes oe here here OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration Dataset Configuration Archive Configuration a Fed From Dataset L o e Description Flow Dza jin minute samples Collect Data by Polling For minute data Every 60 Seconds iv you can just choose Starting From 9 13 12 48 5731 2007 J UTC the current time Collect Data When Triggered For 1 minute data Keep For At Least Days v we want to keep an Maximum Unsaved Data Hous M enti re day s WO rth Log Directory C History LogFiles We want to write the log buffer s contents to disk every hour Specify the location where the log file will be stored When youre fi
269. ither ON to OFF TRUE e are generated to FALSE or OFF to ON FALSE to TRUE causes an whenever the logical alarm to be generated state of the variable changes You might want to use a change of state alarm if you had a critical process and you always wanted to know when the e return to normal only process started and when it stopped An everyday real occurs when the world example of a change of state alarm is the bell you alarm has been hear when you open and close the door at the entrance of a acknowledged by the store or shop The storekeeper has that bell so that they operator know whenever the door is opened or closed Because there is no normal state for these alarms a return to normal message is only generated when the alarm has been acknowledged by the operator Where can I get more information on configuring alarms For Network 3000 users a general discussion of alarm concepts is included in An Introduction to ACCOL document D4056 Information on configuring those alarms in ACCOL Workbench is included in the ACCOL Workbench User Manual document D4051 For ControlWave users see the ControlWave Designer Programmer s Handbook document D5125 Also see the ControlWave Designer online help for the individual alarm function blocks You should also review the alarm configuration information in the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide Of particular interest is the Alarm Condition Tool section which describes
270. key to complete the name T aae Type the name ol ma DISPATCHERS the Group User Properties dialog fa ENNER the user in the box box will appear aisan and press the Enter key You can now customize the information for that user such as their name etc All of the privileges are pre defined because we added the user directly into the group we defined earlier Enter text in these fields to describe the user When you click on OK to exit the Group EEEn User Properties dialog box an icon will have i 222 ee ES been created for that user User Settings Famjpietaton Select this User Name _ Change Password At Next Logga ON LY if this Full Name Robert Johnson C User Canngt Grafige Password user iS the Repeat this for each additional user For our Descipion SCADA System Managed Sistem Administrator System fictitious plant staff that means we would bugis ae a Administrator Verify Password vecount LockOut create FRED and VIJAY in the Engineers SEE Fp sini group and TOM JIM ANDY and DONNA Group in the OPERATORS group Parght Group ADMINISTRATORS x Notice that Load OEP Fil Dupin the group is already defined because we added the user under the group name Y ogout Enter the initial password for the user in the Password field then enter it again in the Verify Password field 10 16 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10
271. king on Configure will switch you into Configure Mode vy Seaside _PS OpenEnterprise by Bristol File Edit View Format Arrange Draw Dynamics Tools Configure Mode is for building the display You can t see any live data in Configure Mode Runtime Mode is for running viewing the display with live data 2 g kii amp B A 9 a A ca to amp SQV FAC Qe arial j B Z ule eA area ea Emergency RTU AC Eye Wash In Use Fail Chemical Tank Air Compress Pump Ho 1 Pump Ho 2 E Test Low Level Failure Status Status C Grinde Main Sewage Coommon legal Ent a SF Pumps Fail Problem g TY Low Pressure Wet Well Wet Well Hazardous Utility foi sd High Level Low Level Gas pk Power Failure stata Level WetWell 1222 2Magd bs o D o g A oy fy f O Generator Bannieg Start Stop Reset d a 1 Pump 2 aT conning Start Start Stop Reset i 2 Start fr O 2 53Build56 f Opentnterprise Y Seaside_PS OpenEn 5 10 5 Effluent s 2Mgd REVISED 02JUL2001 MS ee oe OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Examples of Creating Various Display Objects The examples which follow should generally be performed in consecutive order since most examples build on the information presented in the previous examples Each of the examples assume you have successfully connected to your running Database via Database Explorer and tha
272. l Apply Help Now choose RED for the Fill Color in the Apply Change to part of the dialog box Then choose Change Color on True because we want the pump to appear in RED when it was ON If we had wanted it to appear in RED when the associated signal was OFF we would have chose Change Color on False Finally click on OK Step 6 Switch to Runtime Mode and verify that the pump changes color based on its status OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 35 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Variations on Example 6 Showing RUNNING or STOPPED next to the pump based on its status In the example we just completed all we do is show that the pump is running by changing the pump s color What if your operator is color blind In a real world example you probably would also want to show a label RUNNING next to it and a STOPPED label next to it when it was stopped This ensures there is no confusion about what a particular color indicates You could do that using the techniques described in Example 5 Displaying A Message Based on A Logical Value in the Database Allowing the Operator to Call Up Another Display by clicking on the pump symbol IMPORTANT Be sure you save your current display before you try this By default the left mouse button is used when clicking Property Inspector Select the pump we have already Symbol Pick configured t
273. l Data Type of Description Data Type Example input s Result stored for example calculation required in source calculation table column 15 ON percent Percentage time a ON 60 seconds BOOLEAN was ON OFF 60 seconds ON 60 seconds OFF 60 seconds 16 duration Duration of time a non 5 1 60 seconds 3 2 NULL value was in the 60 seconds source table 2 8 60 seconds NULL 60 seconds 20 occurrence Time at which the value time of the sourcecolumn attribute was logged in this compression period 6 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Specifying characteristics of the log file and archive files e Historical data is initially transferred from the real time source table and stored in an pre defined area of memory called the log buffer You need to specify the size of the log buffer during configuration NOTE buffer is just another word for memory e When the log buffer becomes full data in the log buffer is automatically copied to the log file on the OE Server hard disk The size of the log file is some multiple of the log buffer size e The log file is a fixed size as new data is logged the oldest data is overwritten To prevent a loss of data therefore data 1s copied from the log file temporary storage to the archive file permanent storage e Configuration of the log buffer log file and archive file is performed by making entries in the oelogdata table
274. l appear Click on the color of your choice for the background then click on the OK push button Click on the color you want to select then click on the OK push button Color Palette The Format pull down menu also has selections for setting the line color line style display properties etc For more details see the GraphWorX32 User Manual 5 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Drawing A Straight Line To draw a straight line click on the Straight Line i Display1 OpenEnterprise by Bristol icon then click in the Fie Edit view Format Arrange Draw Dynamics Tools display where you want the CEA sei A line to begin and drag the Arial vy 10 BU mouse until you reach the To grawa r Then click where you want desired endpoint then straight line l to start the line and drag release the mouse first click on F the mouse to where you want the Straight lt to finish the line To change the line color line icon 4 you must use Format gt Line Color and select the color from the color palette To move the line after it is finished select it and drag it to the desired location Selecting Objects on Displays Edit handle To select an object on a display just click on it A group of eight edit handles will appear around the object The picture at right shows a pump symbol X surrounded by edit handles You c
275. lable for everybody and can t be taken away even when people are assigned to different groups because they still remain in the DEFAULT group If this confuses you pretend you work for a big company with hundreds of employees maybe you really do Let s say everyone in the company might have a badge to let them enter the building that s the DEFAULT In addition certain employees might have special keys that let them enter special areas of the building i e they are members of other groups besides the DEFAULT group No matter what group they may be in everyone also has the privileges of the DEFAULT GROUP because every other group is a sub set of the DEFAULT GROUP ADMINISTRATORS ENGINEERS DEFAULT GROUP 10 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Creating Users and Groups First let s do a little planning Make a list of the people who use our SCADA system and choose a single word username for each person Operator 3 Shift You can see from the table above that we have a staff of seven so we ll need to create seven users Of those seven users we have e One manager Using groups makes it easy to specify e two engineers privileges for multiple users e four operators Otherwise you d have to specify privileges for each user individually Although not required to simplify configuration we re going to assign these users to groups We re g
276. larm on Success Generate Alarm if any Error occurs Configured Alarm Conditions Priority Type Status Value 254 Range 2to 1 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 27 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Step 6 Specify the Format of the Report l Either right click on Formats We re almost done The last thing we have to and choose New Report Format do is specify the file format of the report from the pop up menu or click on Edit gt New Format from the menu bar Report Configuration Tool File Edit Help Repot Configuration 5 13 The Configured Reports 4 Pressure_Report 1 ie ae Templates iH PV Schedules fe Eb Format E gi sare New Report Format The configuration of the format varies depending upon which format you choose Format Configuration General The figure below shows the configuration of a printer Create a Name for the format and optionally enter a Description for the format Format Configuraticn Format Configuration General This page allows the general pr serties of a Report Format to be configured G i General Purging Name FORMATI Recipients Description Main office printer Alarm Conditions Type Printer v Location e and Destination may contain date time and alias values as well as report properties at button to insert date and time and report formatting characters into the File Name and if strings Alias values must
277. le Go View Broject Quid Lat Opine Caras Window 2 218 x SARS 4B Sse RAMA GRR g FIRS NS MWg PAVIA AN ANA AWW VAs 4 eae E nea E x 4 gt f Bum i Errors J Warnings J infos 7 PLC Errors k Print p Any variable which is to appear in the OE Database Pa must also have OPC selected x Specifying an RBE variable in a ControlWave Project To designate a variable for RBE collection in a ControlWave project you must run the Variable Extension Wizard in ControlWave Designer and check the RBE check box for each variable you want collected via RBE For non BOOL variables REAL INT etc you would also specify a deadband The resulting _RBE INI file will be downloaded to the ControlWave with the bootproject You must also configure the RBE function block and configure appropriate RBE system variables depending upon whether RBE is running on a serial or IP port For details on all these subjects please see the online help in ControlWave Designer 2 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE Making Sure You Have the Correct Resource Settings in ControlWave Designer Any variable in your ControlWave project which you want to be included in the OE Database must have its OPC parameter check box set as described in the Specifying a Global Variable in a ControlWave Project section In addition you must specify in the Resource Settings dialog box which OPC variab
278. ledging Alarms This example assumes you have the Alarm Viewer up and it currently has active alarms in it See Example I for help on setting up the Alarm View To acknowledge an alarm e Right click on the alarm that you want to acknowledge e Choose Acknowledge from the pop up menu e If the alarm has also returned to normal it will be removed from the Alarm View Right click on the alarm you want to acknowledge then click on Acknowledge in the pop up menu 7 Untitled OEContainer File View Configure Help Dsg 2 id description name alarmtext x occurencetime questionable COMMUN ICATIONS STATUS CW7 CW7 CW70 KAY 11 JUN 2007 08 57 00 077 FALSE 1 VERSION MISMATCH CW7 al MUSMATOH CLEARED 07 JUN 2007 13 24 58 253 FALSE Acknowledge Suppression Acknowledge All Suppression All gt Timed Mute Refresh Resize Columns Export Data Print To acknowledge ALL the alarms in this Alarm Viewer e Right click on one of the alarms that you want to acknowledge e Choose Acknowledge All from the pop up menu e You will be prompted to confirm that you want to acknowledge all alarms Click on Yes and all alarms in this Alarm Viewer either visible or which you can scroll to will be acknowledged Any alarms that have also returned to normal cleared will be removed from the Alarm Viewer 8 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Ma
279. les will be collected e Generally you should choose Marked variables so that only those variables which you have explicitly marked for OPC collection will be included in the OE Database e If you want all global variables to be part of the OE Database choose All global variables which automatically marks all global variables for OPC collection Compiling and Downloading the ControlWave Project e You must then compile the ControlWave project Click on Build gt Make or click on the Make icon Resource settings for IPC_40 m Port C COM1 C COM2 C COM3 C COM4 Simulation 1 Simulation 2 DLL DLL Parameter com 9600 2000 Baud 19200 z topbits 1 v Cancel tabits E ossaa Panty None k Timeout 2000 iis Help l Stack check on PLC M Array boundary check on PLC MV Force BOOLS for boolean variables MV Generate bootproject during compile PDD All global variables M Marked variables OPC All global variables M Marked variables Use reserve AllPOUs C Marked POUs No reserve select the Marked variables option e When the ControlWave project has been compiled successfully you must download it into the ControlWave controller Please heed the warning about downloading on page 2 6 For details on performing a download into the ControlWave see the Downloading section of
280. lick on the Symbol Library icon shown at left and the Symbol Library will be Click on the category of symbols you want to look at and the available symbols in that category will appear When you see a symbol you want to use drag it from the symbol library into your display Click on the category you want to choose from and its associated symbols will be displayed Display1 OpenEnterprise by Bristol a eHh S BBR A 2 Ai p p gt a a o l fi 3 D ISA Tanks sdf E 2 a E A E E E gt ra E fa a tC Next drag the symbol you want into your display EHEHEH ETET fl CCT ME m lE RT FHE Oe ea oaeaale ean lt fa SOP Bad Po ul mOOr s Object Name Tank Object Dimensions L 47 T 163 W 45 H 75 K 5 24 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Example 4 Creating A Sliding Setpoint Control With Which the Operator Can Update a Value in the Database amp RTU NOTE Beginning with this example we assume that you are familiar enough with the general display building process to know that you must run a query with the Database Object Viewer leave it active while you call up your display drag it into the data source field of the Property Inspector etc These items will no longer be listed as steps in the example because their inclusion is implied In addition by this example we assume tha
281. line and inaccessible each Logging Group Archive files marked with a blue check mark are online If the online archive file has a small A below it that means that it was brought online automatically by the system 6 52 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Bringing an Offline Archive File Online First choose the Archive File you want to bring online In the Archive Catalog Offline archive file names are preceded with a red X In the Archive File Tool click on the name of the Archive File that you want to bring online then click on the Bring Online button Archive File Tool X O4JUN 2007 01 09 54 to 04 JUN 2007 02 07 54 X O4JUN 2007 02 07 54 to 04 JUN 2007 03 08 54 X 04JUN 2007 03 08 54 to 04 JUN 2007 04 09 54 XX 04 JUN 2007 04 09 54 to 04 JUN 2007 05 07 54 A 04 JUN 2007 05 07 54 to 04 JUN 2007 06 08 54 pag 04 JUN 2007 06 08 54 to 04 JUN 2007 07 05 54 X 04JUN 2007 07 05 54 to 04 JUN 2007 08 07 54 X 04JUN 2007 08 07 54 to 04 JUN 2007 09 08 54 X 04JUN 2007 09 08 54 to 04 JUN 2007 10 05 54 9 Flow Data 1 minute samples Os Flow Data 1 minute samples SJ 3600s Flow Data Hourly Calculations Gh 31 MAY 2007 09 01 00 to 01 JUN 2007 08 01 00 vA 31 MAY 2007 09 01 00 to 01 JUN 2007 08 01 00 B a 86400s Flow Data Daily calculations a 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 to 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 Wh 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 to 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 gt Bri
282. line appear starting from the right hand side of the window If desired you could drag the value s for additional signals in and each will have its own pen in this trend We recommend you don t try to have more than 3 or 4 pens on a single trend though because too many pens will make it confusing for the user Notice that the range of values on the Y axis is determined based on the lowest and highest values of the signal being trended OF Trend View Container File yew Configure Help D in E Double arrows at each end of scroll bar can call up additional al p20 2 RR E SR RRRRRRAK SA ih for Graph pane lt a I gt Ae Details about the signal being trended are Scroll bar for displayed in the Detail pane Detail pane You can add additional pens to this trend by the same method We recommend though that you don t try to have more than 3 or 4 pens in the same trend or else the trend will be confusing for the user OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 5 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Before we go on to another example Let s notice a few things about the Trend Viewer Each Trace has its For one thing you should see that the most recent Own Color value for the signal would also be displayed on the line for that pen in the Detail pane Each pen in the trend has a line of information in the If you have multiple pens in the trend in this case we Detail pane The color shown don t you can match up t
283. lock_table 4 aop F adminuser alarmrecipient 2 abrealanalog accessarea n accessareaconfig Tables which accessareacontighorusel make up this B adminuser alarmcondition database alarmcondition_table Tables 280 alarmconditionlookup alarmconditionlookup_ta alarrminhibitalarmconditic alarminhibitstatealarmco alarmrmailFormat alarmpagingformat alarmpagingrecipient ne Peers LL gt Use scroll bar to bring additional table names into view OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 7 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Database Detail Window Table Detail Window The Database Detail Window and Table Detail Window alternately occupy the upper right hand corner of the Database Explorer s main screen Which of the two windows is visible depends upon selections made in the Database Tree Control Window The Database Detail Window displays the names of all databases whenever All Databases has been selected in the Database Tree Control Window The format of the window can vary see Changing the Appearance of Detail Windows When All Databases is selected in the Tree Control Window all of the databases will appear in the Database Detail Window Vatabase Explorer File Wiew Options Window Help Ex ada web rtrdb1 F El Pa P All Databases A Imdb scada web rtrdbl mydb1 F rmydbz mydb J 2 scada web rtrdb1 Ce l ahramnles The
284. log values visible on the screen Now call up the spreadsheet you want to add live data to in Excel FEET 3 Tank 1 Level 4 Tank 2 Level 5 Tank 3 Level 6 Tank 4 Level Step 6 Change the Default Tag Format in the Database Object Viewer to DDE The Database Object Viewer is most frequently used to export OPC tags therefore that is the default export tag format it uses To export DDE links you must change the export format to DDE Click on Options gt Tag Format gt DDE Step 7 Drag the data from the Database Object Viewer to the Appropriate Cell in the Spreadsheet Drag the value from the Database Object Viewer window to the cell in the spreadsheet where you would like the data to be displayed This establishes the DDE link Repeat as necessary to bring additional data into the spreadsheet Drag the value from the Database Object Viewer to the appropriate cell in the spreadsheet Database Object Yiewer Ed Microsoft Excel TANK_LE ELS XLS i 5 x Options Quek Help B File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Web l x 3 Deme ezan wo ma gt ii A a a N204 SS100T LEVEL SP 1 TANK FARM B BRIGHTON HILLS CURRE AME FLOW RATES D204 55100T1 LEVEL C Er FEET D204 55100T1 LEVEL HHL 20 FEET 3 Tank 1 Level D204 55100T2 LEWEL o FEET 7 D204 SS100T2 LEVEL HHL 20 FEET 4 Tank 2 Level b204 55100T3 LEVEL o FEET 5 Tank 3 Level D204 55100T3 LEVEL HHL 20 FEET amp
285. m a particular your process variables change instant in time however is only maintained in historical data is not updated it memory for a short period of time usually no reflects past conditions from longer than a few seconds depending upon how fast minutes hours days weeks or data is collected in your system This is because months in the past when a new value is collected it automatically overwrites the previous value in the database Although this is ideal for operators viewing the current state of process variables in your system most users need to retain certain data for a longer period of time hours weeks months etc This data is referred to as historical data and it is saved using the OpenEnterprise Historian What is Historical Data Used For What does ODBC compliant Historical data is typically used in printed reports mean or spreadsheets Often records of certain variables such as flow temperature etc must be ODBC is an industry standard for maintained for months or even years to fulfill particular plant management or regulatory requirements Government agencies may require detailed records using historical data or historical data may be used to generate bills for customers databases It stands for Open Database Connectivity which means that data can be shared between different databases and applications ODBC compliant refers to applications which follow this industry standard Because the OE
286. make any changes in the Condition box If you want to change any of the conditions you have entered click on the condition in the Conditions list box then click on the Edit push button and edit the condition line as desired then click on the Update push button When you have finished specifying any conditions you would like to apply you can run your query Essentially when expressed as boolean logic the conditions are all ANDed together 4 18 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Run the Query and View the Results w If you want the results of this query to be regularly refreshed as data changes in the database click on the Active Query icon shown at left or click on Options gt Active Query NOTE If you do not do this data in the query will not be updated as it changes fa If you did NOT specify any conditions on the Conditions page by default you will receive a warning message the warning is intended to remind you that your query could potentially result in a very large amount of data being collected what we call the KILLER QUERY You can ignore the message and click on Yes if you are unconcerned about the size of the query or click on No to revise the query before running it NOTE These warning messages may be suppressed by checking the Auto run without conditions item on the Conditions page OpenEnterprise fo
287. mber of objects changed since query issued OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data Applying Filtering Criteria to Your Query The Filters page allows you filter the list of available attributes shown on the Attributes page A description of the various filtering criteria is included below am T E Database Object Viewer File Options Query Help 7 et TITE 2 RN Tables Conditions Parameters Joins Attributes SQL Filter Time Zone Objects Attributes with the selected characteristics Will be available for inclusion in the query String Primary Key Nullable Bool Foreign kep Not Hullable Integer Hot Kep Persistent Real Mot Persistent Time Date Hidden Not Hidden Active query Tumming Objects 628 Items that are checked are included in the list of Available Attributes String Attributes in the table that store string data such as signal names operator names descriptors etc Bool Attributes in the table that store TRUE FALSE data such as logical signal values the values of manual control and alarm inhibit enable flags etc Integer Attributes in the table that store integer data such as counts ID numbers etc Real Attributes in the table that store floating point data such as analog signal values Time Date Attributes in the table that store date and time information such as timestamps Primary Key Attributes in the table that are part
288. mes of the table By default the standard tables in OpenEnterprise have a suffix of _table at the end of their names for example the alarmsummary_table Database Explorer also allows you to look at views Views are essentially a restricted look into some portion of a table or set of tables Views do not have the suffix _table Views are sometimes used for security purposes because they restrict which parts of a table or tables a user can access or change and for convenience reasons because they prevent you being overloaded with more information than you really need to see Database Explorer s main screen is divided into 3 separate windows each of which displays different information about the connected database If the icon for the database is a red box witha diagonal line through it there has never been a connection to this database If the icon for the database is a red box with no diagonal line the connection has been lost possibly due to the database being shut down Database Detail Window or the Table Detail Window Eok EELER Explorer File View Options Window Help scada web rtrdb1 X A g All Databases rtrdb1 rtrdb1 7 scada web rtrdb1 7 scada web rtrdb1 Click on to see tables in this database If the icon for the database is a green box a connection is active Connect the selected database CAP Database Tree Control Window Attribute Detail Window 4 6
289. minute samples Os Flow Data 1 minute samples ap p ear 3600s Flow Data Hourly Calculations i Wa 31 MAY 2007 09 01 00 to 01 JUN 2007 08 01 00 va 31 MAY 2007 09 01 00 to 01 JUN 2007 08 01 00 86400s Flow Data Daily calculations Wa 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 to 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 Wa 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 to 31 MAY 2007 00 15 00 The Archive File Import dialog box will show a list of all archive files in the Online Archive folder which do not currently exist in the Archive Catalog tree 6 54 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Select the file you want to add into the Archive Catalog Archive File Import If you want the file s brought online automatically once they are added to the catalog make sure you select the Keep files online after they are imported box Online Directory C History4rchFiles You can now add the files into the catalog by selecting the SS8Siaisisetr vicar oss file s you want to add and clicking on OK Any files St WT MOD Site Lace you selected will be added to the Archive Catalog tree If you didn t specify that they should be kept online after import you should proceed to bring them online when you need them See Bringing an Offline Archive File Online earlier in this chapter for details _ Keep files online after they are imported y me Oh z me Click on OK Interpreting What the Archive Filenames Mean In
290. mmand ROLLBACK to have the same effect without ending the session NOTE The SELECT command doesn t need a COMMIT because it just reads data from the OE Database it doesn t change the data add new data or remove data EXIT command The EXIT command is pretty straightforward It lets you shut down the SQL Client thereby ending your current session with the OE Database The OE Database itself is still running you just aren t communicating with it through the SQL Client A 16 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users INCLUDE Command and SQL Script Files What Are They Hopefully after reviewing these examples you can see that SQL is a pretty powerful language and a great way to extract information from the OE Database These examples have covered the basic stuff that you will need to know If you actually tried out the commands with a real OE Database you might have noticed that typing in all these commands can be tedious For that reason we strongly recommend you make use of SQL script files wherever possible OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 17 Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users SQL script files are simply text files which include sequences of SQL commands For example we could have typed some of our SQL commands into a text file in a text editor such as Notepad Here we used some of our UPDATE commands and saved them in a file named m
291. mn and the value columns are usually the same readvalue contains the last value read from the RTU the value column contains the last value read from the RTU or written by the operator The difference only occurs when the operator has changed the signal s value and the changed value hasn t yet been read back from the RTU either because the change wasn t accepted manually inhibited signal at RTU or communications were interrupted 6 34 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Step 3 Rename Columns OPTIONAL If desired you can rename fields If desired you can specify new names ekine for columns in the log file When Logged Fields finished click on Next gt Compress Data Access Column questionable readvalue alarminhibit alarminhibit controlinhibit controlinhibit manualinhibit manualinhibit Click on Next gt when finished Step 4 Define the Dataset Click on Add Click on Add to add a new dataset Long Group Define Datasets Daliri counted hor chen dala oll be logged and beer long dala el be he oo Ai foe ese recurs cee eles ber doer cay eee ale he ree dates con Dae feed one sed datasets In the OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration eee dialog box select the Collect Data When Triggered button and choose By Column and Readvalue This means that data will only be collected when the Readvalue column for a signal changes LC Ce
292. mplete an Archive file would be generated In other words every 18 hours an archive file will be generated This specifies the number of archives that the system will automatically maintain on line This number differs from the Maximum Online Archives number because it does not encompass previously off line archives brought on line manually using the Archive File Tool Archive files provide permanent storage but must be on line in order to be accessible to the database This value specifies the default maximum number of Archive files which should be kept accessible to the database including both those kept on line automatically as well as others that have been brought on line using the Archive File Tool NOTE Once an Archive is no longer on line it can be manually restored to make it accessible again When checked this stores index information about archive files We recommend you check this because it helps in archive file management and makes it easier to retrieve archive files later in the Archive File Tool When finished with this dialog box click on the OK push button Then click on the Next gt push button to go to the next page OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 27 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data The Logging Group Define Datasets page will re appear with the new dataset shown in a tree structure Click on Next gt The dataset has been added to a tree structure Logging Group Define Dat
293. n click on Finish You can optionally choose to have alarms generated if there are problems with the report generation process Click on Finish to complete the format configuration Format Configuration Format Cynfiguration Alarm Conditions This page alls OpenEnterprise Alarm Conditions to be defined for the Report Format Alarm Conditions Please select one or more of the standard alarm conditions listed below or create your own user defyhed alarm conditions as required Generate Alarm on Success Configured Alarm Conditions Priority Type Status Value 254 Range 2to 1 Congratulations You ve now created a report it s got a schedule and you ve defined where the report will be sent In addition since you ve created the report in pieces 1 e the report template the formats the recipients etc you can quickly create additional reports These individual pieces serve as building blocks which will simplify any other reports you create 11 32 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users Do I really need to learn SQL to use OE Probably not Earlier versions of OpenEnterprise required that even the most basic system configuration be performed using SQL commands Now OpenEnterprise has many user friendly configuration tools available through the OE Toolbox that simplify configuration and don t require you to use SQL Because of this you don t really nee
294. n the OpenEnterprise Schema Reference Manual and read about the Realanalog table and with a little study and page turning you would have found all the different attributes for that table A 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users Say you don t want to do that though because you don t have a manual nearby you could do what we do in Example 3 Example 3 If you know that the data you are looking for is in a particular table but you can t remember the name of the attribute you could look in another table called the Attributes table Yep that s right there s a table that shows the names of all the attributes in all the other tables SQL gt select name from attributes where table_name realanalog name devicename regionname datumaddress scheduleid status disable timestamp forcepoll forcewrite private timestampdstoffset description olantarea accessarea calloutarea display calloutdisplay questionable acknowledged cleared suppressiongroup manualinhibit controlinhibit alarminhibit currentalarmprecedence printer updatemask changemask readchangemask readtrigger dataset lastdataset timezone dstoffset hasnotes totalnotes base extension Tattribute occurrencetime resetalarmstatistics occurrencetimedstoffset currentdstoffset writeoverride locked lo
295. n time for the individual pen s X axis If you want to specify a different start time further in the past than that calculated above Leave the Use time period relative to Current Workstation time box de selected and select the Override Global Time Settings box Once you have defined the period of time choose the starting time for the trend in the Start field You can type in the hours and minutes directly or use the control to select them If you are specifying a different date you can type it in directly or click on the control to bring up a calendar for you to choose the correct date OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 29 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Example 4 Having a Trace Change Color when data is questionable This example assumes you are pretty familiar with modifying pens see Example 2 and using the HDA Tag Browser see Example 3 If data being collected is marked questionable i e there is doubt about it being good data you may want the trace for that data to indicate the questionable status somehow Let s say we want to have a trace appear in yellow if its value is questionable To do that we need to use the Expression Editor Click on the Styles button Pen Configuration Data Ranges Limits Styles First select the desired pen and call up the Pen Configuration dialog box Then from the Styles page of the Pen Configuration dialog box click on the Styles button Click
296. nEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users Custom SQL Files Can be Very Useful Now that we ve sold you on the idea of using script files we hope anyway we want to strongly recommend that when you do you only call those script files from within the Bristol Custom Files The Bristol Custom Files are a set of SQL script files which are used on all customer projects They are used for setting up REMEMBER various OE features such as the historical system the security system etc So if you have SQL statements you want to perform If you re creating on a particular part of the OE system find the appropriate your own scripts custom file and call your SQL script file from within that file call them from within This ensures that if need to see which SQL commands were the Bristol Custom executed on the OE Database you can find the file If you don t Files include a reference in the custom file you might not remember the name of your own script file and then you re out of luck The details of the custom files are beyond the scope of this manual however if you used the Database Project Builder discussed in Chapter 3 to build the database these custom files were created for you automatically A special batch file called OERebuild CMD can be used to rebuild your database to its initial state using these custom files You should only use this though if you ve kept the custom files u
297. nEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Setting Pens to Trend Historical Data by Default a To have pens display historical data by default check this If desired you can specify that all new pens should trend Pee nGiorttcrm ation historical data by default This would allow you to drag a poss see umts syes historical pen into the graph pane just like the real time Data Source pens we discussed earlier Device To do this select the default pen and click on the saul a Modify button Name E Description e In the Pen Configuration dialog box check the Convert dm ee ae Realtime Data Sources to Historical box and click on OK Click on Yes if you want From now on when you drag a value into the to trend historical data graph pane from the Database Object Viewer bereitiient you will be prompted to confirm whether you 3 Do you want to plot historical data for the following tag want it to display as historical data Click on Yes if you want to trend historical data BristolBabcock BristolOPCServer rtrdb 17 realanalog name char CW7 GV R1_DP_LIVE value float From the Sample Rate list box select the dataset containing the data In order for the pen to display the historical data you need you are interested in to identify for it which dataset should be chosen for example 1 minute hourly daily etc
298. nage Alarms What is the difference between an alarm being cleared and an alarm being acknowledged These are two very different things If an alarm is cleared it means that the condition that caused the alarm no longer exists For example if the alarm was generated because a temperature went too high but then the temperature returned to the normal range then the alarm is cleared Just because an alarm has cleared though doesn t mean that the alarm will be removed from the Alarm View That s where the concept of alarm acknowledgement comes in In order for an alarm to be removed from the Alarm View it must have been cleared and it must have been acknowledged Acknowledgement means that the operator must have recognized the existence of the alarm This is required because you don t want an alarm condition occurring then returning to normal without anyone knowing about it because it could mean something serious is occurring in your plant or process NOTE If desired the system can be configured to automatically acknowledge alarms of lesser importance without operator intervention All my alarms have the wrong timestamp on them What s wrong Check the OE Alarm Client Properties dialog box Time Zone page Make sure you have selected the correct time zone OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 9 Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms Example 3 Changing the Attributes Displayed in the Alarm Viewer T
299. nals variables from your controllers RTUs If your network of controllers is configured and communicating you can now import this information To do this click on the Import Signal Data box and then click on the Import button Click on Import Signal Data then click on the Import button i Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Natabase Project Builder Signal Data Import Signal Data Click this button to import Signal data A default set of Time Classes for data collecton will be created ne if you have a low bandwidth network you may need to tune data Database Size collection later by using the NWw3000 Setup tool in Toolbox Historical Data Session Finish Depending upon whether Open BSI is 1 Build Database from ACCOL running you may be prompted to select for orl Neme cus OpenEnterprise the NETDEF file used for ee your network of controllers Pater E Force Init of Descriptors Areas _ The Database Project Builder will start a peuse nk separate program called the Database Builder Controlw ave program DBB DBB collects all signals that Auto Resolve MSDs _ ACCOL Names are alarms RBE signals or have been marked Signals Remote Resolves as global signals and includes their names in Inserted Signals the OE Database Removed Modified This process may take several minutes Processing depending upon how many signals need to be mtn Henn ene ATU Cw Status collected and
300. name serves as a primary key or index for the rest of the data in the table For this example we need to specify name because that will allow us to use the signal names from the realanalog_table for organizing the data is a read only field provided for informational purposes It identifies the table that will be used when queries are made to the tables containing raw historical data is a read only field provided for informational purposes It identifies the table that will be used when queries are made to the tables containing compressed historical data This 1s the number of records rows in the source table that will be logged When collecting signal data this would refer to the number of signals in the source table to be logged By estimating this number the Historian can determine how much disk space to allocate for historical storage Since we want to size our system for 300 signals we enter 300 here NOTE Although you must provide an estimated number of objects in order to fully configure the Historian it will compensate if you OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 15 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Enabled Log All Objects Advanced underestimate the number of objects by generating archive files at a faster rate When checked activates logging for this logging group Because certain characteristics of a logging group CANNOT be modified once they have been initially specified it is sometimes easier to
301. nch ccccccccccceessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 Specifying an RBE Signal in an ACCOL Load seeesssssssseeeressssssssecressssssssecrresssssssees 2 6 Saving Compiling and Downloading the ACCOL Load sciccicssscsisoiiicissdsssasisdeaiecsiiasenziats 2 6 Preparing a ControlWave Project to work with OE sssssssssssssssseersssssscerrssssssssseerrsssssssees 2 7 Specifying an Alarm Variable in a ControlWave POC BC iiransicscacrntccrrciaiteerexivedanennteceianers 2 7 Specifying a Global Variable in a ControlWave Project isocivsststsviniscarertassersmenioranieewanee 2 8 Making Sure You Have the Correct Resource Settings in ControlWave Designer 2 9 Compiling and Downloading the ControlWave Project ccccccccsssseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 2 9 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database ssssccccccsssssssssssscccccscsssssssssccossees 3 1 Things you have to do before you start building the OE Database i eeeeeeeeceeeeeeees 3 1 Your hardware must have been set up ssssssssosersssssssseerssssssssceerrsssssssscerrssssssseeerrssesss 3 1 Backup Your OpenEnterprise Server UPGRADES RE BUILDS ONLY 000 3 1 Install Open BSI and configure the Open BSI Network nesssssseesenessssssseressssssssseeeess 3 2 Verify that communications are possible to RTUS via DataView ccccccssseeeeeeeeees 3 2 Install OpenEnterprise Server software on the Server Compule ccccss
302. nd name and ends with a semicolon lt Ifyou leave out the semicolon the SQL Client will interpret anything you type after that as also being part of the command When you re finished with a command you would press the Enter key on your keyboard A 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users LOGIN command Because you don t want unauthorized persons connecting to the OE Database and extracting your company s data the OE Database is protected by a security system To gain access to the database users must supply a valid username and password The basic syntax of the LOGIN command is LOGIN username where username is replaced with the name of a valid OE user a user is just a person who has been given permission to use OE or some part of it Once the username is entered the user will be prompted to enter a password In the picture shown at right we show a login The username command being entered in the SQL Client In E this picture the username is SYSTEM and the AG e ord i password hasn t been entered yet The IN aNSWer tO Ine Promp SYSTEM user is defined for every OE Server File Edit View Help S n tls F ag lil i I se ee ee ee 5S D d D eee NOTE Both the username and password are case sensitive That means that capitalization UPPERCASE and lowercase are important The words Fred FRED and fReD would all be considered differ
303. ne TIMING Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Database Size You need to provide an estimate of the number of Signals the database will contain The database currently contains Analogs 425 Digitals 0 Strings What is the maximum number of signals you expect the database to contain Tip If you do not know how many signals the database will contain it is recommended that you use the values provi Historical Data Estimated number of Analogs Session Estimated number of Digitals Finish Estimated number of Strings OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Configuring Historical Data Collection IMPORTANT For a full discussion of the concepts of historical data collection please refer to Chapter 6 On the Historical Data page you have the option of configuring historical data collection for selected signals you ve added to your OE Database A series of templates are provided to support some of the most common collection schemes If you want to configure historical collection using these templates now click on the Add button If none of the templates meet your needs you could create your own templates however that 1s beyond the scope of this manual To configure historical data click on Add Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Historical Data You may configure your system so that it
304. nfiguration Canfiguration Alarm Conditions ows OpenEnterprise Alarm Conditions to be defined for the Report Alarm Conditions Please select one or more of the standard alarm conditions listed below or create your own user defwnec alarm conditions as required C Generate Alarm on Success Generate Aarm if any Error occurs Configured Alarm Conditions Status Value 11 18 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Step 3 Test the Report Right click on your report and choose Test Report bs Report Configuration Tool File Edit Help E gt Report Configuration 4 The Configured Reports Now that you ve created a report template and a report based on that template it s a good idea to test that the report is actually able to connect 1 eee to the database retrieve data and be 28 Templates jop Py Schedules Delete included in the report file Formats ri Recipients RAN To test the report right click on the Click on Test to begin the testing report name and choose Test Status messages will appear telling Report from the pop up menu The you the progress of the testing When Test Report dialog box will appear the testing is complete click on Close Click on Test and the testing will begin Messages describing the Test Report 1 sing the Test button the selected Report Configurati process of the test will appear When Sp S
305. ng Online EZTI Add Archives Then click on the Bring Online button A message box will appear asking you to confirm that you want to bring this Archive File online Click on Yes The Online Properties dialog box will appear The Online Properties dialog box displays various information about this Archive File including the source table from which the data originated the Logging Group number the name of the Archive File and its associated dataset Os raw samples 3600s hourly etc You can choose how long you want this Archive File to remain online If you choose Indefinitely it will remain online until you manually take it offline If you choose For you can specify that the Archive File should remain online for a certain number or hours and minutes Archive File Tool Jh 1 archive files have been found that match the specified parameters we All of the archive files are offline Do you wish to bring these offline files online now Click on Yes The source table Cnline Properties tealanalog table Control 4 Raw data collection from realanalog table Archive File Dataset 4 Os_20070604071000_3599_ 64 arch Os Keep Online O Indefirjbets Hours o Mins o Secs 6 s2007 y i216 53Pm_ lt Click on OK Choose how long you want to keep this Archive File online If you choose Until you can specify a date and time at which the Archive Fil
306. ng with Historical Data Step 2 Choose the Columns you Want to Log and Specify Compression Options As in the previous examples we choose the columns Remember in this context which we want to log compression doesn t mean file compression It just means to The big difference though is that in this example save the results of calculations we re going to specify some compression options a data not all of the original ata We want to save the minimum maximum and average flow values for the signals in this Logging Group Therefore we need to check the Max Min and Avg boxes for the Value field We also want to know the time that the minimum and maximum occurred so we check the Occurrence Times option as well Choose a field you want to log then click on the Choose Max Min and Avg compression options for the gt gt button Repeat Value field as well as the for each additional field you want to log Logging Group Select Fields Available Fields name occurrencetime occurrencetimedstoffset operator plantarea printer private readchangemask readtrigger readvalue regionname resetalarmstatistics scheduleid status suppress suppressed suppressiongroup timestampdstoffset timezone totalnotes units updatemask valueovenide workstation wrteovemde A Occurrence Times option Helds to be Logged Text Date Fields Column Name Raw
307. nished on the Dataset Configuration page click on the Archive Configuration page 6 42 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data On the Archive Configuration page start by specifying the location where archive files will be stored then specify how many you want to keep online etc OpenEnterprise Historical Configuration Dataset Configuration Archive Configuration Timed Archive ID Description Start Time Repeat Interval Fill in these fields first Archive Directories Ofline Archives C History ArchFiles Boose files and off line archive files will V Offline Archives C History Offine ArchFiles be stored C Alito Archive Em Specify how many of these archive files you want to keep online and accessible Specify the location where archive V Automatically Online Archives 7 aximum Online Archives Specify the maximum number you want Y firchive Cataloguing to allow to be online simultaneously Now click on the Add button to call up the Create New Timed Archive dialog box Now we said we re going to use Timed Archives in this example so click on the Add button to add a new timed archive The Start Time must be in the past In the Create new Timed Archive dialog box we need to specify the Start Time for the archive Think of the start time as the beginning Create new Timed Archive Description Specify how frequently archive
308. nners 8 5 Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms The OE Alarm Client Control Properties dialog box will appear From the Databases tab click on Add OE Alarm Client Control Properties J e Source Data Services Click on the Databases page and then click on the Add button Remove The Add Data Service dialog box will appear e Enter the Data Service for this OE Database and click on OK Add Data Service Data Service ox J Cancel J Heb _ The data service you entered will now be visible in the Databases page of the OE Alarm Client Control Properties dialog box OE Alarm Client Control Properties Source Data Services rttrdb Click on OK to close that dialog box 8 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms File D id 1 Now click on the Runtime item in the menu bar and alarms should be displayed in the window You now have a realtime alarm view Untitled OEContainer TEx N um ber of View Configure Help active alarms cH amp description alarmtext occurencetime questionabletime loggedtime CO MM UNICATIONS STATUS CW7 CW CW7 OKAY 11 JUN 2007 08 57 00 077 FALSE 11 JUN 2007 Og f N VERS ION MISMATCH CW7 CW7 MISMATCH CLEARED 07 JUN 2007 13 24 58 253 FALSE 07 JUN 2007 13 2 um be r of al arms which haven t returned to normal Uncleared Number of unacknowledgeo
309. ntdstoffset value and questionable OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 19 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Text Date Fields Analog Fields Boolean Fields Any source table column name selected from the Available Fields list box which stores timestamps or textual data will appear in this box The compression options available for Text and Date fields include Raw First Last Duration Occurrence Times and Indexing To select a particular compression option go to the line that holds the desired column name then click on the cell underneath the desired compression option The option is selected when it appears checked Because textual data can vary in length you must supply an estimated string length for textual data in the Length column This allows proper sizing of tables in the database and allocation of disk space Since we re using a date field timestamp instead of a text field we don t need to do that Any source table column name selected from the Available Fields list box which stores analog data will appear in this box The compression options are Raw First Last Maximum Max Minimum Min Average Avg Integral Duration Occurrence Times and Indexing To select a particular compression option go to the line which holds the desired column name then click on the cell underneath the desired compression option The option is selected when it appears che
310. nter a textual description of Properties dialog box will appear You can optionally this Access area then click on enter a description of the access area Click on OK OK and the access area will be created and added to the tree Mame Description Centprffle Main Office mS IUM Sj Groups Continue to add new access areas for each access area fy ADMINISTRATORS e lt ie DISPATCHERS you want to create When you re finished the access ENGINEERS 3 ane The Access Areas areas will all appear in the tree in the Security operators NOW appear in the Configuration tool Lana tree Access Sneas ALL CENTERVILLE LARABY WESTON OpenEnterprise Database NOTE At this point all we have done is define names of new ALL Access areas in the OpenEnterprise Database they do NOT have anything in them yet The contents of the Database still reside ONLY in the ALL area We will o CENTERVILLE ie actually assign different parts of the database to the new ee p Access areas next ARABY ee 7 eae WESTON OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 21 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Assigning Objects Data To Particular Access areas Critical elements of the database should be placed in restricted Access areas to prevent unauthorized users from inadvertently or deliberately changing data By default all parts of the database that can be part of Access ar
311. nts D204 PO6RTU4 SELECT D204 PO6RTUS SELECT b204 551007 LEVEL SP 5 3 FEET b204 55100T2 LEVEL ERJ FEET b204 5510073 LEVEL 4 1 FEET b204 5510074 LEVEL 4 2 FEET D204 PS260W1 LEVEL FT Variations on Example 2 Making changes to an existing Process Point If you want to change the process point you just created you can recall the Property Inspector dialog box to the screen and make changes To do this right click on the process point in Configure mode and select Property Inspector from the pop up menu Displaying non numerical data in the Process Point There is no restriction on the type of attribute you drag into the Property Inspector dialog box While the example described using a numerical value using the Value attribute you could have dragged the Units or Name attribute into the Data Source field Making the Process Point changeable by the Operator If you want the process point to be changeable by the operator for example to enter setpoint levels simply select Data Entry as part of the Point Type in the PPT DE page of the Property Inspector dialog box In Runtime mode the operator can enter new values into this process point which are copied to the database and down into the RTU select this to make operator entry possible 5 16 m 272722999 m Cut Copy Delete Delete Dynamics Fill Color Line Color Line Width Line Style Tog
312. o Col Morales Polanco 11540 Mexico D F Mexico Phone 52 55 52 81 81 12 Fax 52 55 52 81 81 09 www EmersonProcess com Bristol Emerson Process Management Bristol Babcock Ltd Blackpole Road Worcester WR3 8YB United Kingdom Phone 44 1905 856950 Fax 44 1905 856969 www EmersonProcess com Bristol Emerson Process Management Bristol Inc 22 Portofino Crescent Grand Canals Bunbury Western Australia 6230 Mail to PO Box 1987 zip 6231 Phone 61 8 9725 2355 Fax 61 8 8 9725 2955 www EmersonProcess com Bristol NOTICE Remote Automation Solutions RAS division of Emerson Process Management shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors in this manual or omissions from this manual RAS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS MANUAL AND IN NO EVENT SHALL RAS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PRODUCTION LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF REVENUE OR USE AND COSTS INCURRED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR CAPITAL FUEL AND POWER AND CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES Bristol Inc Bristol Babcock Ltd Bristol Canada BBI SA de CV and the Flow Computer Division are wholly owned subsidiaries of Emerson Electric Co doing business as Remote Automation Solutions RAS a division of Emerson Process Management FloBoss
313. o change color Action Load Display Mouse Left Button Choose Dyamics gt Actions gt Pick to Choose call up the Property Inspector dialog Load Display box From the Pick page of the dialog box choose Load Display from the Filename C Program Files BristolBabe Actions list box then use the yee Browse key to locate specify the mss display you want to have loaded when Key Shortcut None Delte the operator clicks on the pump Click Specify the display otic nane on OK when finished then test it in to be loaded Desci ol Runtime Mode Custom Data Custom a OK Cancel Apply Help 5 36 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Allowing the Operator to START STOP the pump by clicking on the pump symbol If you want the operator to be able to START STOP the pump from your display you could create dedicated START and STOP labels If your system uses the same signal for both starting and stopping a pump like an ON OFF switch you could configure the pump symbol to be an ON OFF switch NOTE In this case the pump s color is still tied to the pump status signal but you click on the pump to START STOP it The START STOP signal is different from the status signal To do this select the pump we have already configured to change color and click on Dynamics gt Actions gt Pick Click on the Pick page of the dialog
314. o make it more difficult for an unauthorized person to gain access to your SCADA system Changing passwords frequently might make it difficult for a potential intruder to figure out a password or if they did it wouldn t last long Having longer passwords makes them harder for a potential intruder to guess Logging someone out after a period of inactivity helps prevent someone from sitting down at the Workstation and gaining access while the real Operator has gone out for lunch There are tradeoffs to all of these things For example if one of your Operators forgets their password and after a certain number of guesses gets locked out they re not going to be able to get back into the system without help from a System Administrator maybe that s you If a System Administrator isn t available to help them your plant might be operating without a human operator and that s not good If you force users to choose a long password it might be more likely that they ll forget it which again means the System Administrator gets called in The bottom line is that you need to look at your system and consider which of these restrictions makes sense for your SCADA system staff and the security needed by your organization OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 9 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Now let s go to the Access area page of the Group User Properties dialog box Group Properties ADMINISTRATORS OPC ltem Token
315. o query the database for data Viewing Data By Constructing Simple Queries The Database Object Viewer provides various options for querying the database In this section we will cover the simplest approach that will yield useful information for most users Examples of queries using more detailed criteria will be covered in the next section OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 13 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data E Database Object Viewer New Query File Options Query Help 2 H Fi XV Tables Conditions Parameters Joins Attributes SOL Filter Time Zone Objects Available Tables Selected Database publishedrep publishedrep Selected Tables questionable questionable raw realanalog Remove realanalogal realanalagck a gt For Help pess Fi Objects 0 0 Database The simple approach to querying the database involves Identifying the table you want to request data from using the Tables page Identifying the attributes you want to request data from using the Attributes page Specifying any limiting conditions using the Conditions page Running the query and looking for our results on the Objects page If you have trouble remembering this sequence just remember T A C O which is the first letter of each of the Database Object Viewer pages you need to use Identifying the Table You Want to Query The Tables page of the Database Object Viewer allows you t
316. o select which table or tables you want to examine 4 14 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find data NOTE Even though the Database Object Viewer allows you to select multiple tables we recommend that when you are first learning how to use the Database Object Viewer you choose only one table to be searched at any one time Choosing multiple tables introduces certain complexities into the query that may result in problems for the novice user Click on the name of the table or view you want to request data from in the Available Tables list box then click on the Add push button The table name will be added to the Selected Tables list box You can now click on the Attributes page to continue defining your query Click on the name of Then click on the Add the table or view you push button and the want to retrieve data name of the table will from in the Available appear in the Selected Tables list box Tables list box Database Object Viewer New Query alll x File Options Query Help Tables Conditions Paramefers Joins Attribjites SOL Filter Time Zone Objects Available T ables Selected Database publishedrep publithedrep Selected Tables questionable fealanalog questionable realanalag realanalogal realanalogct LE Objects 0 If you change your mind and want to remove a table from the Selected Tables list box click on Its name then
317. ogrammer s Reference document D4052 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 1 9 Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE Preparing Your Control Strategy Files to work with OE For this chapter we will assume that data collected about your plant or process comes from the network of Bristol remote process controllers or RTUs If you are using another brand of controller you will need to consult other documentation beyond this manual Bristol controllers are either from the Network 3000 series that includes the DPC 3330 DPC 3335 RTU 3305 or RTU 3310 or the ControlWave series that includes the ControlWave ControlWave MICRO and ControlWave LP among others The controllers execute a pre defined program called a control strategy which is responsible for reading data in from process instrumentation flow meters pressure transmitters etc performing calculations based on the data collected and sending out commands to instrumentation switches valves etc LA For Network 3000 series 3 a controllers the control strategy XS is written in a language called dD ACCOL IL using a program g called ACCOL Workbench 4 l i wi b Network 3000 series Controller The resulting file which is downloaded into the controller is referred to as the ACCOL load The primary structure for storing an individual data value pump status flow reading etc in the ACCOL load is called an ACCOL signal
318. oing to have an ADMINISTRATORS group for the one manager an ENGINEERS group for the two engineers and an OPERATORS group for the four operators Why use groups Each Operator is going to need access to the same sets of things The same is true of the Engineers Finally the manager is going to be in a special group that allows access to the security configuration tool Defining groups makes it easier to set or modify privileges for more than one person at a time Now let s proceed to actually create these groups and users To do this we need to use the Security Configuration Tool in the OE Toolbox Starting the Security Configuration Tool First open the OE Toolbox by clicking on Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt Toolbox OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 5 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system rtrdb1 ToolBox File Security Help en Diaries and Alarm Alarm Priorities Archive Files Calculations Conditions Calendars prararar TAGS L Acal z 2 Bia TETI Mw 3000 NW 3000 AWW 3000 OPC Client Patterns Signal Builder Templ RDI Setup Within the OE Toolbox double click on the Security Config icon and the Security Configuration tool will start Creating Groups To define a group right click on the Groups icon in the left pane tree of the Security Configuration tool The word New Group will appear Type a name for the new group In this case we will choose the name
319. ol a 5 Step 3 Right click on the object and choose Property Inspector from the pop up menu Assign a Share Keyword in the Property Inspector A share keyword is just a name but it has an important function if you make subsequent changes to the symbol Step 4 The Symbol Library is divided up into a tree of EEMS folders Each folder has one or more category pages the category pages contain individual symbols If desired create a folder and category page of your own by clicking on the Categories folder and clicking on File gt Add gt Subdirectory and then File gt Add gt Category Alternatively you can use existing folders and category pages Freeze Object Angle 0 Degrees Object Name Description gi Share Keyword mach e Custom Data Custom Assign a share keyword name Cancel Apply Help h ere IMPORTANT You should always assign a Share Keyword to any object you intend to re use In complex objects you may even want to define a Share Keyword for each piece of the object 5 42 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 5 Drag the symbol into the desired category page and symbol sub directory Drag the symbol into the desired category and sub directory of the symbol library Display1 OpenEnterprise by Bristol _____ __ ASEM 4S BBROo A 2 Sore a a aa Now you can proceed to use the symbol
320. ollect all 129 600 samples which may take some time depending upon the speed of your network and then because it only has 1024 pixels in which to display them it will take the 129 600 samples and divide them by 1024 which gives a value of about 127 That means each pixel on the screen will represent random sample out of every 127 collected That also means that you collected and processed 128 576 samples that can t be used because there s no where to display them It used up processing time it slowed down the speed at which the trend could be displayed and it also used up a lot of communications bandwidth That s kind of wasteful and it also doesn t really do you any good since only a fraction of the data 1 out of every 127 samples gets used The advantage to Data Mode is OE Trend Client Control Properties that you have all the data If you o By default trends wanted to export it to Excel or General Pens Data are optimized for some other application it s all eee DE Menus data Data Mode there ae runtime configuration Force Save As Hide unresolvable pens lirnits z il The disadvantage of Data Mode is Display Type that some trends may be slow in k coming up Also lots of data gets e collected that you won t ever be able to see unless you zoom in sufficiently 7 38 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Optimization for Speed and Efficiency Performance
321. ollection Alarms are generated in a controller when a particular signal goes outside a pre defined range or changes state into an alarm state Some typical alarm conditions might be that a liquid level is too high or a temperature is too low or that a pump has failed to Start We ll talk in detail about alarm concepts in another chapter At this point all you really need to know is that an alarm is a message that is telling the operator that something happened which could potentially be serious An alarm means something just happened and needs attention For example the controller detected that a pump failed or a pressure signal is too high OpenEnterprise displays these alarms on the OE Workstations In addition OE can be configured to send alarms via e mail and to cell phones and pagers Poll List Collection Most people are familiar with the term polling in connection with elections Every two years for example your town might have an election for mayor and people go to the polls to vote That s similar to the type of polling we re discussing here In the Poll List data collection mechanism OpenEnterprise sends out requests for data from the controllers according to a pre defined schedule For example collect a certain type of data every two hours All signals collected as part of the same scheduled collection are said to be in the same scan time class For example if hourly flow totals must be collected
322. olor which will represent the liquid in the tank and drag it just inside the first box so all of its edges appear inside the first box Outer box represents the tank itself Inner box represents the liquid in the tank OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 19 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 6 With the smaller blue box selected click on Dynamics gt Actions gt Size and the Property Inspector dialog box will appear Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Switch to Runtime mode to view the active data on the display by clicking on Runtime in the menu bar The Drag the appropriate tank level value from the Database Object Viewer into the Data Source field of the Property Inspector dialog box Choose the direction in which the inner box changes size to depict the liquid level Click on the Range Override check box and enter values for Low and High which correspond to the minimum and maximum tank levels to be displayed Then click on the OK push button OPC tag dragged in from Database Object Viewer Choose the direction in which the size changes Define range _ for tank level inner box representing the liquid should change size as the value changes in the active query of the Database Object Viewer 5 20 Property Inspector Rectangle Size Defaut Pick Data Source Drag Drop Data Source BristolBabcock BristolOPCServer ttrdb
323. on An OE Desktop file has the extension OED Although you can have any number of OED files on your workstation each of which can hold several different windows of information only one OED file can be active and running at any one time on a workstation s monitor NOTE Beginning with OpenEnterprise Version 2 50 if you have multiple monitors attached to the same OE Workstation you can run a different OED file on each monitor Also beginning with OpenEnterprise 2 53 each user can have their own OED file which is automatically loaded when they log into OpenEnterprise Before You Begin Before you start creating an OE Desktop file you should have at least 2 or 3 OE Displays created with OE Graphics in Chapter 5 and an alarm view window created in Chapter 8 OpenEnterprise for Beginners 9 Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop Hopefully you have some from when you went through those chapters If not you can use the sample displays included on the OpenEnterprise CD ROM Otherwise it doesn t make sense to create an OE Desktop yet because you wouldn t have anything to put on it Example 1 Specifying a Display that appears when you start the Desktop Often people want to have some sort of graphical display start as soon as they open an OE Desktop file e Start OE Desktop by clicking as follows Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt DeskTop The OE Desktop program will open but it will be empty e Click on the N
324. ons which require security levels of 4 or above will be inaccessible If you use IP_Client IP_Server modules to send signal list or array data between one or more Network 3000 controllers you may want to set up restrictions on which arrays or lists are accessible for read or read write access See the sections on P_Client and TP_Server in the ACCOL II Reference Manual document D4044 for details OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 31 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Open BSI Security Open BSI facilitates communication between OpenEnterprise and a network of Bristol controllers ControlWave or Network 3000 series Open BSI security should therefore be configured For information on configuring security for your Open BSI network please see Chapter 6 of the Open BSI Utilities Manual document D5081 That chapter also includes information on granting proxy access to the network from remote Open BSI Workstations which can have security implications Network Infrastructure UDP and TCP Sockets While this is generally more concerned with network traffic issues UDP and TCP sockets throughout an IP network must match for each controller and Open BSI Workstation It is recommended that these numbers be changed from their default values for greater security For information on setting these at the Open BSI level see the Open BSI Utilities Manual document D5081 For information on setting these in your ControlWave cont
325. op Data Source BristolBabcock BristolOPCServer ttrdb1 rei Data Tags OPC Request Type NATIVE Client Display Type DOUBLE Format foodce 30 oOo t lt i Show Unit Thousands Separators Unit Position i Leading Zeros Unit Text r fore ore gaes Object Name Description Click on the OK push button Custom Data Cancel Apply Help 4 ao Ol Mw el x 54 y 53 100 6 Click on the Process Point icon Step 1 Using the Database Object Viewer construct an active query of the database which calls up the signal data you are interested in from the realanalog table Leave the window open If you re not sure how to do this please read Chapter 4 Step 2 Open a display in the OE Graphics package and move it side by side with the Database Object Viewer window so that both windows are in view Step 3 Either click on the process point icon or click on Dynamics gt Intrinsics gt Process Point 5 14 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 4 Click on the approximate location in the display where you want the data to appear you can adjust the location later if necessary The Property Inspector dialog box will pop up Step 5 Drag whichever value you want to display from the Database Object Viewer window into the Data Source field in the Property Inspector dialog box This is called
326. operties User Properties TOM dialog box for this user by double el File Token penam Token l Token Group TE roperties Account Summary Access Areas Application Token clicking on the user s icon in the asin ah Security Configuration Tool User Name Z Change Password At Next Logon Full Name C User Cannot Change Password C System Administrator Enter a temporary password such as C Ses PASSWORD in the Password ae and Verify Password fields Access Area A Grantor Group Parent Group OPERATORS v Select the Change password at _ next logon box Otogin Click on OK to exit the Security C Logout Configuration Tool Give the user the temporary password and instruct them to log on and change their password when prompted to do so 10 30 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Other Security Issues The most secure SCADA system would be self contained 1 e it would have no connections to the outside Internet In addition it would be isolated from other network activities in your organization for example the process control network would not be on the same network as the billing department If however your organization chooses to share networks or include connections to the outside world security should be of paramount concern Security in ControlWave Controllers The Security p
327. or Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Display OpenEnterprise by Bristol File Edit Yiew Format Arrange Draw Dynamics Tools Runtime Help DSHS sBORO Al For eaeyagg arial y 10 IBZ USES SPTH SeG ate ilat1 23245671 MW I lt Step 4 Establish a common signal naming convention for your database and an aliasing convention for your displays As we discussed earlier in this manual aliasing is a powerful method which allows you to re use objects symbols and displays multiple times In order for it to be used properly however your database must use a signal naming convention which includes common portions which can be used for aliasing You can then define a strict aliasing convention which must be followed when building your displays In your database therefore 1f you have 50 identical compressor stations each with its own set of signals from 50 different RTUs make sure the signals names follow the same format in each RTU For example if you use signals like COMPRS8 POWER STRT in one RTU do NOT use COMPRESS START PWRS in another Use the same signal name format in each RTU Similarly if you intend to define aliases for the station number pump number and tank number make sure they are used consistently from display to display 1 e if you use station lt lt station number gt gt OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 55 Chapter 5 Building Display
328. or Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Example 5 Displaying A Message Based on A Logical Value in the Database Step 1 On a display use the text tool to enter the text label you want to present For example let s say that in the event of a chlorine leak detection you want to display in large red letters CHLORINE LEAK DETECTED For help on using the text tool see Example 1 Creating A Text Label on A Display Step 2 Select the text by clicking on it it will be surrounded by edit handles i Displayi OpenEnterprise by Bristol File Edit wiew Format Arrange Draw Dynamics Tools Seine Help a e Wb g amp l a Aaa Eo e k A ag eia fe BR uaz ac k i E E m CHLORINE LEAK DETECTED N E _ E OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 31 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 3 Now that the text is selected click as follows Dynamics gt Actions gt Hide Disable The Property Inspector dialog box will appear Step 4 On the Hide page of the Property Inspector dialog box drag in the OPC tag from the Database Object Viewer and place it in the Data Source field Choose Hide Disable when False because when the Chlorine Leak signal is OFF we don t want to display the CHLORINE LEAK DETECTED message we only want to display it when the Chlorine Leak signal is ON True Click on OK Drag in the OPC tag which specifi
329. or more compressed datasets E Raw Every 1 Minutes Flow Data 1 minute samples Every 1 Hours Flow Data Hourly Calculations Every 1 Days Flow Data Daily calculations Now that your datasets are complete click on Next gt Step 7 Rename the Internal Tables Used to Hold These Datasets Optional On this page you have the option of renaming the internal tables used to hold this data Later on when you actually want to query the historical data you ll need to know the names of these tables Rename the view if desired and click on Next gt OpenEnterprise for Beginners Dataset View Names View minute_samples hourly_comp daily_ compl Click on Next gt when finished 6 49 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Step 8 Choose the Objects Signals You Want to Lo Because we didn t select Log All Objects back on page 6 39 we now have to choose the flow signals we want to log Select the signals and click on the gt gt button to mark them for logging Click on Next 100 to bring additional signals into the window and repeat the process When you re finished click on Next gt Now click on Finish on the Logging Group Summary page and you re done Select the signals you want to log and click on the gt gt button to mark them for logging Logging Group Select Objects Browse Objects name devicename Logged Objects 0204 P5180 FLOW 0204 PS50
330. ort then click on Find Signals x Select the Ngnals to display Enter search criteria and select Find Signals Add specific sigils using Add Signals or add the search criteria using Add Filter Devicename Instance o Name fo Bse O Description Extension OO _ Match case Attribute a 2 Name Description A CW7 GV R1_SENSROTOR_Value CW7 GV R4_SENSROTOR_Value CW7 GV R1_HTVAL_Disp_Value CW7 GV R2_HTVAL_Disp_Value CW7 GV R3_HTVAL_Disp_Value CW7 GV PID_PV W7 GV R1_DP_Al a W7 GV R2_DP_Al SS W7 GV R4_DP_Al hee selected all the signals click on Close Add Signals N Close _ Next the signals meeting the specified criteria will be displayed in this window Choose the ones you want to add to the report and click on Add Signals To exit this dialog box click on Close OpenEnterprise Import History Create New Query Signal Selector Select the signals to display The signals you selected will now appear in the window eee Click on Next gt Dataservice Select the signals to be displayed Select all signals in the selected Feats Sat dataset or use the Add Signals option to find the signals you require All signals Named signals only Add Signals Query Period Transform name CVWV7 GV R1_DP_Al name CW7 GV R2_DP_AI name CW7 GV R4_DP_Al Output and Data Formatting Click on Next gt 11 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Ch
331. ose Tank Number When the operator clicks on the push button the Set New Alias Values dialog box appears The operator chooses the desired tank number from the list box or just enters the number and it will be substituted in place of tanknum in the OPC tags for this display As a result any of the 8 different tanks can be selected and displayed from this one display oni E O O O O O O O E H kN ere When the operator clicks te on this button a dialog box appears which allows RPA TANKS LEVEL selection of the desired Gre Tanc nune tank number Select New Alias Values 5 50 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Other Uses of Aliasing Saving aliases as part of symbols When we created symbols before we didn t include dynamic information with them because we were using different signals with the symbol each time we re used it Aliasing allows us to store dynamic OPC tag information when creating symbols for the symbol library to minimize the amount of typing when entering dynamic information With this technique you don t have to keep dragging tags from the Database Object Viewer for each use of the symbol because you do it once and then use an alias in the tag which allows you to select it when re using the symbol For example once we defined aliases for it we could have grouped our entire tank and its associated dynamics together as a symbol with a share
332. oup a GUESTS Remove All Users A OPERATORS Security Configuration An empty box will appear in the File Edt Toos Help right hand pane of the Security Configuration Tool Type the name of G Security Config User FullName Description Group B Default Group p08 the user into the box When you press 7 Pg Fauc the Enter key to complete the name _ OTAATORS the Group User Properties dialog RA DISPATCHERS Type the name of box will appear a the user in the box aa nen arone and press the Enter key You can now customize the information for that user such as their name etc All of the privileges are pre defined because we added the user directly into an existing group Enter text in these fields to describe the user User Properties BOB Custom Token File Token OPC Item Token Token Group Properties Account Summary Access pr s Application Token When you click on OK to exit the User Seige AA Select this Group User Properties dialog box an lt n e ONLY if this Full Name Robert Johnson CI User Canngt rafige Password user IS the icon will have been created for that user Descistion SCADA Syatem Managed P Siem Administrator System Password C Account Disabled Ad m i n ist rator Venfy Password E Account LockOut Access Area A Grantor Group Parght Group ADMINISTRATORS x Notice that Load OEP Fil C Ljan the group
333. our display to allow it to reference the correct database attributes when required Suppose however you have a system with 8 water tanks which are identical in every way except for the signal names in their OPC tags You could create 8 separate displays 1 for each water tank That would be difficult to support however because if you decided later that you wanted to change the layout of the displays add items etc you would have to do that on 8 different displays An easier way to do that is to make use of a technique called aliasing Aliasing is a powerful technique for substituting at runtime certain parts of the OPC tag This allows objects or displays to be re used dynamically for different OPC tags IMPORTANT In order for aliasing to be used you must adopt a consistent naming scheme for similar objects in your database For example if you have 24 separate identical pumps in your database the signals should be consistent from pump to pump i e PUMP1 RUN PUMP2 RUN PUMP3 RUN etc for all 24 pumps If instead you are inconsistent in naming signals i e PUMP RUN 1 and PMPNUM3 RUN etc then aliasing CANNOT BE USED effectively OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 45 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process The first step in using aliasing is to modify the OPC tags stored in your display files Any part of a signal name which varies can be replaced with an alias For example if your system has 8 i
334. ow Most users should leave this at timestamp OpenEnterprise Import History Create New Query Data Transform Control how the data is transformed and the data columns that are displayed Choose each column you want to display in the report and click on gt for it If you Column Names Select the timestamp column to control the t Transtorm timestomp Objects eee ee are displaying several different Select the columns to displ shee Available colun y columns you can use the Up value and Down buttons to move through them dstoffset questionable Output and Data Formatting V Enable timestamp rounding Select how timestamp values are rounded Round to nearest Insert missing records After you ve chosen which columns to display click on Next gt Timestamp rounding allows the timestamp to be rounded to the nearest unit of measure second minute etc OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 11 Chapter 11 Creating Reports The other items included on this page allow you to specify how you want to use timestamps Normally the Transform timestamp would just be the Timestamp column though if you have other timestamps saved in the database because you re doing a more advanced historical system you can select that different timestamp column You can also specify how timestamp values are rounded When you re finished with your column selection and timestamp s
335. p of the level graphic Step 8 Go to Runtime mode and test the setpoint control Drag it with the mouse and watch the value of the setpoint process point change If your RTU logic was active and controlling a process this would cause valves to open close etc in order to raise or lower the liquid level in the tank as displayed by the tank level graphic in order to meet the new operator setpoint Drag the setpoint o control and watch the setpoint change 10 79 lf your control logic in the RTU is active the level value would also change as valves are opened closed to change the tank level until it reaches the operator s setpoint 5 30 LEWEL OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 29 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Variations on Example 4 Making the setpoint visible as a second graphic next to the tank level graphic In the example we just completed the setpoint is manipulated by moving the setpoint control next to the level but the change in the level is not immediately reflected since it depends on changes in the RTU and the process You could create a second bar graphic representing the setpoint value next to the level graphic When you move the setpoint control in runtime mode the setpoint bar should move along with it lt 9 74 As you drag the setpoint control the setpoint graphic bar will change size as you move the control 8 30 LEVEL SETPOINT 5 30 OpenEnterprise f
336. p to date with your latest changes otherwise the rebuild would overwrite all changes made since the initial custom SQL files were generated Where can I get more information Now that you ve finished this appendix you should have at least a minimal understanding of what SQL 1s used for e If you re really interested in Structured Query Language SQL you might want to look at the Polyhedra SQL Reference Manual In addition since SQL is an industry standard there are numerous books available Just stroll down the Computers aisle of your local bookstore and you Il likely find several books on SQL e If you re really curious about all the different tables in OpenEnterprise you can find information in the OE Schema Reference Manual e If you want to learn about Database Explorer which is the other main method for looking at the contents of the OE Database please go to Chapter 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 19 OpenEnterprise for Beginners A 1 Training Manual D5091 Bristol OpenEnterprise June 2007 Emerson Process Management Bristol Inc 1100 Buckingham Street Watertown CT 06795 Phone 1 860 945 2262 Fax 1 860 945 2525 www EmersonProcess com Bristol Emerson Electric Canada Ltd Bristol Canada 6338 Viscount Rd Mississauga Ont L4V 1H3 Canada Phone 905 362 0880 Fax 905 362 0882 www EmersonProcess com Bristol Emerson Process Management BBI S A de C V Homero No 1343 3er Pis
337. pecifies which of the columns fields in the source table should be logged as well as which compression options if any should be applied to the raw data before it is logged We re not doing any compression for this example though so we just have to select which columns we want and the Raw option The Logging Group Select Fields page allows you to select which columns of the source table you want to log Choose which columns from For each of the the source ust table should a ected columns be logged by of a given type clicking on the specify whatever data compression options which are to be performed We just want raw for this example column name and then click ing on the gt gt push button Logging Group Select Fields Alable Fields acckssarea Fields to be Logged Text Date Fields calloutarea calloutdisplay changemask cleared controlinhibit curentalanmmporecedence cumentlocker dataset datumaddress defaultvalue description devicename disable To de select a column name click on the lt lt button Click here to proceed to the next page 6 18 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Available Fields The Available Fields list box shows the names of all columns in the source table To specify that data from a particular column should be logged click on the column name then click on the
338. perties Click on the Axis button From the Graph page of the OE Trend ashe te Client Control Properties dialog box the Fil Color Axis button Fil ngle 45 _ dearees Show Multiple Axis V Show Multiple Y Axis In the Axis Configuration dialog box de select the Autoscale box Since you re here we also recommend that unless you have a specific need for it you de select the Independent Scaling option as well since it can be confusing to the user if they don t know what it s used for Then click on OK and click on OK again to exit the OE Trend Client Control Properties dialog box Axis Configuration Placement Left Right Top Bottom acca De select the Autoscale Placement opti on Left Right Scaling De select the Independent Scaling option Then click on OK Now if you return to Runtime Mode by clicking on Runtime in the menu bar auto scaling will be disabled for the Common Y axis 7 16 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Changing the Appearance of the Trace for a Particular Pen OE Trend Client Control Properties If desired you can choose a different color for a pen s Limits Parameters Time Zone trace a different line style or thickness etc To do this General Pens Ranges Data Graph you need to go to the Styles page of the Pen ae Configuration dialog box
339. play If you do this you will be dragging just the text for the OPC tag onto your display which is useless by itself Click on the tag in the display and press the Delete key then start again Dragging the wrong OPC tag This is the most common error when creating a process point Depending upon which attribute column you drag from you might see data in the wrong format e g text instead of numerical data or you might be dragging from a row above or below the one you want If the displayed value does NOT match the value displayed in the active query you can just delete the current tag in the Data Source field and drag in the correct one Alternatively just click on the value in the display press the Delete key and start again Forgetting to use an active query If you forgot to click on the Active Query icon shown at right before running your query the query will only be updated if you manually run the query again and consequently the data on your display WILL NOT change when you go into Runtime mode Click on the Active Query icon and re run the query If this does NOT fix the problem verify that your connection to the database is functioning OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 17 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Example 3 Displaying the changing level of liquid in a tank NOTE The tank we are drawing in this example is a simple box you can be much more elaborate in your tank
340. pter 7 Trending Your Data To specify the Viewable Time Range amount of period visible on screen at any one time Call up the OE Trend Control Properties dialog box and go to the Data page Specify the total range of time you want to be visible viewable on the screen at any one time using any combination of the Range days hours minutes and seconds fields For example if you want two hours of data to be visible at any one time enter 2 in the hours field If the trend s period see above encompasses more than 2 hours the scroll bar must be used to bring additional data into view Typically users set the range to be the same as the period To specify the Start Time Type in the date Go to the Ranges page of the Pen Type in the hours directly or use the Configuration dialog box and minutes for the control to bring up start time directly the calendar then or use the control select the date from If the you want the start time to be calculated based on the current workstation time i e the period is subtracted from the current workstation time to calculate the start time to select the time the calendar Pen Configuration Ranges Limits Styles Check User Current Workstation Time for the common X axis ul 4 MMe 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 Md 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 2 27 28 Or Check Use time period relative to Current Workstatio
341. ptions will be unavailable to operators when they are logged on and using the Alarm Viewer e To grant a user or group access to a particular item choose the token from the Available Tokens field then click on the Include gt gt button and the token for that item will be added to the Include List for this user or group 10 12 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system e To explicitly deny a user or group access to a particular item choose the token from the Available Tokens field then click on the Exclude gt gt button and the token for that item will be added to the Exclude List for this user or group IMPORTANT As we said before everyone belongs to the DEFAULT group Initially the DEFAULT group also has all tokens included This means that when the system is first set up everyone has access to everything Make sure you examine the DEFAULT group and remove any token that you don t want everyone to have How do I know which application tokens to choose Good question If you can t figure out what a given token allows by looking at its name you can look it up in the Security Configuration Tool section of the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide document D5092 In general Administrators and Engineers would have all tokens which can be chosen via Token Groups instead of individual Application Tokens Operators would generally have the following sorts of application tokens
342. r OED file OE Desktop loaded whenever users in this group log OFF a workstation To do this select the Logout box then use the button to browse to the OED file you want to have loaded on logout are normally NOT done this way they are done by the system in response to repeated incorrect passwords There are many different options on the Properties page We say options because they are all optional It s your own choice whether you make any of these selections The figure above gives short explanations of them for more detailed descriptions see the Online Help or the OE Reference Guide document D5092 All the settings on the Properties page are optional You can set them as desired Since we said we re making the ADMINISTRATORS group who are presumably going to be very responsible individuals we don t really need to force ADMINISTRATORS users to do anything such as change their passwords when they log on If you re defining the OPERATORS group you might want to choose some of these items Let s look at some of the other tabs in the Group User Properties dialog box The security configuration information stored for particular groups and users is referred to as an account The Accounts page lets you specify rules and restrictions on users who log into the OpenEnterprise Workstation OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 7 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system On the Accounts
343. r Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Now click on Dynamics gt Actions gt Size and the Property Inspector dialog box will appear Use the exact same methods you used before when you were making the tank using boxes The only difference is this time make sure you select the Clip option as shown in the figure below Property Inspector Rectangle Size Defaut Pick Data Source Drag Drop Data Source BristolBabcock BrstolOPCServer ttrdb1 rei Data Tags Expression g tated a st oh oa ta a a I sats MH When creating irregularly w orj Se m A shaped dynamic objects rion 15 orc AE ed aera the Object Name If you forget to use clipping the entire dynamic object will be scaled and the result will look wrong for this type of object The figure on the left below shows the results of scaling an irregular dynamic object wrong method and the figure on the right shows the results of clipping the irregular dynamic object correct method Dynamic object is scaled instead of clipped WRONG Dynamic object is correctly clipped OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 23 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Using A Pre Drawn Object From the Symbol Library If you are having trouble drawing a satisfactory tank you can always look in the symbol library to see if there is one you would prefer to use 1 C
344. r Beginners Km To run the query click on the Run Query icon or click on Query gt Apply This message will only appear if you didn t specify any conditions it is meant to warn you that the results of the query may be a large amount of data 4 19 Database Explorer WARMING No conditions have been specified Continue Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data The results of the query can be viewed on the Objects page normally running the query will switch to the Objects page automatically If this is an active query they will be updated periodically as new data comes in Database Object Viewer Fie Options Query Help aaia a HN P Bele Tables Conditions Farameters Joins Attributes SOL Filter Time zone bjects value units description name Dz04 P5150P0 TIMER 1 TIME Dz0 4 P07STRBE TIMER SP Dz04 P5150F1 TIMER 1 TIME D204 P5150F2 TIMER 1 TIME D204 P5150F3 TIMER 1 TIME Dz 4 PS5150F4 TIMER 1 TIME D204 PS81561 KWATT HTOT Dz04 P5150F5 TIMER 1 TIME D204 PS61562 KWATT HTOT O204 P5150P6 TIMER 1 TIME For Help press Fl Total Number of objects Number of objects query issued added since query issued SEC Ji PS 319 Pas P5 PS PRIM SLUDGE PUMP PSP 1 PRIM SLUDGE PUMP PSP 2 PRIM SLUDGE PUMP PSP 3 PRIM SLUDGE PUMP PSP 4 PRIM SLUDGE PUMP PSP 5 scada web rtrdbl Database Number of objects name removed since 4 20 Nu
345. rds that are easy for an intruder to figure out like your name or the name of the company OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 33 Chapter 11 Creating Reports What are Reports Sometimes historical data must be provided to plant managers or to third parties to fulfill various management or regulatory requirements The raw historical data however isn t really in an accessible format for a third party It needs to be organized in such a way that it is easy to understand To do this we use reports Reports are just tabular presentations of historical data that can be printed e mailed or stored in files Before You Begin In order to run reports the Report Scheduler software must be configured to start as part of your OpenEnterprise session See the Session Manager documentation in the OE Reference Guide for details on starting programs from the Session Manager How are Reports Created In OpenEnterprise reports are created using the Report Configuration Tool and a special OpenEnterprise plug in that works with Microsoft Excel There are six major tasks that need to be completed when creating a report 1 Create a Report Template A report template defines where the data will come from and how the data is organized on the report The report template can be re used for multiple reports that follow that same organization The remaining steps can be completed in any order 2 Create the Report The report itself
346. re establishing rules for historical templates in the Database Project Builder A consistent naming convention will also help you with a subject called aliasing which we won t talk about until Chapter 5 Furthermore it also helps you remember what the signals do 2 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 2 Configuring Controllers to Work with OE Identifying Which Signals in the Control Strategy File Should be Collected by OE For a signal in an ACCOL load or a variable in a ControlWave project to be collected and stored in the OE Database it must fall into one of three categories Alarms any signal or variable configured as an alarm is automatically collected when it enters an alarm state or returns to a normal state Normally these signals are those for which it is important that the operators are alerted when pre determined conditions like a maximum tank level are exceeded e Globals a global signal or global variable can be collected at a predefined rate via Polled List collection The OE server will simply collect these signals at a fixed rate e g once per minute The server must ask for these signals e RBE a report by exception RBE signal will be sent from the controller to the server whenever it changes by more than a pre configured amount called the deadband We talked a little bit about the different methods of data collection back in Chapter 1 In the first part of this chapter we re going to highlight
347. re things are running smoothly You might want to prevent them from deleting files or making major changes to the configuration which are reserved for the engineers e VISITORS You might have other people who need access to the system but you want to significantly limit what they can do For example you might have operator trainees who are still learning their job Or you may occasionally have visitors to your facility for whom you have to demonstrate the SCADA system and you want to allow them to call up a few displays but you don t want them to be able to change anything These people would have very restricted access IMPORTANT The Database Project Builder offers a set of standard Group including some of those shown above all pre configured You may want to consider using them instead of creating groups on your own OpenEnterprise for Beginners 10 3 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Everyone is a member of the DEFAULT group No matter what other groups a user is assigned to they remain a member of the DEFAULT group IMPORTANT In addition to any groups of users you create there is also a special group called DEFAULT Every user is automatically part of the DEFAULT group and cannot be removed from the DEFAULT group Because everyone is part of the DEFAULT group you need to make sure that the DEFAULT group has the fewest privileges of any of the groups Also privileges granted in the DEFAULT group are avai
348. responding to that geographic area of the plant Step 1 Get a photo or map which you can use for your Overview display There are several ways you can do this e Take a picture of your plant or process with a digital camera e Scan a picture or map of your plant or process e Draw the map or picture yourself using the drawing tools e Download a map from an Internet mapping site Your local state government or chamber of commerce may also have one available Talbot Brown Hill Top Bielen Valley Center Mitchell EIf s Peak Franktown NMSCGC Garrett Control e Louville 9 M Center Gillette Griffeth Town State Route 9 Masonville Cliff Rock LongView Lake o Hunte Town View Johnson Corners Route 103 Rolling Forest State Park The resulting graphic should have an extension such as TIF GIF BMP or JPG 5 38 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process step 2 Import the photo or map into OE Graphics e In Configure mode open an empty OE Graphics display by clicking on File gt New e Click on Draw gt Import gt Image and browse to the photo or map file created in Step 1 and click Open The photo or map file will be brought into OE Graphics Step 3 Add labels logos etc OPTIONAL e Click on Draw gt Text or click on the icon shown at right to add text labels to the map or photo Se
349. rface HMI system IMPORTANT This chapter is NOT intended to be a comprehensive reference to all features and functions of the OE Graphics package If you need information on a particular feature not covered here please refer to the GraphWorX32 User Manual Before You Begin Before you attempt to build displays the following must have been done e You must have installed the OE Graphics package on your workstation This process is briefly covered in the OpenEnterprise Installation Guide portion of the OpenEnterprise Reference Guide document D5092 e Your OE Database must have been created and must be running e You must be able to connect to the OE Database using Database Explorer and issue a query of the OE Database This was discussed in Chapter 4 e You must have successfully logged on to your OpenEnterprise Workstation with sufficient security privileges to access the OE Database Consult your site specific documentation for details e You must be familiar with the details of the underlying plant or process which will be depicted on the displays and also must know which tables and attributes of the OE Database contain the data you want to include on the display OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 3 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Starting the OE Graphics package By default the startup sequence for the OE Graphics package is to click on Start gt Programs gt OpenEnterprise gt Works
350. riangular pointer created in Step 2 This process point should use the value of whichever signal is your setpoint signal Do NOT make it a data entry point just make it a normal process point which displays the value of the setpoint signal Jop 4 ian 5 26 m freee i m m OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 4 Select both the triangular pointer and the process point next to it then group them together as a single object by clicking on Arrange gt Group into Symbol pnEnterprise by Bristol mat Petite Draw Dynamics Tools Runtirn Group Inte Symbol Ctrl 6 Ctrl U Ungroup Symbol Bring To Front Ctrl Shift PogUp Send To Back Ctrl Shift PgDn Bring Forward Chrl PgUp Send Backward Ctrl PgDn Rotate Flip Free Rotate Align Space Evenly b Make Same Size Select both the triangular pointer and the process point you created in the last step and group them together as a single object m m Hp r rrr m m m LEVEL Display1 OpenEnterprise by Bristol Step 5 Now that the process point File Edit Yiew Format Arrange Draw eee Tools Runtime Help and triangular pointer are 2e0M 4 4 2 R a q grouped together as a single TE Ta soe Eel E ria J i i J Rotation Dial object you should move anon in A olor them next to the bottom edge Eok oca Vaes analog Color
351. ries OpenEnterprise Database Aroject Builder Device Drivers foacatons Please specify which drivers you wish to include Network 3000 and ControlWave Driver F Alen Bradley Driver OPC Driver Summary Build Signal Data Database Size Historical Data Session Allows database to collect data from Network 3000 Finish Controliwave and Controlivave Micro RTUs Click on Next gt What is a Device Driver A device driver is simply a program which helps something communicate In the case of the Network 3000 and Control Wave driver it s a program that allows communication between OE and Bristol controllers OpenEnterprise for Beginners 3 9 Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database Confirming Your Choices and Building the Database Tables This page shows a list of the defaults and selections you have made so far You can use the scroll bar to bring additional entries into view If there are any entries you d like to modify click on the lt Back key until you reach the desired page otherwise click on Next gt This is a Summary of the choices made so far Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Summary The following is a summary of the basic configuration you have requested Click Next to build the dafabase Standard Group configuration Administrators Engineers Operators Dispatchers Guests Build SYSTEM lt No Group gt Signal Data Open table access Database Size
352. rise for Beginners 10 1 Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Choosing Usernames and Passwords Usernames A username is just a name that is used in OpenEnterprise to refer to this OE user The name must be unique within the system For example if we have a person named Robert Johnson his username could be BOB If we had a Robert Johnson and a Robert Jones each would need different usernames so one could be BOB and the other could be ROBERT or you could use their last names JOHNSON and JONES Passwords Each username must be associated with a password A password is just a combination of letters and or numbers that a user must enter each time they log into an OpenEnterprise Workstation The System Administrator can institute rules like a password has to be at least 8 characters or a user has to change their password every 60 days We ll talk more about those rules later when we get to the Accounts page of the Group User Properties dialog box When choosing passwords you want to try to choose something that you can remember easily but is not easy for someone else to guess According to experts the best passwords are mixtures of letters and numbers rather than words that can be found in the dictionary Make sure it s something you can remember though If a user forgets their password the System Administrator will need to issue a new one for them Groups Once you know who all your users are we recommend
353. rking with Historical Data Specifying the Source of Data for a Log File The source of the data going into the log file is defined by one of the logging groups you have defined You must provide the id number of the logging group You must also identify whether the data you are storing 1s raw samples or if you are storing calculated data Determining the Buffer Size and Number of Buffers to be stored in the Log File e The log buffer holds only a limited amount of logged data for a limited period of time usually less than an hour depending upon how fast you re logging data The log buffer data is periodically copied to the log file e You must make the buffer larger than the maximum amount of data you re going to save in a particular snapshot of time 6 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Deciding When to Generate An Archive File The figure below shows an example of the relationship between log buffers log files and archive files in a typical system Log files are fixed in size As the contents of the log buffer are copied into the log file they overwrite the oldest data in the log file To prevent a loss of this data you need to specify an archive file to permanently store it LOG BUFFER in memory contents is regularly copied to the log file overwriting oldest data in the log file LOG FILE on hard disk Size is some multiple of the buffer size
354. roller please see the IP Parameters section of the ControlWave Designer Programmer s Handbook document D5125 Windows Security If appropriate for your system security you may want to configure additional security through Microsoft Windows See your Microsoft documentation for details Also computer security experts widely recommend that you keep your operating system up to date Make sure for example if new Service Packs are released by Microsoft to address Windows security issues that you apply them to your system Virus Protection for Your Workstations Each workstation should be equipped with Virus Protection software and you should subscribe to a regular update service for this software so the virus protection remains current as new viruses become a threat Virus protection is particularly important if the workstation has any connection to outside networks or even to other departments via company intra network s 10 32 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Firewall Software For Your Networks If your process control network is connected to the World Wide Web you are strongly urged to purchase and configure commercially available firewall software to provide some level of protection against external intrusion from hackers Physical Security Consider issues related to the physical security of your workstations and the nature of your operation Are
355. rt OE Desktop if it s not currently running by clicking as follows Start gt Programs gt OpenFEnterprise gt DeskTop Now open up the desktop file we created earlier in Example 2 by choosing Desktop gt Recent Desktops and selecting the filename You now have the desktop we created earlier NOTE You don t have to use that desktop it s just easier to build on the previous example Now we need to start making menu items Click as follows Desktop gt Customize Peol OpenEnterprise Desktop Alarm Window Main Display Desktop File View Tools Security Window Help p C New Ctrl N Open Crl 0 i myalarms ac 2 COE Store Overview gdf 3 SEASIDE DRIVE gdf Open Desktop Close Desktop Save Desktop Save Desktop As Recent Desktops View H Mode Print Setup Customize Ctl J Default Files Crl D units acknowledged FAILED FALSE Exit Customize desktop settings Alarms 1 Uncir 1 Un ck 1 Ack 0 SYSTEM 11 00 AM 9 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop The OE Desktop Properties dialog box will appear In the Menu page click on the New button This list shows the menu items which appear in the menu bar of the OE Desktop If an item isn t checked it isn t currently visible OE Desktop Properties drag and drop onthe menu bar itself while this properties dialgg is active Set check to display item
356. rt of the Ers Peak ro desktop not occupied RIMOR Te Nama by docked windows You can use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to adjust which parts et Main Display of the display are o mam A visible Saving the OE Desktop File When you ve finished editing the OE Desktop File and everything is sized the way you want it you can save it e Click on Desktop gt Save Desktop As and enter a name for the desktop file then click on Save and the desktop file will be saved Rie name OE Desktop files are saved with the file extension 3 aie a J OED 9 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop We recommend you create a folder called OESTORE and that you create separate sub folders within it for storing OE Desktop files displays trends alarms etc NOTE Although you could call these folders whatever you wish we recommend OESTOREP because that is the standard folder name used by our engineers for this purpose OpenEnterprise for Beginners 9 5 Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop Example 2 Adding an Alarm View to the Desktop NOTE In order to do this example we assume you ve already completed Example I and have saved an OE Desktop file We also assume that you have an Alarm View AC file already created See Chapter 8 Now we want to add another OE component window to our existing OE Desktop file In this case we re going to add an Alarm View
357. s S S5 name S555 5 gt scheduleid Maxanterval Mmananterval OELSer l disaple a ae Se Query Done 5 records selected SQL gt See you got the five names of the columns that appeared when we requested the whole table Be careful though about using wildcards on extremely large tables Typically this would be in OE historical tables such as raw1 which can contain tens of millions of records For example if A S OpenEnterprise for Beginners Appendix A Learning SQL A Crash Course for OE Users you use a wildcard without any WHERE condition on one of these tables you could run into a nasty condition called THE KILLER QUERY Beware the killer query especially when using wildcards without a WHERE condition The tables we ve been using so far in these examples are pretty small If however we had a historical table with millions of pieces of data we shouldn t try to bring back every attribute from that table by using a wildcard without some limiting condition Why Because we have to be very careful about exhausting all our memory with a KILLER QUERY A killer query is a query that brings back so many records from the OE Database that you run out of memory As one of our OE Support Engineers says Your system ends up in a smoking heap And that s not good a good thing If you are using Database Explorer you will receiv
358. s table lists all of the persons designated as valid users of the system and records information about them and what they are allowed to do in the system Oelogdata These tables are used in the definition of the OE Historian The OE Oelogcolumn Historian allows data collected into the OE Database to be saved and Oelogcontrol reused later in trends and reports Loghistory How does data get from the Controller Network into the OE database Data from your network of remote process controllers is collected and stored in the OE Database The actual communication between the Bristol controllers and the OE Database is handled by Open BSI and a communications driver program called RDI3000 RDI3000 stands for Remote Device Interface 3000 3000 refers to Bristol Network 3000 series controllers Our ControlWave series of controllers can also communicate via this method There are five 5 methods by which data goes from the Bristol controllers into the OE Database They are Alarm Data Collection Poll List Collection RBE Collection Array Collection via Open BSI Converter Archive Collection via Open BSI Converter In addition RTUs and PLCs manufactured by other vendors can communicate with the OE Database using vendor supplied OPC server software and custom communication drivers We re not going to cover this subject in this book 1 6 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise Alarm Data C
359. s the directory path in which on line OpenEnterprise Archive files will be stored To specify the directory path you can either type it in directly or use the Browse push button NOTE Once the dataset has been saved this setting can only be modified via SQL statements As specified by the Maximum Online Archives field OpenEnterprise can only maintain a limited number of archive files for a dataset on line in memory at any one time When that number is exceeded the oldest on line archive is made off line and is moved to the Offline Archives 6 26 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Auto Archive Archive When Automatically Online Archives Maximum Online Archives Archive Cataloguing Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data directory It can be brought on line again if needed using the Archive File Tool To specify this directory path you can either type it in directly or use the Browse push button When selected this causes OpenEnterprise to create an Archive file automatically whenever the criteria specified by Archive When are met This specifies a maximum percentage of un archived data When this percentage is exceeded an Archive file will automatically be generated Suppose for example the Keep For At Least value is set to 1 day and the maximum percentage of un archived data 1 e Archive When is set to 25 percent 1 e 6 hours This would mean that when 75 percent of a day is co
360. s to Mimic Your Process on one display don t use station lt lt stationnum gt gt on another display Use aliases consistently from display to display Step 5 Build a few of your more complex objects for testing purposes Create some of your more complex objects to verify that they work as expected Setup aliases and verify that they work correctly Be sure when saving symbols to use the shared object name as discussed earlier in this manual Step 6 Build your display hierarchy using a framework of empty displays Yi pumpsta3 gdf OpenEnterprise by Bristol Babcock Build empty displays without objects Or Fever tos Congre Ho data for your entire display hierarchy Make sure each display includes the toolbar or menu object used for navigation purposes Test to make sure PUMP STATION OVERVIEW DISPLAY that the navigation functions work correctly throughout the display THIS DISPLAY STILL hierarchy Put a few objects on the UNDER CONSTRUCTION displays for demonstration purposes Step 7 Review your design with the users of the system and revise as necessary Show the displays to the people who will actually Now that you have a basic framework of displays together be using them with some demo objects you should show the system to the people who will use it This is a very important step You may find for example that the operators need additional information on certain displays or that th
361. s we did for the Overview display just specifying a different file to be loaded Now the OE Desktop has a Displays menu bar item with System Overview as the menu choice Peol OpenEnterprise Desktop Main Display Desktop File Security Window Help Displays Dea ee System Overview _ Alternatively you could do what we re about to describe next which is to add a name in the menu in this case Filter Displays to group those menu items together If you ve already exited the Menu Editor call it up again by choosing the Displays item in the menu page of the OE Desktop Properties dialog box then click on the Edit button First we re going to create a separator in our menu To do this right click on the Menu icon and choose New Separator from the pop up menu This is optional you don t really have to have separators in your menus Menu Editor Pop up menu hierarchy i New Command New Group Copy Choose New Group Now we need to add a new group to our menu a new group 1s eee nu tel s nothing more than just a name for another part of the menu Pop up menu hierarchy SUES Menu New Command New Separator Click on the Menv icon again and choose New Group from the pop up menu The name New Group will now appear in the menu Copy B Type in 8 Menu Editor ackspace over that and
362. se Server software At the end of the installation process you are given the option of starting the Database Project Builder Instructions on using the Database Project Builder follow 3 2 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database How is the database built It may seem kind of funny to talk about building the OE Database because it makes it sound like a physical thing like a house Although you can t physically touch the OE Database it does in fact have a defined structure The way in which the OE Database is put together is also similar to building a house in that you have to follow a particular order of construction Any house that has an underground basement for example must have a foundation built first before other floors are constructed In the same way the tables of a database must be created before you attempt to put data values in them Just like a house must be built properly and periodic maintenance must be performed to keep it safe for occupancy the database must be built and maintained properly Back in Chapter 1 we explained that the OE Database consists of a large collection of tables which have various inter relationships defined We also said that the running OE Database contains real time data historical data and all the OE Server configuration data In this chapter we re going to use a tool called the Database Project Builder to create these tables and set it up to hold
363. se for OE Users condition number of records rows deleted Typically you optional would enter an expression here like WHERE value lt 20 Example Deleting a Signal So for example if you have a signal called RPC5 M1 TEMP IN in the database as shown in the portion of the database below sar cuca a a cea er en description pe SSS oS SSeS eS See See pe SS SSS SS Se eS Se ee RPCO SM PRES LN MOTORI PRESSURE RP CS2eMi TEMP e LNS MOTORI TEMPERATURE RECO MI e DESIN MOTORLI DIFF PRESSURE delete from realanalog_table where name RPC5 M1 TEMP IN COMMC would completely remove the signal RPC5 M1 TEMP IN from the realanalog_table Obviously you want to be very careful using this command Pata description t ee ea gS eg RP CosML e PRES LN MOTOR PRESSURE ARPO SMT DESIN l MOTOR DIFE PRESSURE Be really careful If you omit the FROM portion of the command and the WHERE portion you can obliterate the entire table Don t do that Always specify a FROM and a WHERE Example Using LIKE and the Wildcard in your DELETE Command You can also use wildcards in the DELETE command or the INSERT UPDATE or SELECT commands for that matter They are used with a modifier called LIKE In SQL the wildcard symbol not the we used earlier means that a particular portion of an expression can be anything For example
364. ser information it is better to create a larger number of logically thought out Displays should be designed to be clear displays than to try to cram lots of and easy to use Displays should not be information on a few displays and then overloaded with information force the operator to sort out what is important With these thoughts in mind here is a recommended approach for creating your HMI system 5 52 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Step 1 Plan out your display hierarchy The way your different displays fit together as part of your system is called the display hierarchy Generally at the top of the display hierarchy is some sort of startup or welcome screen It might include a map of your system or a menu screen Welcome to the Bristolvillle Water Treatment Facility Main Menu Current Alarms System Status Communications Display Display Status Display FILTERS l m OO PUMPS Overview Overview Display Display Filter 1 ee _ Filter 3 Pump 1 _ Pump 2 S Pump 3 Display Display Display Display Display Display A series of overview displays generally make up the next level of your hierarchy You might want to have one or more overviews of your process an alarm overview display a communications status display etc The
365. sesssseeeeeeeeeees 3 2 PO cc ert E aa een ener enn a eer me Nera eT stent nt sneer ener see ener reer ener tr reece errr tte 3 3 Starting the Database Project Builder casi ise carve asaasciennnersacesdenaietaiarctarsaancieenserteaeidaaeis 3 3 Uomo Danbee Pro ce BTE orere aE ENEE eae ker EEE 3 4 apec ine FIE LOCION geen ee On eee aiaa er aaa Eaa 3 4 Allowing Open Access to Database Tables During System Configuration 3 5 Incans iho Doral Secnrity Groupi eiaa 6 During Configuration You are the SYSTEM USET 3 7 Verifying that the Time Zope is COrm C scrcas ieee ven 2 8 ae HOW You Will Communicate with the Conirollers es eet err rr ree ee Your Choices and Building the Database PARES cxirstsisieoviersengvveeeonvstan 10 Iding 2 Signal Variable Tag Names to the Database Tables EP IEEE Creating Poll Lists for Data Collection PEE PEE EEEE PA E IE T eure Estimating the Maximum Database Size aspera eerie A E an 12 Configuring Historical Data C EE rennir iis 3 13 Configuring an OpenEnterprise TST cesececcccesssseeseee TY a a a a E Completing the Database Project Building Process aul Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to Find Data sssscccccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssees Fe What is the Database i serene OEE ENEE E EEA A A esas Dooe TOE i E E E errr nrrnre reer CfA Starting Database ios acre ena ne inset ee ee ee ee 2 Identify
366. sier by restricting the number of objects displayed in the Objects list box by entering a number in the Retrieve x Objects field If Prompt for Filter Before Querying Database is selected the Objects list box will be empty when the Logging Group Select Objects page is initially called up This push button allows the next set of objects in the database to be brought into the objects list box based on any filters set thereby allowing selections of objects for logging to be made This list box displays only those objects that have been specifically selected for logging To add an object to this list box click on its name in the Object list box then click on the gt gt push button To remove an object from this list box click on its name in the Logged Objects list box then click on the lt lt push button Then click on the Refresh button to refresh the Objects list box This push button allows all objects currently marked for logging to be displayed even if the object is not among those currently in view in the 6 30 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Objects list box When finished with this page click on the Next gt push button to go to the next page Logging Group Summary Page Okay We re almost done The Logging Group Summary Page displays all of the configuration choices you have made for this logging group and its associated dataset s Among
367. specify additional characteristics for the window Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop Open a file of that component type in the new Window Now you have a new empty window on your OE Desktop This window is configured exclusively for holding the type of OE component you specified If you try to include an OE component of a different type you ll get an error Peol OpenEnterprise Desktop Main Display Desktop File View Tools Security Window Help alarmtext occurencetime Y questionabletime loggedtime acknowledgedtime priority SYSTEM 10 52 AM A new window is created We named it Alarm Window but you could have entered any name you wanied It is docked to the bottom of the OE Desktop and is currently empty Click on File gt Open from the menu bar to include a file of the component type previously specified in the new window you created In our case we said this would be an OE Alarm View window so we need to insert a previously saved Alarm View file AC Choose the file you want to open then click on OK Open fx Look in Oo e amp Em My Recent Documents E Desktop Wa My Documents My Computer My Network Riles of type OE Alam Views ac v Make sure you are opening a file of the correct type In this case it must be an OE Alarm View AC OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop The file you select will be opened within
368. ss F1 100 inside the first box The the Data Source field in the Property second box represents Inspector Change the background the liquid in the tank Step 1 Using the Database Object Viewer construct an active query of the database which calls up the tank level signal data you are interested in from the realanalog table Leave the window open If you re not sure how to do this please read Chapter 4 Step 2 Open a display in the OE Graphics package and move it side by side with the Database Object Viewer window so that both windows are in view Step 3 Click on the box icon then move the cursor to the location where you want to add the tank Click and drag until you have created a box which represents the tank 5 18 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Next click and First click on drag the cursor the box icon until a box Is created Ra Display Opertnterprise by Bristol Fie Edit View ormak Arrage Draw Dynamics Te aah amp aain fe Arial J re OL J Color palette Step 4 Change the background color of the tank to black by Pomm clicking on black in the color palette while the tank is selected Alternatively you can right click on the tank and change both the Fill Color and the Line Color to black separately Step 5 Using the same method described in steps 3 and 4 create another slightly smaller box with a blue c
369. st box and use the Configure button to specify the actual display file File Path COE Store Displays Always Reload This File When you ve finished for each of the three filter displays your OE Desktop menu for the Filter Displays will now be complete You can use the same process for adding other menu items to the OE Desktop NOTE We ve used displays but you could have used the same basic method to load trend files alarm files etc Pe OpenEnterprise Desktop Main Display Desktop File Security Window Help Displays 7 o system Overview Deua Filter Displays Filter 1 Filter Filter 3 Note the separator _ added earlier Now the user can call up any of the filter displays from the menu Items we created e Save the desktop file using Desktop gt Save Desktop As OpenEnterprise for Beginners 9 15 Chapter 9 Using OE Desktop 9 16 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 10 Configuring Security for your system Why Establish a Security Policy A properly implemented security policy can help protect your system from accidental changes or deletions to configuration tables or other critical areas of the database We strongly recommend therefore that every System Administrator establish a security policy for all users of OpenEnterprise Server and OpenEnterprise Workstation s NOTE lf this is an all new OpenEnterprise system you probably want to wait until the system is
370. storical Data Set that includes the data you want to include on the report then click on Select Finally click on Next gt A OpenEnterprise Import History Create New Query Historical Data Set Select the dataset to view data from ey M Guerny Name control id 0 ev ntlog_table RealAnslogfinute samples with hourly and gaily compression realanalo Data Set 3600s Objects 86400s Query Period Transform Output and Data Formatting A Currently selected data set If you don t want all signals variables to be part of this query click on Named signals only and then click on Add Signals OpenEnterprise Import History Create New Query Signal Selector Select the signals to display Selected Signals Select the signals to be displayed elect all signals in the selected dataset or use the Add Signals opjfon to find the signals you require All signals Named signals orly Query Period Transform Output and Data Formatting Chapter 11 Creating Reports The Signal Browse dialog box will appear Enter some search criteria in the fields at the top of the page and click on Find Signals Signals variables meeting that criteria will be displayed Select the signals you want to appear on the report and click on Add Signals When you have ES Signal Browse First choose search criteria for the signals you want to include on the rep
371. t Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Example 2 Displaying A Numerical Value From the Database Process Point Open a display in the Switch to Runtime mode OpenEnterprise Graphics Construct a query using the Database Object Viewer y Qisplay1 OpenEnterprise by Bristol 3 2 Wih amp Arial i Database Object Viewer P PPP 2 asta IE Tables Conditions Parameters D204 P550051 FLOW HAYG D204 PS500B2 FLOW HAYG D204 55100T1 LE EL HHL D204 P5180 DENSTY A G D204 55100T2 LE EL HHL D204 55100T3 LEVEL HHL D204 55100T4 LEVEL HHL D204 P5815B1 VARS HAVYG D204 P5815B2 VARS HAYG D204 CLIENT2 INDEX D204 PS180 FLOW TOT D204 P06 START FREQ D204 P07 START FREQ D204 CLIENT1 COUNT D204 CLIENT2 COUNT D204 P06 MINFLW TIMI D204 P06 MINFLW TIM2 D204 P06 START HOUR D204 P06 SCHEME HIST D204 P07 START HOUR DB204 P06 COLRUN TIM1 es PSM OCH 0204 55100T4 LEVEL D204 PS260W1 LEVEL lt pess Objects 172 172 0 0 J Click and drag the value from the ane Database Object Viewer into the Data Source field in the Property Inspector dialog box This is called dragging an OPC Tag package Click on the approximate location where you would like the data to appear The z a aa a Property Inspector dialog nibh Rigi box will pop up Bia A PPT DE Defaut Pick Data Source J Drag Dr
372. t box then click on Add and they will appea in the Selected Attributes list box e If you are in Runtime Mode you need to go into Configure Mode by clicking on the Configure button e Right click in the center of the container and click on Properties when it pops up e The OE Alarm Client Control Properties dialog box will appear 5 10 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 8 Using Alarm Viewer to Manage Alarms e Click on the Attributes tab and the Attributes page will be displayed e By default all attributes are included You can tell whether or not a particular attribute is included by looking at the Selected Attributes list box Any attribute included is displayed there You can click on Remove All to remove all of the attributes and then add back only those you re interested in by selecting them in the Available Attributes list box and then clicking on Add e The left to right order in which attributes are displayed in the Alarm Viewer corresponds to the top to bottom order in which they appear in the Selected Attributes list box You can drag individual attributes within the Selected Attributes list box to adjust this order How do I know which attributes to include That really depends on the type of information you want Most people will want the following as a minimum occurencetime The time the alarm was generated name The name of the signal whic
373. t description MOTORL TEMPERATURE p where name RPC5 M1 TEMP IN pe commit This tells you which criteria you use for determining which records to update What this command says is to go to the table called signal_table find the records which have those signal names RPC5 M1 PRES IN and RPC5 M1 TEMP IN and change the contents of their description fields to say MOTORI PRESSURE and MOTORI TEMPERATURPE respectively Again the actual updating doesn t occur until the commit statement is executed After running these statements those attributes of the table will now look like this RPCOCMI PRES iN RPCSiM1 TEMP IN MOTOR1 PRESSURE MOTOR1 TEMPERATURE You should be careful when you re doing UPDATE commands For example what would happen if we ran these commands again but we left out the WHERE portion update signal_table set description MOTOR PRESSURE update signal_table set description MOTOR1 TEMPERATURE commit Think about it we re saying go to the signal_table and set the description attribute to MOTORI PRESSURE but we haven t limited it to any particular signal name so ALL of the description attributes for the entire table signal_table will be set to MOTORI1 PRESSURE Then since we have a second UPDATE statement which also sets the description attribute ALL the description attributes would then be set to MOTORI TEMPER
374. t eee eee the test is complete click on Close running for the test to proceed To see what the report looks like go to the directory you specified on the Report Configuration Publishing page and review the report to see that it looks the way you expect it should If it does continue on to Step 4 If it doesn t you should verify that the template is configured the way you want it and that you can successfully connect to the database OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 19 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Step 4 Create a Timed Schedule for the Report Right click on Schedules and choose New Report Now it s time to define when the report should actually Schedule or choose be generated Although it s possible to have it generated Edit gt New Schedule trom On Demand 1 e the operator requests the report when the menu bar they need it or based on the value of an OPC tag Report Configuration Tool typically reports are generated on a timed schedule so that s what we ll discuss now File Edit Help E i Report Configuration S A The Configured Reports BAA Pressure_Report 1 6 88 Templates aS foma MEE a i Recipients First let s create a schedule Click on Edit gt New Schedule or right click on Schedules and choose New Report Schedule from the pop up menu Schedule Configuration General On this page specify a Name for the schedule
375. t you are familiar with use of the drawing tools and how to make use of the topics in the previous examples such as creating a process point making an object change size based on an analog value etc Suppose your controller includes logic which allows an operator to adjust a setpoint for a tank level the operator alters the setpoint causing other logic controlling input and output valves to the tank to open or close in order for the tank level to reach the setpoint There are many ways to incorporate this operator setpoint within a display You could for example create a data entry process point see Making the Process Point changeable by the Operator on page 5 21 in which the operator manually enters a new setpoint Zi Display1 OpenEnterprise by Bristo Another approach which is the subject of this ee oe example is to create a sliding setpoint control which aadiy 2 4 BBR the operator drags on the screen to dynamically change Ce the setpoint as the value changes it is updated in the database and copied down to the RTU gt Step 1 Start out by creating a tank liquid level graphic which re sizes based on the tank level value In this case just show the level as a dark colored a bar on top of an identically sized lighter colored object The light colored bar underneath does not change only make the g dark colored object dynamic It would also be This bar will be a good idea to displ
376. t you understand how to query the database for information using the Database Object Viewer If you are unsure about how to do these things please review Chapter 4 The examples also assume you have already started the OE Graphics package that you have opened up a display that you know how to save it and how to switch back and forth between Configure mode and Runtime mode These subjects are discussed earlier in this chapter OpenEnterprise for Beginners 5 11 Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Example 1 Creating A Text Label on A Display m HEET OpenEnterprise by Bristol File Edit wiew Format Arrange Draw Dynamics Tools Runtime Help 260M 4 2 eah o A m HAE Arial k ont size ltalicize W While selected you can 7 change the appearance of Click on the Text icon the text with these controls a i E eCOMPRESSOR STATION NU m Click where you want to place the text and Start typing kassi els OEY Step 1 Either click the Text icon shown at right or click on Draw gt Text A Step 2 Click on the location in the display where you want to add the text label and start typing Step 3 To change the font size or style of the label select it and use the controls at the top of the screen 5 12 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Making Changes To An Existing Text Label If you want
377. table working with SQL and you just want to view the historical data you can query the raw or compressed table from which the original data came Depending upon the specifications of your query the system will automatically access the online Archive files if that s where the data you requested resides See Appendix A for details on using SQL 6 58 OpenEnterprise for Beginners What are Trends We hear and read about trends all the time in the news for example prices of some commodity are going down or the inflation rate is going up When you think about it all of these things are just measurements of some variable over a period of time That s basically what a trend is in OpenEnterprise It s a graphical representation of one or more variables signals over a given period of time Trends can include real time data historical data or both real time and historical data You might trend things like the amount of natural gas distributed through a particular pipeline or the amount of electricity used by a certain device The choice of what you trend is entirely up to you and you can trend just about any data from the OE Database Each signal displayed in a trend has its own dedicated trend pen When you define the trend pen you specify various characteristics of how the data from that pen will be displayed including the color what sort of symbol will be used to depict a sample of data etc The line that the pen
378. tation This sequence may have been modified however when OE Graphics was initially installed If you cannot find OpenEnterprise Graphics look for GraphWorX32 and start it instead After the splash screen has appeared the screen should appear as shown below with an all new empty display open Zi Display1 OpenEnterprise by Bristol File Edit View Format Arrange Draw Dynamics Tools Bein Help agai amp A 9 X m Gf Ge m gi o e an Ceara Arial v 10 J BU 2 3 c eo age a N D a g A A b w E Je B IE mOoOr m For Help press F1 x 389 y 161 100 Primary Layer Opening a Display Once OE Graphics is running you can choose to create an all new display or you can open an existing display 5 4 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process Opening An All New Display When you first start OE Graphics an all new empty display is opened automatically and the screen will appear as shown on the previous page If you already have other displays open however and want to create an all new display you can do so by clicking on the icon shown above or by clicking on File gt New An empty display will now be opened and you can begin to add graphic elements to it Opening An Existing Display To open a display which has already been created click on the Open icon shown above or click on File on ak EX gt Open yf otblank wizi05
379. ted In this case we want to select the table containing analog data values called E pekisepeonet realanalog Click on the Add push E peseralnargesameonsin E tered E ipd button are FES E eaba alaro e e a E a E inabakia ive alar E itabakia alaani 7 abenar E inakaa alaro eana ated charege alar ondin AN rer mern E i a E ibabad DER On the Attributes page of the Database Object Viewer click on the Name attribute in the Available Attributes list box then click on the Add push button Repeat this process for the Value and Units attributes oCOuNenceane Acuna 7 Plow Selection GE Cell Selection Dietik ti i i OpenEnterprise for Beginners 4 25 Chapter 4 Using Database Explorer to find data Step 3 Specify Conditions of the query On the i Conditions page of the re Database Object Viewer File Options Query Help Database Object Viewer we only want gouuag JENI tank levels which we know are in units Tables Conditions Parameters Joins Attributes SQL Filter Time Zone Objects C Auto run without conditions of FEET SO we will put a condition on Available Attributes Conditions readtriqger our query that units must equal FEET core resetalarmstatistics To do this click on units in the ae suppress Available Attributes list box then n paesengop click on the Ad
380. ted copies of that report Alarm Conditions i p _ Override Report Settings Do not purge Report Delete Published Report once it has been successfully distributed Delete Published Report following distribution regardless of any errgrs Delete Published Report after 8 Days V Delete Report Catalog entry on deletion 11 30 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Format Configuration Recipients On this page choose from the recipients you defined earlier in Step 5 and click on gt or gt gt to select them Then click on Next gt Click on the recipient that you want to receive this format of report then click on gt to select it Alternatively to select all the recipients click on gt gt Format Config uration Format Configuration Recipients This page is used tc define how and to whom the reports published using this Report Format are distributed Recipients Please select the Report Recipients to which published reports generated ufing this Report Format will be s distributed Recipi Alarm Conditions Available Recipients flected Recipients 3 ACCOUNTING_DEPT gi ppF gi BACKUP Click on Next gt when finished OpenEnterprise for Beginners 11 31 Chapter 11 Creating Reports Format Configuration Alarm Conditions Finally just as before you have the option of generating alarms if there are problems with the report Make your choices and the
381. the Archive Catalog the archive filenames are organized in the tree and have timestamps written out for example March instead of 03 When the archive files are stored on disk however they have more complicated names An example is explained below 1 Os 20000212233428 12345 0 arch g rt yyyyMMddHHmmSS time x where g is the historical group rt is the collection rate yyyy is the year MM is the month dd is the day of the month HH is the hours that time is the number of seconds in the archive file xis an incremental count continued OpenEnterprise for Beginners 6 55 Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Interpreting What the Archive Filenames Mean continued The timestamp yyyyMMddHHmmS is the start time of the archive file 1 e no data should appear before this date The time number of seconds in the archive file along with the timestamp will determine the bounding region of time that the archive file maintains The incremental count x should increase by a value of one after each archive If an archive file 1s generated and the database crashes restarting the database may start it with an older realtime dat This may have an older count and therefore you will find duplicate counts for the same file Taking an Online Archive File Offline Because of memory limitations you shouldn t keep more archive files online than you think you will need Online archive file names are preceded with
382. the segmented line tool then duplicate it by depressing the Ctrl D keys Now you have two objects change one object s fill color to be lightly colored to show the liquid level and the other object s fill color to be darker colored to represent the background Align the objects by dragging the cursor around them both to select them then click on Arrange gt Align gt Both Centers If necessary use the Bring to Front and Send to Back options to make sure the lighter colored object is on top File Edit view Format FEWER Draw Dynamics Tools Runtime Help 3 x amp Group Into Symbol Ctrl G e ow g qi am qe g Qt qr Arial Bring To Front Ctrl Shift PgUp BO ade Send To Back Ctrl Shift PgDn A ls Bring Forward Ctrl PqgUp a oe Send Backward Ctrl PgDn Rotate Flip gt Free Rotate 5 Tops Ctrl Shift T CA Space Evenly gt Bottoms Ctrl Shift B A Make Same Size gt Middles Ctrl Shift M M Lefts Ctrl Shift L k Rights Ctrl Shift R f m Both Centers o o Make two identical objects The EE lighter colored one will change size jE based on the analog value the m darker colored one does not change a Use the cursor to select both objects m then align them using the Align feature so that they appear as one single object with the lighter colored object on top 4 i a Ua w i t lE 3J FHE E Beale can a Jay BOOP e m Align Centers 100 Primary Layer 5 22 OpenEnterprise fo
383. them Now click on the Add Location button to add another new of Archive timed archive Archive Directories Online Archives C History Arch Files k Offline Archives C History Offline Arch Files Number of C Auto Archive ca on line Archive Files accessible V Automatically Online Archives 1 to the user Maximum Online Archives Archive Cataloguing We want to generate an archive file of the daily flow data every week This time we want to specify that the daily data gets archived on a weekly basis Specify a Start Time in the past and a Repeat Interval of Weekly Create new Timed Archive Start Time We specify that we want the Archive File generated at es ith 12 45AM every Sunday 12 15 plus a 30 minute Offsets offset Month Click on OK when finished Then click on OK again to exit the OpenEnterprise The flow data will be stored in Historical Configuration dialog box The daily dataset the archive file every Sunday is now complete at 12 45 AM NOTE 30 minute offset 6 48 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 6 Working with Historical Data Your datasets for 1 minute 1 hour and 1 day data are now complete Click on Next gt Logging Group Define Datasets Datasets control how often data will be logged and how long data will be kept online All historical streams require one dataset for storing raw sample data The raw dataset can be used to one
384. they perform various internal housekeeping tasks We are however going to list some of the tables that you re likely to make use of as you configure your OE system You don t have to memorize these now we re just listing them so that you get a feel for the sorts of things that get stored in the OE Database and so you might recognize the names later when you have to use them The Most Frequently Used Tables in OpenEnterprise Table Name s What is this used for Realanalog This table includes all the analog signal data collected from your process controllers It includes the signal s name the signal value etc Examples of the data stored in the Realanalog table would include pressure readings temperature readings flow readings etc Digital This table includes all the logical signal data collected from your process controllers It includes the signal s name the signal value etc Examples of the data stored in the Digital table would be valve OPENED CLOSED positions switch ON OFF statuses pump RUN STOPPED statuses etc Nw3000device This table contains information about the individual controllers in the OpenEnterprise for Beginners 1 5 Chapter 1 Introduction What is OpenEnterprise Nw3000polllist This table defines lists of signals to be collected from controllers Dvi_schedule This table defines the scan time classes used in poll list collection We ll discuss that subject later in this document Users Thi
385. ttle boxes you just created e Choose Dyamics gt Actions gt Pick to call up the Property Inspector dialog box e From the Pick page of the dialog box choose Load Display from the Actions list box then use the Browse key and Browse Files to locate specify the display you want to have loaded when the operator clicks on that particular link in the Overview display Johnson Corners Rolling Forest State Park l Cliff Rock e Hunte Town Lake View Route 103 By default the left mouse button is used when clicking Property Inspector Symbol Pick Action_ Load Display Mouse Left Button Choose Load Display Filename C Program Files BristolBabo i Set Aliases Key Shortcut None Delete Specify the display esn oo to be loaded Description i lt ci BN Custom Data Custom F aie OK Cancel Apply Help e Click on OK when finished then test it in Runtime Mode Clicking on the little box should bring up the specified display Repeat this process for each additional link 5 40 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 5 Building Displays to Mimic Your Process What Now Well we ve really only scratched the surface on the subject of display building There are numerous other dynamics actions you can configure The best way to learn about them is to experiment Try things out play with the example
386. u are specifying the width of each sample For example if the X axis width is 900 pixels and you choose 1 pixels per sample then you can have up to 900 samples displayed on the screen at any one time If however you chose 3 pixels per sample then each sample would be 3 pixels wide and you could only display a maximum of 300 samples on the screen at any one time Using Pixels per Sample results in the lowest resolution type of trend 1 e it displays the least amount of data and so will be the fastest to be displayed OpenEnterprise for Beginners 7 39 Chapter 7 Trending Your Data If you choose Samples Per Pixel you are specifying the number of samples to be represented at each pixel position For example if the X axis is 700 pixels and you choose 1 sample per pixel the trend will collect 700 samples and display each one at a particular pixel position on the X axis If you choose a number greater than 1 say 5 samples per pixel the trend will try to display 5 samples at each pixel position along the 700 pixels of the X axis that s 3500 samples You might ask how can it display 5 samples at one pixel position Well the first of the 5 samples is plotted and then the remaining 4 samples will be shown at their appropriate Y axis positions though with the same X axis position In other words there will be a vertical line of pixels at each pixel position and the points along that line represent the 5
387. u choose this you must You can choose a different name start the session manually from the default if desired Database Project Builder OpenEnterprise Database Project Builder Session You may create a Session for your OpenEnterprise Project tofrun in Do you wish to creat a new Standalone Session to run the d 4base This option Causes the session A Session allows you ip run additional applications alongside the database to be started automatically 7 Add a new Spssion whenever Windows is started Whaj would you like to gail your Sessipe men This creates a shortcut Pay AEE in the Windows startup Run partially folder This creates a shortcut on the Windows desktop Resisjg lt s a WindopeService A to Startup folder Final 7 Create a shortcut on the Desktop When checked will V Start when Wizard finishes Cause the session to start immediately after Corea He you exit the Database Project Wizard Click on Next gt 3 16 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 3 Building the OpenEnterprise Database The Session Tasks page allows you to choose which software programs tasks will be started as part of the OE session The Selected Tasks box lists all tasks currently included in the session The Available Tasks box lists tasks which could be added to the session Use the gt button to add programs to the session or the lt button to remove programs from the session
388. udes all of the analog signals collected from your RTUs This would include things like flows temperatures and pressures that have been collected from process variables The source table is usually going to be either Realanalog_table or Digital_table Most people don t need to log anything Digital_Table this table includes all of the logical from any other table signals collected from your RTUs This would include ON OFF statuses of pumps OPENED CLOSED statuses of valves all collected from process variables Figuring out how often you want to log the data Logging data at a pre set rate Generally people choose to log data at a particular rate The type of data you want to log often dictates how frequently you want to log it If you have critical flow or pressure information you might want to log a reading every minute for a total of 60 samples per hour If you are looking at levels of water in a tank which don t change often maybe you only want to log the level once an hour for a total of 24 samples in a day Think carefully about what your system requirements are because this will affect the size of your log files and the rate you consume disk space Logging data on exception You may also have certain data that you only want to log when a certain event occurs For example you might only want to log data when the value of a particular signal changes In that case there needs to be some sort of tri
389. ue are stored as Edit Condition Choose greater than 1 0 So in this case we need to PA eae than orequalta 4 yi or equal to for the create an expression which says Comparison value 1 0 Operator When the Questionable attribute is Betum value Choose 1 0 for the greater than or equal to 1 0 make Ba Comparison value the trace yellow Yellow is the Return value when that Call up the color palette and select yellow for the condition is TRUE Return value since that s what we want the trace to be when Questionable is TRUE i e when Questionable is gt 1 When you ve finished with the Edit Condition dialog box click on OK 7 32 OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 7 Trending Your Data Your expression is now complete OEExpressionEditor Base Settings Now whenever that expression is TRUE the trace color will change to yellow Otherwise it will be the color specified by Default Return Value Tag Default Return Value Conditions ae IF greater than or equal to 1 0 return E After specifying the condition you can click on OK to exit the Expression Editor Then continue to click on OK until you exit all the dialog boxes and are ready to go into Runtime Mode Modify Ranae m oT Click on OK to exit the Expression Editor If the value of the signal is Questionable you will see the trace change color
390. uring Controllers to Work with OE Preparing a ControlWave Project to work with OE As mentioned earlier for any variable in a ControlWave project to be collected into the OE Database it must be designated as one of the following 1 An alarm variable 2 A global variable 3 An RBE variable Requires ControlWave firmware 04 40 or newer Specifying an Alarm Variable in a ControlWave Project OpenEnterprise for Beginners In your ControlWave Designer project each variable which you want to serve as an alarm must have its own alarm function block configured The alarm function blocks available are ALARM ANALOG ALARM_ STATE ALARM_LOGICAL_ON and ALARM LOGICAL_ OFF Descriptions on how to configure these function blocks are included in the ControlWave Designer online help and in the ControlWave Designer Programmer s Handbook document D5125 An alarm condition can only be detected at the time its Alarm function block is executed The alarm variable must be marked for OPC collection as well within the worksheet This is discussed in the section Specifying a Global Variable in a ControlWave Project 2 7 WATER_TEMP_ALARM_DISAELE WATER_TEMP WATER _H H_ LIMIT WATER _H_LIMIT WATER L LIMIT WATER LL LIMIT WATER HDB WATER LDE CRITICAL_PRIORITY HOM _ CRITICAL PRIGRITY NOM CRITICAL PRIORITY CRITICAL_PRIORITY TEMP _UNITS WATER TEMP DESC TEXT Check the OPC box for each variable you
391. val mininterval offset and disable Currently the table has three records each of which has those five attributes f f scheduleid maxinterval mininterval offset disable f f 1 O1 JAN O001 00 00 05 NULL NULL NULL 254 O1 JAN OOO1 00 00 05 NULL NULL NULL 2 OL JAN 000L 01200200 NULL NULL NULL f Whenever a particular attribute of a record is not defined or has no value it is labeled NULL For example if we had a record describing a person and that person had no middle name then the middlename attribute would be set to NULL Please Remember A DATABASE is just a big collection of tables An ATTRIBUTE is just the name heading of a column in one of the tables A RECORD is just a row of a table Another word for this is OBJECT A single piece of data in the database is a VALUE for a particular attribute of a particular record If no value has been assigned the value is NULL 1 4 Open
392. y Period Transform Output and Data Formatting Enter a name for the query This nam will be used to identify the query throughout fhe report Query Nahe For each query you have the option of overriding the selection you made earlier for the data service You can also test the connection to the database from this page Click on Next gt to continue OpentEnterprise Import History Create New Query Dataservice Enter the dataservice of the database Daz Objects Query Period Transform Output and Data Formatting Enter the dataservice address of your OpenEnterprix Server list e g hosta rtrdb1 hostb rtrdb1 To run a rgfort using the server append the dataservice withthe _ Override default dataservice OpenEnterprise for Beginners Chapter 11 Creating Reports Now we come down to selecting the actual historical data we want to include on the report If you remember from Chapter 6 historical data is grouped into data sets Click on the data set that contains the data you want to display in this query and click on the Select button then click on Next gt On the Create New Query Signal Selector page you can choose to either query all signals variables in this dataset or you choose only to query certain signals Generally you would only want certain signals Click on Named signals only and then click on Add Signals OpenEnterprise for Beginners Choose the Hi
393. y will appear Untitled OEContainer File View Configure Help Oe amp i timestamp 11 JUN 2007 14 20 34 502 11 JUN 2007 14 18 49 345 11 JUN 2007 14 18 48 564 11 JUN 2007 14 18 48 095 11 JUN 2007 14 18 48 064 11 JUN 2007 14 18 27 001 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 994 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 994 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 994 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 964 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 964 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 964 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 704 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 704 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 704 deleted FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE description Client Connection 127 0 0 1 Client Connection 127 0 0 1 Client Disconnection 127 0 0 1 SYSTEM has Logged ON to Workstation 127 0 0 1 Client Connection 127 0 0 1 Inserted calendar event Standard The Password has been changed for user PUBLIC The Password has been changed for user SYSTEM Inserted calendar event Standard The Password has been changed for user PUBLIC The Password has been changed for user SYSTEM Inserted calendar event Standard The Password has been changed for user PUBLIC The Password has been changed for user SYSTEM 8 12 name occurencetime 127 0 0 1 11 JUN 2007 14 20 34 127 0 0 1 11 JUN 2007 14 18 49 127 0 0 1 11 JUN 2007 14 18 48 127 0 0 1 11 JUN 2007 14 18 48 127 0 0 1 11 JUN 2007 14 18 48 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 PUBLIC 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 SYSTEM 11 JUN 2007 14 18 26 11 JUN 2007 1
394. ytestfile SQL update signal_table set description MOTORIL PRESSURE Where irane ReECS S Mke BRES tN update signal_table set description MOTORIL TEMPERATURE where name RPC5 M1 TEMP IN COMM mytestfile SQL Then in the SQL Client you can run this file just as if you were typing it in by including it using the INCLUDE command SQL gt include mytestfile This will have the exact same result as if you entered it manually in the SQL client What are the advantages of using SQL files instead of typing commands in directly There are several reasons why SQL files are more useful than just typing commands in directly e nan SQL file you can easily correct mistakes because you re using a text editor It also gives you the opportunity to check things over carefully before you actually run the file e You have all the advantages of the text editor for example you can Cut and Paste Find and Replace etc That allows you to generate large amounts of SQL statements quickly because you can re use text from earlier statements e Perhaps the biggest advantage in using SQL script files is that you have a record of what commands were performed This allows you to go back and identify problems if it turns out you have a configuration error in the OE Database It also allows you to re issue those commands at some time in the future if you need to re build some part of your OE system A 18 Ope

Bristol OpenEnterprise For Beginners

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents